PA 2087 

A4765 
Copy 1 







AHN'S 



COMPLETE 
LATIN SYNTAX. 



BY 



Dr. P. HENN. 



I 



&> 




NEW YORK: 



E. S T E I O E 11 & C 



I 



I 



fgBgB&fe^ ^^^^g 



fife 



— V 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



@|ap. ©ojajriglirf !f o> 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



Steiger's Latin Series, 



AHFS, 3- 






COMPLETE 
LATIN SYNTAX. 



BY 

Dr. P. HENN. 



2 I 

■u 



i I v 







^OFWASH^ C 



NEW YORK: 

E. S T E I G E R & C 

1883. 



Ml 



REQUEST. 



The undersigned, in their efforts to secure the greatest 
possible correctness in their educational publications, will feel 
obliged for the suggestion of improvements in this volume. 

12. Steiger & Co., Publishers, 



Copyright, 1883, by E. Steiger & Co. 



Press of 
& Steiger <fc Co., JY. T, 



PREFACE, 



The present Complete Lathi Syntax which forms a part of 
AHN-HENN' S Latin Course, is designed to meet the wants of 
advanced students. While the systematic study of Syntax has been 
provided for in the author's Latin Grammar and Third Latin 
Book with special regard to those who are preparing for college, 
in the present volume the aim has been to furnish a fuller exposition 
of those matters which are merely hinted at in the elementary books; 
or, in other words, to provide a full course of Latin Syntax which 
may be used at once as a text-book for the class-room, and a book 
of reference in study. 

The points which have received particular attention and in the 
statement of which great pains have been taken are the following: 
to set forth the facts and laws of Classical Latin (as established by 
the best authorities, Caesar and Cicero) just as they are in 
themselves; to describe clearly and accurately the real difficulties 
of Latin construction, to put the rules into a form which will be as 
concise as possible and still remain clear and simple, and to illustrate 
them by carefully selected examples which are given without the 
usual mutilations, and, withal, to guide the student as readily as 
possible to the Latin Authors themselves by teaching grammar, 
not as if it were worthy to be studied on its own account, but only 
as the means to an end. A superior Index and judicious 
typographical arrangement enable the student to find readily what 
he needs. 

The Manual of Latin Prose Composition which has been 
prepared to accompany this volume, is designed to give a complete 
review of Latin Syntax, illustrated by examples selected from the 
classical writers, the written exercises being introduced by model 
sentences for oral practice, and accompanied with full references 
to the Complete Latin Syntax, and a Vocabulary. 

Ill 



TABLE of CONTENTS 



Thh Sentence , Page 1 

Syntaocis convenient iae 1 

Subject and Predicate 1 

Attribute and Apposition 6 

Agreement of Pronouns 9 

Construction of Cases 11 

Genitive. Subjective 11 

Objective 11 

Of Quality 12 

Partitive 13 

With Adjectives and Participles 16 

With Verbs of Memory, &c 18 

With Verbs of Valuing, Accusing 19 

With esse, fieri, Impersonate 20 

Accusative. Direct Object 23 

With Intransitive Verbs 23 

With Compound Verbs 24 

In Exclamations 26 

Used adverbially 27 

Two Accusatives 27 

Dative. Indirect Object 31 

With Intransitive Verbs 31 

With Adjectives 32 

Of Advantage 34 

Ethical 34 

Dative or Accusative 35 

With Compounds 35 

With Verbs of giving ' 37 

Of Possession 3S 

With Gerunds and Gerundives 39 

Two Datives 3D 

Ablative. Adverbial Relations 40 

Of Cause 40 

Of Means and Instrument 42 

Of Limitation 44 



— VI — 

Of Manner Page 44 

Of Measure 45 

Of Comparison 46 

Of Price 47 

Of Separation 47 

Of Plenty and Want 50 

With opus est 51 

With Adjectives and Deponents 52 

Time and Place 53 

Use of Prepositions 5^ 

Place. Names of Towns 60 

Space , 64 

Time (jo 

Special Uses of Substantives 68 

Special Uses of Adjectives , 70 

Positive 70 

Comparative and Superlative. . : 73 

Special Uses of Pronouns 74 

Personal and Possessive 74 

Demonstrative , • 74 

Determinative 76 

Relative 78 

Interrogative and Indefinite. . 80 

Syntax of the Verb 82 

Tenses. Distinction 82 

Periphrastic Conjugation 86 

In Dependent Sentences 86 

Of the Indicative 86 

Of the Subjunctive. — Sequence of Tenses 88 

Exceptional Sequence of Tenses 91 

Moods. Indicative 94 

Subjunctive: In Principal Sentences ; 95 

In Dependent Constructions 97 

Consecutive and Final Conjunctions 97 

Temporal Conjunctions 106 

Causal Conjunctions 109 

Conditional Conjunctions Ill 

Concessive Conjunctions 115 

Comparative Conjunctions 117 

Relative Clauses with Subjunctive 118 

Indirect Questions 1 21 

Imperative. 121 



— VII — 

Infinitive Page 124 

Accusative with Infinitive. .. 126 

Nominative with Infinitive 133 

Interrogative Sentences ■ 139 

Oratio Obliqua 146 

Reflexive Pronouns 150 

Reciprocal Pronouns 152 

Participles. Distinction of Tenses 152 

Attributive Use 154 

Future Participle 156 

Ablative Absolute 157 

Gerund and Gerundive 160 

Genitive 162 

Dative... 163 

Accusative 164 

Ablative 164 

Without, how to be translated 165 

Synopsis 166 

Gerundive as Predicate Accusative 168 

Supines 168 

Use of Co-ordinating Conjunctions 170 

Copulative 170 

Disjunctive 174 

Adversative 176 

Causal 177 

Illative 178 

Copulative Correspondents 179 

Disjunctive Correspondents 179 

POETICAL FORMS. 

Prosody , 180 

Quantity. General Rules 180 

Middle Syllables 181 

Final Syllables 183 

Monosyllables ' 184 

Compounds 185 

Figures of Prosody 185 

Essentials of Versification 187 

Feet Rhythm 187 

Dactylic Hexameter 190 

Elegiac Pentameter 191 

Iambic Trimeter 191 



— VIII — 

Compound Verses Page 191 

Metres of Horace 193 

Index to the Metres of Horace - . 197 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

The Roman Calendar 199 

Roman Money, Weights, Measures 202 

Abbreviations ' 203 

Principal Latin Authors 204 

Index of Subjects . . 207 



COMPLETE LATIN SYNTAX, 



The Sentence. 

1. Syntax treats of the Agreement, Government, 
and Disposition of words in sentences. Sentences are 
of three kinds: 

Assertions, or Statements, as: consuetudo est altera natura, 
custom is second nature. 

Questions, as: quid est levlus pluma? what is lighter than a 
feather ? 

Commands (demands, wishes), as: divide et impera, divide 
and rule. 

The Assertive Sentence, as it is called, is the main type of all 
sentences, and the other two will be treated as variations of it. 

Syntaxis Convenientiae. 

Subject and Predicate. 

2. Every simple Sentence is composed of two 

parts: Subject and Predicate. 

The Subjeot signifies that about which the assertion is made; the 

Predicate signifies that which is asserted of the Subject In the 

sentence* 

aurum splendet, gold glitters, 

aurum is the Subject; splendet the Predicate. 

3. The Subject may be a Substantive or Pronoun, or 
some other word or words having the value of a Sub- 
stantive, as: 

arbor floret, the tree is blossoming, 

hie laetatur, ille maeret, this one rejoices, that one is sad, 
errare humanum est, to err is human, 

opportune accldit quod advenisti, it happened fortunately that 
you came. 



1. The Subject is generally omitted when it is a Personal Pronoun, 
unless it is emphatic, as for instance in contrasts, thus: 

amamus parentes, we love our parents, 

vos manetis, ego abeo, you stay, I am going away. 

4. The Predicate is commonly a Verb (Verbal Pre- 
dicate); but it may also be an Adjective or Substan- 
tive (Adjective or Substantive Predicate) with the 
auxiliary esse which couples the Adjective or Sub- 
stantive with the Subject, and is therefore called the 
Copula, thus: 

arbor est viridis, the tree is green, 

arbor est decus horti, the tree is the ornament of a garden. 

5. The Subject of the sentence is in the Nominative 
Case, or so considered, thus: 

arbor viret, the tree is green, 
arbor est procSra, the tree is tall. 

6. The Verbal Predicate agrees in Person and 
Number with its Subject, thus: 

ego valgo, si vos valetis, I am well, if you are well, 
labuntur anni, years roll on. 

7. When the Predicate is not in form of a Verb, the 
Copula agrees with its Subject in Person and Number. 

8. The Adjective Predicate (Adjective, Adjective 
Pronoun, Participle) agrees in Gender, Number, and 
Case with its Subject, thus: 

nix est Candida, snow is white, 
columbae sunt timidae, doves are timid, 

1. When the Subject is an Infinitive or a Clause, the Adjective Pre- 
dicate is in the Neater Singular, thus: 

turpe est allud loqui, aliud sentire, it is base to say one thing and to mean 

another, 
mihi pergratum est, quod librum ad me misisti, it is very pleasing to me that 

you sent me the book. 



2. A Superlative in the Predicate, when defined by a Partitive 
Genitive, follows the Gender of the Subject when this precedes, as: 
elephantus est omnium bestiarum maximus, the elephant is the largest of all 
animals; 
but when the Subject follows, the Superlative may take the Gender of 
the Partitive Genitive, thus: 
velocissTmum animal turn delphlnus est, the dolphin is the swiftest of creatines. 

9. The Substantive Predicate agrees with its Sub- 
ject in Case; Substantives with different terminations 
for the Gender (substantlva mobilia) are treated as 
Adjectives, and follow the Number and Gender of the 
Subject, as: 

pulvis et umbra sumus, we are dust and shadow, 

Rornani fuerunt populus fortissimus, the Romans ivere the bravest 

nation, 
aquila est regina avium, the eagle is the king of birds, 
AthSnae sunt omnium doctrinarum inventrlces, Athens is the in- 

ven tor of all bra n ch es of lea mi n g . 

1. When referring to a Subject of the Neuter Gender, a Predicate 
Substantive with different terminations for the Gender is always in 
the Masculine Gender, as: 

tempus est vitae magister, time is the teacher of life. 

2. When the Predicate Substantive is of the Common Gender, an Ad- 
jective qualifying it takes the Gender of the Subject, thus: 

bona conscientia est tutisslma comes hominum, a good conscience is the safest 
companion of men. 

3. As a rule, the Copula agrees with the Number of the Subject, as: 

captivi milltum praeda fuerunt, the prisoners were the prey of the soldiers, 
but sometimes with the Number of the Predicate, thus: 
amantlum irae am oris integratlo est, lovers' quawels are love's renewal. 

This is regularly the case when an Infinitive is made the Subject, 
thus: 

contentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt divitTae, to be contented tcith 0)/e's lot 
is the greatest riches. 

4. When the Predicate Substantive differs in Gender from the Sub- 
ject, a Participle (of the Passives dicor, habeor, videor), added to the 
Copula, takes the Gender of the Nominative which is nearest to it, 
thus: 

paupertas mihi semper onus visum est. poverty always appeared to me to be 
a burden. 



_.;4' — 

10. Verbs taking a Predicate Adjective or Sub- 
stantive are called Copulative Verbs. Such are, be- 
sides esse, to be, the Verbs: fieri, exsistere, to become; 
evader e, to turn out; videri, to seem; apparere, to ap- 
pear; manere, to remain; nasci, to be bom, and the 
Passives of Verbs which take in the Active a double 
Accusative (below 57), as: creari, to be created; dellgl, 
to be chosen; piitari, to be thought; Jhaberl, to be held; 
dici, to be said; appellarl, to be called; nominari, to be 

named, as: 

nemo nascitur dives, no one is born rich, 

Servlus Tullius rex est declaratus, Servius Tullius was declared 
king. 

1. esse is sometimes joined with an Adverb, when it means to be 
in a condition, as: 

apud me omnia rectissime sunt, icith me it is all right. 

11. The Predicate of a Collective Substantive often 

agrees with its Subject in Number and Gender according 

to its natural relation, and not to its grammatical 

form. This is called Kara obveatv, according to the sense, as: 

pars per agros dilapsi, pars urbes petierunt fmitimas, a part dis- 
persed through the fields, apart made for the neighboring cities. 

1. This construction is found with milia when men are under- 
stood, as: 

caesi sunt hostium duo miiia ducenti, 2200 of the enemy were slain, 
but it is never used with coptae, auxilia, legiones. 

2. It is not seldom that a Substantive in the Singular joined to an- 
other by the Preposition cum, takes a Plural Yerb, as: 

ipse dux cum aliquot principibus capiuntur, the leader himself with some princes 
icas taken prisoner. 

12. The Predicate of two or more Subjects is put in 
the Plural Number, as: 

jus et injuria natura dijudicantur, right and wrong are distin- 
guished by nature. 



— 5 — 

But two or more Subjects taken either conjointly as a 
unity, or separately each by itself, may have a Singular 
Verb, as: 

religlo et fides anteponatur amicitiae, let religion and faith be 

p referred to frien dsh ip, 
Conon plurlmum Cypri, Iphicrates in Thracla, Chares in Sigeo 

vixit; Conon lived mostly in Cyprus, Iphicrates in Thracia, 

and Chares in Sigeum. 

1. Sometimes the Verb agrees with the nearest noun and is under- 
stood to the rest, as: 

naves et praesidium excessit, the fleet and garrison departed. 

2. When a Verb has two or more Singular Nominatives connected by 
et..et; nee. nee; aut..aut; veL.vel, it better agrees with them in 
the Singular than in the Plural, as: 

si Socrates aut Antisthenes diceret, if Socrates or Aniisthenes should say. 

IS. With two or more Subjects of the same Gender, 

the Adjective Predicate is of that Gender, as: 

pater et films mortui sunt, father and son are dead, 
mater et soror mortuae sunt, mother and sister are dead, 
justitla et amicitia per se ipsae expetendae sunt, justice and 
virtue are to be sought for their own sake. 

But Abstract Nouns of the same Gender may have a 

Neuter Predicate, as: 

temeritas et inconstantia fugienda sunt, rashness and inconstancy 
are to be shunned. 

14. When the Genders of the Subjects are different, 

the Adjective Predicate takes the Masculine Gender if 

the Subjects arc things with life, and the Neuter, if 

they are things without life, as: 

pater et mater mortui sunt, father and mother are dead, 
divitiae et honores incerta et caduca sunt, riches and honors are 
uncertain and, perishable. 

1. Sometimes an Adjective Predicate agrees in Gender and Num- 
ber with the nearest Subject, as: 
factus est strepltus et admurmuratto, a noise and, assent were made, 



— 6 — 

15. When things ivith life and things without life 

are combined, the Adjective Predicate takes either 

the Gender of the things with life or is Neuter, as: 

rex regiaque classis una profecti sunt, the king and the king's 
fleet set out together, 

n at ura inimlca sunt libera civ it as et rex, a free state and a king 
are natural enemies. 

10. When the Subjects are of different Persons, the 

Verb is Plural, and takes the first Person rather than 

the second or third, and the second rather than the 

third, as: 

ego et tu vicissitudinem fortdnae experti sumus, you and I have 
experienced the vicissitude of fortune. 

1. In Latin the speaker generally mentions himself first; so Car- 
dinal Wolsey, in conformity with the Latin idiom, wrote: 

ego et rex meus, I and my king* 

2. When the Subjects are of different Persons, the Yerb may 
agree with one and be understood with the others, as: 

P. Sextium quanti fa cere debeam et tu et omnes homines sciunt, how much I 
ought to make of P. Sextius you and all the world know. 

Attribute and Apposition. 

17. An Attribute is that which is added to a Sub- 
stantive to describe it. The forms of the Attribute 
are : 

I. The Substantive, 

11. The Adjective and its equivalents. 

1. When the Attribute is a Substantive, it is in the Genitive (27), 
or in the Ablative of quality {SO. 1.) or it is governed by a Pre- 
position, as: 

virtus eontinentlae, the virtue of self-control, 

paella turpictllo naso, the girl with the ugly nose y 

excessus e vita, departure from life. 



18. A Substantive used to describe another, denot- 
ing the same thing and being in the same Case, is 
said to be in Apposition with the other Substantive, as: 

Herodotus, pater historiae, Herodot, the father of history, 
luxuria et ignavla, pessimae artes, luxury and sloth, the worst 

of vices. 
1. But a Substantive is also often joined to another as an Attribute, 
and is then really used as an Adjective, thus: 

homo senex, an old man, 
multer ancilla, a servant-maid. 

19. The word in Apposition agrees with the prin- 
cipal word in Case, as: 

Socratem, sapientisslmum virum, Athenienses interfecerunt, the 
Athenians murdered Socrates, the wisest of men. 

But the Number may be different, as: 

quattuor hie, primum omen, equos vidi, I saw here four horses, 

the first omen, 
Tullia, deliciae nostrae, mortua est, Tullia, our delight, is dead. 

In Gender and Number agreement takes place, if the 
Apposition has different forms for different Genders, as: 

philosophia, vitae magistra, philosophy, the teacher of life, 

Athenae, omnium doctrinarum inventrices, Athens, the discoverer 
of all learning. 

1. Generally, the Predicate agrees with the principal word; but in 
names of towns with oppidum, urbs, civitas as Appositives, the 
Predicate agrees with the Appositive, as: 

Corioli oppidum cap turn est, the town of Corioli was taken. 

20. Apposition is frequent in Latin with Substan- 
tives denoting rank, age or trade where in English we 
should use a clause introduced by as* or when, as: 

Cato senex historlas scribere institiiit, Cato began to write history 

when he was an old man. 
1. But when the Apposition is used in a limiting or causal sense, 
it is introduced by tit, so far as, in as much as, thus: 

multae in Catone, ut in Romano, littSrae erant, for a Roman, Cato had much 
learning, 



— 8 — 

And in like manner, when the Apposition is equivalent to a clause of 
comparison, ut or tamquam, as, must be employed before it, as: 

Lycurgus auri argentlque usum, tamquam omnium scelerum materiem, rustulit, 
Lycurgus abolished the use of gold and silver as the source of all crimes. 

21. Adjectives or Participles may also be used in 
Apposition to a Substantive. The commonest of them 
are such as describe the state or circumstances of the 
Subject, us: volens, ivilling(ly) ; nolens, unwillingly); 
libens, with pleasure; invitiis, against one 1 s will; pru- 
dens, aware; imprudens, unawares; — likewise, Ad- 
jectives denoting time and order, as: primus, prior, 
first; ultlmus, last; medius, in or about the middle; 
hodiernus, to-day; matutmus, in the morning; fre- 
quens, frequently) — also, totus, ivholly; solus, alone; 
uniis, only. The English often uses the Adverb or 
adverbial expressions for the Adjective, as: 

Socrates venSnum laetus hausit, Socrates cheerfully drank the 
poison, 

senatus frequens convSnit, the senate assembled in great numbers. 

1. The Adjectives primus, solus, uniis, and many others de- 
noting order, are often best rendered by a relative clause, as: 

Tyriorum gens litteras prima ant docuit aut didicit, the Pnentcians were the 
first who either taught or learned letteis. 

2. In this use, prinius must be carefully distinguished from the 
Adverbs primum, first, for the first time, and primo, at first, as: 

ego primus hanc orationem legi, I was the first who read this speech, 

hanc orationem primum legi, deinde transcripsi, I first read and then copied this 

speech, 
hanc orationem primo libenter legi, postea magis magisque mini jejuna visa est, 

at first I read this speech with pleasure, but afterwards it seemed to me drier 

and drier. 

22. The most usual Attribute of a Substantive is 
an Adjective (including under this term the Adjective 
Pronouns and Participles); it agrees with its Sub- 
stantive in Number, Gender and Case, thus: 



— 9 — 

Gender. Number. 

a white flower flos albus flOres albi 

a dark cloud nftbes opaca nubes opacae 

a golden vessel vas aureum vasa aurea 

Case. 
Gen. floris albi, of a white floiver 
" niibis opacae, of a dark cloud 
" vasis aurei, of a golden vessel 

The Common Attribute of two or more Substantives 
is either repeated or agree3 with the nearest, as: 



omnes agri omniaque maria 
agri omnes et maria 
agri et maria omnia 
omnes (et) agri et maria 



agri omnes et maria 

n . . « w > all lands and (all) seas. 

agri et maria omnia ' 



Agreement of Pronouns. 

23. The Relative agrees with its Antecedent in 

Gender, Number and Person, but the Case depends on 

the clause in which it stands, as: 

Caesar ad Ariovistum legatos misit, qui ab eo postularent, ut all- 
quern locum medium utriusque colloquio deligeret, Caesar sent 
deputies to Ariovistus who were to ask him to select some place 
between the two for an interview. 

1. When the Relative refers to a sentence, id quod is commonly 

used, as: 

gloria invidiam vicisti, id quod est difficilllmum, you have overcome envy with 
glory, which is most difficult. 

2. The (render and Number of the Relative may be determined by 
the Apposition, as: 

Humeri Scaldis, quod influit in Mosam, the river Scheldt which empties into the 
Maas. 

3. The Gender and Number of the Relative may be determined by 
the sense, especially with collective nouns, as: 

Caesar omnem equitatum praemittit, qui videant, Caesar sod all the cavalry 
ahead, who should see. 

4. With Antecedents of different Gender the Relative Pronoun con- 
forms in (lender to the rule for Adjectives (see 14), as: 

pugri et mulie'res, qui c&pti sunt, the boys and women who had been taken i>i t- 
sonera. 



_ 10 _ 

24. A Relative generally agrees in Gender with 
a Predicate noun in its own clause when it is explan- 
atory of the Antecedent, or presents an additional 
thought, as: 

Thebae, quod Boeotiae caput est, Thebes which is the capital of 

Boeotia, 
Pompejus^ quod imperii lumen fuit, Pompey who was the light of 

the empire. 

But a Relative which restricts the general notion of 

the Antecedent to & particular sense, agrees with the 

Antecedent, as: 

Cassivellauni fines a maritlmis civitatlbus (lumen dividit, quod 
appellatur Tamesis, that river which is called Thames sepa- 
rates the territory of Cassivellaiinus from the maritime states. 

1. A Yerb agreeing with a Relative is put in the Person of 
the true Antecedent even when a Predicate of the third Person 
intervenes, as: 

tu es is, qui me ad caelum extulisti, you are he that extolled me to the skies. 

2. Combined Persons conform to the rule for Verbs (1 6), i.e. the 
Pronoun prefers the first Person to the second ? and the second to 
the third, as: 

ego et tu, qui eodem anno nati somas, you and I who were born in the same 
year. 

25. A Relative, Demonstrative, Determinative or In- 
terrogative Pronoun, being the subject or object of a 
clause with a Predicate Substantive, agrees with the 
Predicate Substantive in Gender and Number, as: 

idem velle atque idem nolle, ea demum firma amicitla est, to have 

the same likes and dislikes that indeed is true friendship, 
sapientiam Stoici earn interpretantur, quarn adhuc nemo mortal is 
est consecutus, the Stoics explain that thing to be wisdom which 
no man ever yet attained. 
1. But if a Question is as to the definition of a certain thing, the 
Interrogative Pronoun does not agree with the Predicate Substantive, 
but is Neuter, as: 
quid est amrau9 ? what is the mind? 



— 11 — 

Construction of Cases. 

GENITIVE. 

26. The Genitive is especially the Case of a Sub- 
stantive that is added to another Substantive in order 
to limit or define its meaning. 

27. If the qualified Noun signifies some action or 

condition of which, if it were expressed by a Verb, 

the noun in the Genitive would be the Subject, the 

Case is called a Subjective Genitive, as: 
amor Dei, the love of God, (= God loves) 

1. The Subjective Genitive is to be distinguished from the Appositive 
Genitive which is used instead of a noun in apposition, especially with 
vox, word; nomen, name; verbu.ni, word, as: 

virtus continentiae, the virtue of self-control; voxvoluptatis, the word "pleasure" . 

28. If the Genitive would be the Object of the 
action expressed by the other noun in Yerb-form, we 
call it an Objective Genitive, as: 

amor Dei, love of God, love toward God (= we love God). 

1. Both Genitives, the Subjective and the Objective, may be con- 
nected with the same Substantive, but then the Subjective Genitive 
comes first, as: 

quanta sit aviditas hominnm talis victoriae scio, how great the eagerness of men 
for such a victory is I know. 

2. The English Genitive with of is used either subjectively or ob- 
jectively. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, the Prepositions for, toward, 
and the like are often substituted for the Objective Genitive. So also 
in Latin, Prepositions are used with nouns of feeling, as: amor erga 
Deum, love toward God, and especially when the governing noun 
is accompanied by a Possessive Pronoun or a Subjective Genitive, as: 

tuns erga me amor, your love to me, 

voluntas provinciae in CaesSrem, the good-will of the province toward Caesar. 

3. The Genitives nostri and vestri of the Personal Pronouns 
are commonly Objective, while nostrum and vestrum are used as 
Partitive Genitives (31); thus: 
mellor pars nostri, the better part of our being — amor nostri, love to us, 
major pars nostrum, the greater part of us — multi nostrum, many ofu$ % 



— 12 — 

With omnium the forms nostrum, vestrfim must be used, as: 

patria communis est parens omnium nostrum, our country is the common parent 
of all of us, 

4 The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Subjective Geni- 
tive of the Personal Pronoun, as: 

amicus meus, my friend (the friend ichom I have) , 
desidermm tuum, your longing (the longing which you feel). 

But an Attribute or Apposition (Substantive or Adjective) is added 
in the Genitive, as: 

nostra omnium patria, the country of us all, 
mea solius opera, by my exertions alone. 

Sometimes, however, the Possessive Pronoun is used as the Objective 
Genitive of the Personal Pronoun, as: 

mea injuria, injury to me; fiducia tua, confidence in thee. 

29. The Subjective Genitive is used with the Abla- 
tives causa, gratia, for the sake of; ergo, on account, 
which commonly follow the Genitive, as: 

tu me amoris magis quam honoris servavisti gratia, thou didst 
save me more for love's than for honor's sake. 

1. For my, thy, Ms, &c. sake is: mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, 
causa (never gratia); for my own sake, mea ipslus causa (28. 4.) — 
sua causa is only used in a reflexive sense; otherwise we say: ejus, 
illius, eorum, illorum causa, for his sake, &c, as: 

beneficium est, quod quis non sua causa dat, sed ejus cui dat, a benefit is that, 
which some one gives not for his own sake, but for the sake of him to xohom 
he gives. 

2. Notice also: instar, after the fashion of, like, as good as, 
ivorth, with the Genitive, as : 

Plato mihi unus instar est omnium, Plato alone is in my eyes worth them all. 

SO. The Genitive is used to denote Quality, but 
only when the quality is modified by an Adjective 
or its equivalent, as: 

Socrates, vir magnae sapientiae, Socrates, a man of great wisdom, 
tridui (— trium ciieruai) via, a three days 1 journey. 



— 13 — 

Accordingly, a man of talent is homo magni ingenii, 

or homo ingeniosus, but not: homo ingenii. This 

Genitive is either attributive or in the predicate 

position with esse or fieri, as: 

vir magni ingenii, a man of great talent, 

vir est magni ingenii, the man is one of great talent. 

1. A Substantive designating Quality may be either in the Geni- 
tive or in the Ablative, but it must be accompanied by an Adjective 
or its equivalent, as: 

Tbyum, honnnem maximi corporis terribillque facie, Thyus, a man of mighty 
stature and frightful figure. 

2. The Genitive of Quality is used of Number, Measure, Time, Space; 
accordingly, whenever a Numeral Adjective is added to the Substantive, 
the Genitive is proper, as: 

puer decern annorum, a boy ten years of age, 

Xerxis classic mille ducentarum navium longarum fait, Xerxes' fleet consisted of 
1200 men of tear. 

3. The Ablative of Quality is used: 

a) Of incidental or transitory qualities, as: 
esto bono ammo, be of good chew, 

b) Of parts of the body, as: 

Britanni sunt capillo promisso, the Britons have long hanging locks, 

c) When instead of the Adjective, the Genitive of a Substantive de- 
noting a certain size or measure is joined to the Substan- 
tive, as: 

clavus digtti crassitudlne, a nail of the thickness of a thumb. 

Si. The Genitive stands for the Whole of which a 
Part is named (Partitive Genitive), as: magna vis mill- 
tum, a great number of soldiers. 

32. The Partitive Genitive is used with Substantives 

of Quantity, Number, Weight, such as: Humerus, copia, 

pars, multitude), acervus, &c, thus: 

Crassus habuit magnum villarum et servorum numerum, Crassus 
had a great nuviber of country houses and slaves. 



— 14 — 

33. The Partitive Genitive is used with Compara- 
tives and Superlatives , as: 

Gallonim omnium fortisslmi sunt Belgae, the Belgians are the 
bravest of all the Gauls. 

1. The Partitive Genitive may also be used with the Superlative 
of an Adverb, as: 

Aquitania plurimum totius Galllae cquitatu valet, Aquitania is strongest in 
cavalry of all Gaul. 

34. The Partitive Genitive is used with Numerals 
definite as well as indefinite, as: uter, alter, neuter, 
uterque; ulliis, nullus, nemo, quisquam; quis, qui- 
cunque. quisquis, quisque; nonnulli, multi, pauci, 
quotusquisque, &c, as: 

quis mortallum sine vitlis natus est? ivhich of mortals was born 

ivithout vices? 
Tarquinlus septlmus atque ultlmus regum Romanorum fuit, Tar- 

quin was the seventh and last of the kings of Borne. 

35. The Partitive Genitive is used with the Neuter 
Singular of Adjectives and Pronouns, but only when 
they are in the Nominative or in the Accusative not 
dependent upon a Preposition. Such are: 

tantum, so much quantum, as allquantiim, somewhat 

tantundem, just so much 

muitum, much plus, more plurimum, most 

pauliim, little minus, less minimum, least 

nihil, nothing dlmidlum, half rellquum, the rest 

hoc, this Id, illud, that allquld, something 

quod and quid, which and what, with their Compounds, 
dimidlum faeti qui bene coepit habet, well begun is half done. 

1. The Partitive Genitive is not admissible with a Preposition or 
any other ease than the Nominative or Accusative; hence we say: 
multo sanguine, not, multo sanguinis, much blood; ad muitum diem, 
not, ad muitum diei, far into the day. 



— 15 — 

36. The Partitive Genitive is used with a few Ad- 
verbs used substantively, viz: satis, enough; parum, too 
little; nimis, too much; affatim, abundantly, enough, as: 

Cimon habebat satis eloquentiae, Cimon had eloquence enough. 

1. Notice especially the expressions: 
satia magna pecunia, money enough; satis multum aurum, gold enough; 
satis magnae coplae, troops enough; satis multi milites. soldiers enough; 

which are much more common than satis militum, &c. 

37. The Partitive Genitive is used with the Adverbs 

of place: ubi, where; ublcunque, wherever; nusquam, 

nowhere; usquam, anywhere; but in this connection 

only the Genitives gentium, terrarum, loci, are found, 

thus: 
ubi terrarum esses ne suspicabar quidem, I did, not even suspect 
where in the world you were. 

1. hue, eo, quo, when used to express a degree are joined 
also with other Genitives, as: 

hue arrogantlae processit, he got to that pitch of presumption, 

2. Observe the phrases: 

quod (quoad) ejus fieYi potest, as far as if can be done; quod (quoad) ejus facere 
possum, as far as I can do so. 

38. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals, 
Comparatives and Superlatives (33. 34), the Ablative 
may be employed with ex*, out of; de, from; or the 
Accusative with inter, among, as: 

acerrlmus ex omnibus sensibus est sensus videndi, the keenest 
(out) of all the senses is the sense of sight. 

1. A Preposition must be used when the Noun denoting the 
whole is either a Numeral, or a Substantive with a Numeral, as: 

de tribus hoc extreraum, this last of three, 

nulla de plurimis virtutibu* tuis, none of your eery many virtues. 

2. With Gnus, ex or de is the common construction, as: e piu- 
ribus unum, one of many. But when anus corresponds to alius or 
alter, the Partitive Genitive is used, as: 

Gallia est omnis divlsa in partes tres, quarum unam incSlunt Belgae, allam Aqui- 
tani, tertiam Galli, Gaul as a ichole is divided into three parts of which the 
Belgians inhabit one, the Aquitanians the other, the Gauls the third. 



- 16 — 

3. Numbers including the whole of any thing, or when no others 
are thought of, take a Case in agreement, and not the Partitive Geni- 
tive, hence: multi niilites, many soldiers; and multi militum, many 
of the soldiers, in contrast to others. This distinction is especially 
to be noted in many phrases where the English employs a Partitive 
Genitive, as: 

cave inimlcos, qui multi, sunt, beware of your enemies of whom you have 

many, 
quot sunt liostes? hoiv many of the enemy are there? 

4. With Substantives, uterque, either (both) agrees as an Adjec- 
tive; with Pronouns, it always takes a Genitive, as: 

uterque consul, either consul — both consuls; 
he-rum uterque, both of these. 

5. A Possessive Pronoun with or without a Substantive, when 
joined to a Numeral, either agrees with it in Case, or is put in the 
Ablative with de or ex, as : 

nostri circiter septuaginta ceciderunt, of our men about seventy felly 
multi ex nostris vulnerabantur, many of our men were wounded. 

6. Neuter Adjectives of the Second Declension can be used as Sub- 
stantives in the Genitive Partitive (Singular), not so Adjectives of the 
Third, as: aliquid boni, something good; allquicl memorabile, some- 
thing memorable. When Adjectives of both Declensions are com- 
bined, the first Adjective determines the Case for both, as: 

nihil humlle, nihil abjectum, nothing low, nothing abject, 
nihil solidi, nihil eminentis, nothing solid, nothing prominent. 

But we may also say: aliquid novum, nihil solidum, &c, and we 
can only say: nihil aliud, nothing else. 

7. The Partitive construction is not admissible even with Neuter 
Adjectives of the Second Declension when something depends on 
them, as: 

nihil sua fide indignum fecit, he did nothing unworthy of his fidelity. 

8. The following Idiomatical Phrases also belong to the Partitive 
Genitive: 

nihil reliqui facere, to leave nothing, 

aequi boni facere > fo me fa d 

aequi bonique facere ) 

aliquid dicionis suae facere, to bring under one^s power. 

39. Adjectives denoting Desir e,Knoivledge, Memory , 
Participation, Power 1 Fulness, and their Opposite^ are 
followed bv the Genitive. 



_ 17 - 

Desire. Memory, 

cupidus, eager memor, mindful 

avidus, greedy immemor, unmindful 

studiosus, zealous of devoted to 

fastidiosus, contemptuous Participation. 

Knowledge. particeps, sharing in 

peritus, skilled consors, partaking of 

gnarus, practised affmis, sharing in 

prudens, knowing expers, without share in 
conscius, conscious 

imperltus, unskilled Power. 

compos, in possession of 



!^ rus i ignorant 
inscius 



imprudens, ignorant Fulness, 

rudis, unskilled plenus, fall 

insuetus, unused mops, needy 

insolens, unaccustomed inanis, void 

bestiae rationis et orationis expertes sunt, animals are devoid of 
reason and speech, 

semper fragilitatis hunianae sis memor, he always mindful of 
human frailty. 

1. For the construction of vacuus and refertus see below 
87. 2. The following Adjectives admit of a different construction: 
juris peritus or jure peritus, juris consultusor jure consultus, skilled 
in law; conscius sum aliciijus rei, lam aware of something; con- 
scius mi hi sum rei, I am conscious to myself of a thing. — prudens, 
knowing, and rudis, unskilled also take the Abl. with in, as: rudis 
in jure chili. 

2. The poets and later writers use many other Adjectives of 
kindred meaning (dives, fecundus, capax, tenax, fterax) with the 
Genitive, as: 

integer vitae, scelerisque purus, spotless of life, and pure of guilt. 

3. Especially to be noted is the Genitive animi which is added 
to Verbs and Adjectives of feeling, as: aeger animi, sick at heart. 
But the only instance of this usage in Cicero is: animi pendeo, lam 
in suspense. 

40. Many Present Participles of transitive Verbs 
when used to denote a permanent quality, and not a 



— 18 — 

particular act, take the Genitive. Thus, vir patriam 
amans, is a man (then) loving his country; vir patriae 
amans, a patriot. The commonest of these Parti- 
ciples are: 

amans, fond diligens, careful neglegens, neglectful 

appetens, desirous efficiens, efficient patiens, enduring 

colens, respectful fugiens, shunning sitiens, thirsting 

Epaminondas adeo erat veritatis diligens, ut ne joco quidem 
mentiretur, Epaminondas was so careful of truth, that he did 
not tell a lie even in jest 

41. Verbs of Reminding, Remembering, Forgetting 
take the Objective Genitive to denote the person of 
which any one reminds himself or another, or which 
he forgets; and the Genitive or Accusative to denote 
the thing. 

admonere \ raeminisse ] 

commonSre v to admonish reminisci v to remember 
commonefacere i recordari I 

oblivisci, to forget . 

memini vivorum, I am mindful of the living, 

obliviscere caedis atque incendiorum, turn your mind from 
slaughter and conflagrations, 

animus meminit praeteritorum, the soul remembers the past, 

omnes gradus aetatis recordor tuae, / call to mind all the periods 
of your life. 

1. All these Verbs take the thing in the Accusative, if expressed 
by a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective, as: discipulos hoc unum moneo, 
I give pupils this one piece of advice. Y erbs of Reminding also 
take the Ablative with de to denote the thing, as: oro, ut Terentiam 
moneatis de testamento, I beg you to remind Terentia of the will. 

2. With memiiii the Accusative is always used of a person re- 
membered by an eye-witness, as: Antipater, quern tu probe memi- 
nisti, Antipater whom you remember very well. Recordor is al- 
most always construed with an Accusative, to denote the thing, and 
with de and the Ablative to denote the person. 



— 19 — 

3. Mihi in mentem venit, it comes into my mind, may be con- 
strued impersonally with the Genitive, or personally with a Neuter 
Pronoun as Subject, as: 
venit mihi in mentem Platonis, the recollection of Plato comes to my mind; 
quae mihi veniebant in mentem, existimavi me ad te oportere scribere, I thought 
I should write to you what came in my mind. 

42. Verbs of Valuing are construed with the Geni- 
tive of General or Indefinite Value. ISuch are: 

aestimare, to value faeere, to make, put putare, to reckon 
dueere, to take habere, to hold esse, to be worth 

pendere, to weigh 
Scisne, multos homines virtutem pluris aestimare quam ipsam 

vitara? Do you knoiv that many men esteem virtue of more 

value than life itself? 

1. The following are Genitives of general value: 
magni, much quanti, how much 
par vi, little plurimi, maximl, most 
tanti, so much minimi, least 

pluris, more nihlli, naught 

minoris, less floccl, a lock of wool, a straw 

2. The Complete Phrases are then as follows: 
parvi pendere or aestimare, to esteem lightly, 
magni esse, to be of great account, 

pluris esse, to be of more account, to be worth more. 

nihlli dueere, to think nothing of 

magni aestimare or habere, to value highly, 

pluris aestimare, to esteem of more value, 

plurimi aestimare, to value very highly, 

minimi faeere, to make of very little account. 

flocci faeere, to care a straw for. 

3. Observe the phrases: nihlli faeere, habere, ducSre, pendere, 
esse, — but commonly, proniliilo putare, dueere. —Est mini tantum, 
with an Infinitive, means: it is worth while — operae pretlum est, as: 

est mihi tantum hujus invidlae odium subire, it is worth while to 

bear this storm of odium. 

4. When aestimare or putare is equivalent to taxare, to set a price 
upon, it is construed like a Verb of buying, (see below 85). 

43. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning and 
Acquitting take the Genitive of the Charge or Penalty. 



— 20 — 

accusare \ coarguere j to 

incusare ( to accuse, convincere f convict 

insimulare C charge 

arguere J damnare ( to condemn, 

arcessere ) condemnare \ find guilty 

reum facere >- to summon 

postulate ) absolvere, to acquit 

haec duo levitatis et infirmitatis plerosque convincunt, aut si in 
bonis rebus contemnunt anricos aut in malis deserunt, these two 
things convict most persons of inconstancy or weakness: if 
they despise a friend- in prosperity or desert him in adversity. 

1. The crime may be expressed by the Ablative with de, so es- 
pecially with postulate, as: 

accusare, postulare allquem de vi, de repetundis, de veneficio, to accuse one of 
assault, of extortion, of poisoning. 

Notice: accusare de vi, inter sicarlos, to accuse of assault, assas- 
sination. 

2. The punishment, when expressed by a Substantive either with 
or without a Numeral, is in the Ablative, as: 

Camillus absens quindecim milibus gravis aeris est damnatus, Camittus while 
absent was fined 15,000 asses heavy, money. 

In some phrases the Ablative as well as the Genitive of thecJiarge and 
punishment may be used, as: 

accusare capitis or capite, to bring a capital charge, 
damnare capitis or capite, to condemn to death; 

mul tare, to mulct, punish, is always construed with the Ablative. 

44. The Subjective Genitive of Nouns denoting per- 

sons (or Abstract nouns put in their stead) is used, 
in connection with the Verbs esse and fieri, to point 
out such a person's property or peculiarity, as: 

omnia, quae mulieris fuerunt, viri fiunt nomine dotis, all that wo* 
the wife's property becomes the husband's under the name of 
dowry. 

1. In English the words part, property, duty, office, business, 
characteristic, are commonly added. Instead of the Genitive of the 
Personal Pronouns, met, tin, &c. the Neuters of the Possessives are used, 
as: mentiri non est meum, to lie is not my way. 



— 21 — 

2. This Genitive is often equivalent to a Predicate Adjective: sttilti or 
stultitlae est = stultum est. But the Genitive is the regular con- 
struction in Adjectives of the Third Declension, as: sapientis est, it 
is the part of a wise man, it is wise; insipientis est, it is foolish. 

3. This Genitive also stands in the Predicate after Passive Verbs, 

thus: 

tempori cedere semper sapientis est habitum, to yield to circumstances has al- 
ways been held to be the part of a wise man. 

45. Certain Impersonal Verbs take the Person who 
feels in the Accusative, and the Exciting Cause in the 
Genitive, or if a Verb, in the Infinitive, viz.: 

miseret, it excites pity pudet, it shames 

paenitet, it causes sorrow taedet ) . , 

T-. ./j. j • t. ,r it wearies, tires. 

piget, it disgusts, grieves pertaesum est \ 7 

The Persons are expressed as follows: 
miseret me, I pity paenitet me, I am sorry, repent 

miseret te, thou pitiest piget me, lam grieved at, dis- 

mlseret eum, he pities gusted with 

miseret nos, we pity pudet me, I am ashamed 

miseret vos, you pity taedet me I I am weary, 

miseret eos, they pity me pertaesum est ) tired. 

hos homines infamlae suae neque pudet neque taedet, these men 
are neither ashamed nor weary of their dishonor. 

L An Infinitive may be used with these Impersonals instead of 
the Genitive of a Noun, and with paenitet also a clause with quod, as: 
me paenitet haec fecisse, I repent of having done this; 

Quintum paenitet quod animnm tuum offendit, Quintus is sorry that he has 
wounded your feelings. 

2. Pudet is also used with the Genitive of the person whose presence 
excites the shame, as: 

pudet me deorum bominumque, it is a shame in the sight of gods and men. 

3. With paenitet, piget, pudet, the Accusative of a Neuter Pronoun 
must be used instead of the Genitive, as: 

sapiens nihil facit quod paenitere possit, the wise man does nothing to repent of. 

4. Like miseret me, the personal Yerb miseren, to pity, takes the 
Genitive, as: miserere sororis, pity thy sister. Miserari, to bewail, 
deplore, is a transitive Yerb governing the Accusative. 



_ 22 — 

46. With the Impersonal interest (and sometimes 
also with refert) it concerns, interests, it is the interest 
of it is of importance for, the Genitive is used to denote 
the Person or Thing concerned, as: patris interest, it is 
a father's interest. 

1. The Genitive seems to be governed by causa understood; hence 
instead of the Genitive of the Personal Pronoun the Ablative Singular 
Feminine of- the Possessives: mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra is used 
with these Yerbs, as: mea interest, I am concerned] with omnium, 
however, nostrum and vestrum must be used, as : omnium 
nostrum interest, it concerns all of us. For the difference of sua 
and ejus see 29. 1. 

47. The Thing which is of interest or importance is 

expressed: 

a. By a Neuter Pronoun, as: hoc vehementer interest reipublicae, 
this is of very much importance to the state; 

b. By an Infinitive (the Subject remaining the same), as: interest 
omnium recte facere, to do right is the interest of all; 

c. By an Accusative with the Infinitive (the Subject being different), 
as: multum mea interest te diligentem esse, it is of great im- 
portance to me that you are diligent; 

d. By an Interrogative Sentence, as: multum mea interest utrum dill- 
gens sis necne, it is of great importance to me whether you 
are diligent or not 

48. The Degree of importance is expressed: 

a. By Adverbs, as: magnopere, magis, maxime, minime, parum; 

b. By Neuter Adjectives, as: multum, plus, plurimum, permultum, 
tantum, quantum, aliquantum, nihil, aliquid, non multum (little), 
minus, minimum; 

C. By Genitives of Value, as: magni, permagni, parvi, nihili, tanti, 
quanti, of Comparatives and Superlatives only pluris is used. 

1. The thing with reference to which one is interested, is expres- 
sed by the Accusative with ad, as: 

magni ad honorem nostrum interest quam primum nos ad urbem venire, it is of 
great consequence to our honor that we should come to the city as soon as pos- 
sible. 

2. Refert seldom occurs with the Genitive, occasionally with mea, 
tua, etc., and most frequently without either such a Pronoun or a 
Genitive, as: nihil refert, no matter; quid refert, what matter? 



— 23 — 
ACCUSATIVE. 

4=0. The Accusative is the Case of the Direct Object 

of a transitive Verb. It answers the question Whom? 

or What? to express some person or thing on which 

the action is exerted, as: 

Deus inundum aedificavit, God built the world, 

Scipio Carthaginem delevit, Scipio destroyed Carthage. 

1. The Object of a transitive Verb in the Active Voice becomes its 
Subject in the Passive, and is pat in the Nominative, as: 
Carthago a Scipione deleta est, Carthage urns destroyed by Scipio. 

50. Many Verbs are Intransitive in English which 
are both Transitive and Intransitive in Latin. These 
are : 

a. Verbs of feeling: 

dolgre, luggre, maerere, flSre, gemere, lamentari, as: casum ali- 

cujus dolgre, to grieve at some one's calamity; 
queri, conqueri, as: injufias conqueri, to complain of wrongs; 
horrgre, reformidare, as: crimen ingrati animi horrere, to shudder 

at the crime of ingratitude; 
fastidire, as: fastidlre preces alicujus, to disdain some one's 

prayers; 
ridere, as: inconstantiam hominum ridere, to laugh at the fickle- 

ness of men. 

Of these Verbs only ri<l£o is used in the Passive, as: ridetur ab omni con- 
ventu, he is laughed at by the whole assembly; but all of them have a Gerundive, 
as: dolendus, &c. 

b. Verbs of taste, smell, and the like: 

olere, redolSre, to smell; sapere, resipere, to taste; si tire, to thirsty 
as: vinum redolens, smelling of wine. 

51. Many Intransitive Verbs take an Object- Accusa- 
tive in certain peculiar constructions, viz: 

a. When the Object is of the same origin or of kindred meaning 
with the Verb, and attended by an Attribute, as: vitam jucundam< 
vitam exsulis vivere, to live a pleasant life, to live an exile's life; 
longam viam ire, to walk a long way; 



_ 24 — 

b. When the Object is a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective, as: hoc tibi*as- 
sentlri non possum, herein I cannot agree with you; unum omnes 
student, all strive after one thing; non possum idem gloriari, lean- 
not make the same boast. /See 41. 1.) 

52. Many Intransitive Verbs of motion, such as Ire, 
venire, vadere, graqll, curr ere, volar e, fluere, scandere, 
become Transitive by composition with certain Preposi- 
tions, and take the Accusative. This is regularly the 
case with: circum, per, praeter, trans. Examples are: 

circumire tentorla, to go from tent to tent, 

cireumvenire hostes a tergo, to surround the enemy in the rear, 

circumsedere urbem vallo, to surround a town with a rampart, 

pervadit rumor Graeciam, a rumor went forth through Greece, 

praeterire hortos, to pass by the gardens, 

aliquid silentio praeterire, to pass something over in silence, 

transire Alpes, to cross the Alps, 

modum transire, to exceed moderation, 

transcendere muros, to scale the walls. 

1. Transitive Verbs compounded with trans, viz: transducere, trans- 
jicere (trajicere), transportare take two Accusatives, one depending 
upon the Verb, and the other depending upon the Preposition, as: 

Agesilaus copias Hellespontum transjecit, Agesilaus threw his troops across the 
Hellespont. 

The Accusative dependent upon the Preposition remains when the 
Verb is changed to the Passive Voice, as: 
exercitus a Caesare Rhenum transjectus est, the army teas thrown across the 
Rhine by Caesar \ 

With an additional statement of the Place whither, the Preposition 
trans is repeated, or the Ablative is used, thus: 

Ariovistus multitudlnem trans Rhenum (Rheno) in Galliam transduxit, Ario- 
xistus led a multitude across the Bhi?ie into Gaul. 

53. When compounded with other Prepositions 

(especially, ad, cum, m\ some of these Intransitives 

become transitive, commonly with a tropical meaning, 

and take the Accusative. Such are: 
adire ad aliquem, to go to a man, 
adire ad urbem, to approach a city, 
adire urbes, oppida, terras, to visit cities, towns, countries, 



— 25 — 

adire pericula et labores, to undergo dangers and hardships, 

coire societatem, to make an alliance, 

inire magistratum, to enter an office, 

iirire rationem, to make an estimate, 

inire proelium, to engage in battle, 

inire consilium, to engage in a plan, 

inire societatem, to form an association, 

oblre terras, raaria, to travel over lands and seas, 

res suas oblre } . .. , A , , 

, . > to attend to one's business. 
negotium obire ) 

diem supremuni oblre, to meet one's last day (to die), 

mortem oblre, to meet one's death (to die), 

subire labores, invidiam, poenam, dolorem, to take upon one's self 

(to submit to) hardships, envy, punishment, pain, 
aggredi (adoriri) hosteni, to attack the enemy, 
aggredi ad dicendum, to begin to speak, 
aggredi ad rempublicam, to enter upon public service, 
ingredi iter, to set out on a journey, 
ingredi orationem, to begin a speech, 
convenire aliquem, to go to see some one, to meet some one (also 

in the Passive), 
convenire cum aliquo, to agree with some one, 
convenit aliquid alicui, something is fit for somebody, 
convenit aliquid ad aliquid, something is fit for something, 

convenit mihi tecum de aliqua re ) ., . . n 

»,..«•* f something is agreed upon 

res convenit mihi tecum >- ^Zm 

« .. . . i between us, 

res convenit inter nos ) 

antelre aliquem, to surpass some one (used in the Active only). 
antecedere and praecedere, to surpass, excel, are construed both 

with the Accusative and with the Dative, 
antecellere, excellere, praestare, to surpass, excel, take the Dative 

only (Cicero); excellere, only the Dat. Plural, 
excellere and praestare also take inter, as: excellere inter omnes, 

to distinguish one's self above all; — with florere, praeter is 

used, as: florere praeter ceteros, to be distinguished, more than 

the rest. 

But most Compounds of these Prepositions take either 
the Dative, as: timor incedit patribus, fear seizes the 
fathers, or the Preposition is repeated, as: invadere in 
hostes, to attack the enemy. Compounds of ex (egredl, 



— 26 ~ 

excedere,exire) are construed with ex, extra (beyond), 
or with the Ablative (see 86). Instead of excedere 
modum, to go beyond bounds, Cicero uses: transire 
modum, or extra modum prodire. 

54. The Accusative is used after the Impersonate: 

falllt, fugit, praeterit, 

decet atque dedecet. 

fallit me J it escapes my decet me, it becomes me 
fugit me >- notice, it is dedecet me, it is unbecoming 

praeterit me ) unknown to me forme 

non me fallit plerosque homines emolumento magis quam ipso offi- 
cio duci, it does not escape my notice that most men are more 
influenced by profit than by duty itself. 

1. An Infinitive or a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective (rarely a Substan- 
tive) may be used as Subject of decet or dedecet, as: 

mulierem decet flere, it becomes a woman to weep, 
parvum parva decent, small things become the small. 

Nisi me fallit, is used as a parenthesis, equivalent to: ni fallor, if I 
am not mistaken. In good prose, latet, it is unknown, is used ab~. 
solutely, without any Object-Case. 

55. The Accusative, commonly in connection with 
an Attribute, is used in Exclamations, either with or 
without the Interjection or heu, as: 

fallacem hominum spem, the deceitful hope of men! 

1. An exclamation in the Vocative is used when a person or thing 
is directly addressed, as: 

Tiberine pater, te sancte precor, father Tiber, thee holy one I pray. 

2. The ' Interjections hei! and vae! take the Dative, as: vae 

victis, woe to the conquered! 

3. With en, lo, and ecce, lo here, behold, the Nominative is used, 
as: ecce homo, behold the man! 

4. With pro (proh), the Vocative is used, as: pro di immortales, 
ye immortal gods! The Accusative occurs in connection with fides, 
as: pro deum hominumque fidem, for heaven's sake! 



— 27 - 

50. Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives are used ad- 
verbially in the Accusative, as: aliquantum, aliquid, 
somewhat; summum, at most; nihil, nothing, in no 
respect. 

1. These Accusatives are joined to certain Verbs to denote in 
what respect or to what degree the action is exhibited, as: multum 
te dillgo, 1 love you very much; nihil, in no respect, thus used is 
an emphatic negation, as: nihil mov£or, I am not at all moved. 

57. In like manner the Accusative is found in a 
few adverbial phrases, as: magnam or maxlmam par- 
tem, to a great extent; id genus, of that kind; id tem- 
poris, at that time] id aetatis, of that age, as: 

forum id teniporis omni turba vacuum erat, the forum was at that 
time free from all tumult 

58. Verbs denoting: 

a. to name or call, appellare, nominare, vocare, dicere; 
to make y appoint, choose, facere, efficere, reddere, 
creare, deligere, eligere, declarare, designare; 

b. to hold, regard, esteem, ducere, existimare, habere, 
numerare, putare, judicare; 

c. to have, give, take, leave, assume as, habere, dare, 
addere, sumere, adsumere, adsciscere, relinquere; 

d. to show one's self, se praebere, se praestare, 
may have two Accusatives of the same person or thing: 

a, Ancum Marclum regem populus creavit, the people made 
Ancus Marcius king, 

iram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae, well did Ennius call 
anger the beginning of madness, 

b. senatus Antonium hostem judicavit, the senate declared An- 
thony an enemy, 

Persae solem unum deum putavSrunt, the Persians thought the 
sun the only god, 



_ 28 — 

c. Atheniensibus Pythia praecepit, ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem 
sumerent, the Pythia instructed the Athenians to take Miltiades 
as their commander, 

d. praesta te virum, show yourself a man. 

1. Some Verbs of similar meaning follow the same construction, 
as: intellegere, interpreted, significare, to understand; cognoscere, 
to recognize, know; invenire, reperire, to find; inscribere, to en- 
title; as: - 

semper te amicum fidelem cognovi, I have always known you as a faithful 

friend, 
liber qui inscribitur Laelius, the book which is entitled Laelius. 

2. redder e, to make, is only used with Adjectives and in the 
Active; in the Passive fio, I become, is used in its stead. Especially 
to be noted is: allquem certiorem facere de re, or aliciijus rei (not 
reddere), to inform one of a thing. 

3. To make one from something something else, is facere ex, as: 

Alexandri amlci reges ex praefectis facti sunt, Alexander s friends from com- 
manders were made kings. 

4. Among the Verbs of electing the following Idiomatic Phrases 
deserve special notice: 

dictatorem dicere senatorem legere virginem Vestalera capit 

flammem prodere . in senatum legere ponttfex maximus. 

cooptare augurem nominare augurem 

5. To be considered, thought, is haberi, duci, putari; but of the 
two last-named Verbs the compound tenses (Perfect and its deriv- 
atives) are not found in this sense, habere (Active) commonly 
means to have as, thus: Cato Valerlum Flaccum eollegam habiiit, 
Cato had Valerius Flaccus as colleague. In the sense of to hold, 
regard, other turns are used, viz: 

habere, ducere, putare pro, 
habere, ducere, putare loco (in loco), 
habere, ducere, putare nuniero (in numero). 
as: 

aliquem parentis loco habere, to regard one as father, 

pro certo habere, to hold as a certainty, 

pro nihilo putare, ducere, to think nothing of 

in numero deorum habere, to regard as gods. 

6. With ducere, existimare, judicare, putare, the Accusative with 
the Infinitive is frequently used, and with credere, to believe, it must 
be used, as: 

puto te fellcem esse, I consider you happy. 



— 20 — 

T. With Verbs of taking (selecting), that to or for which any 
thing is taken or selected is expressed by the Dative or ad with the 
Accusative, as: locum castris capere, to take a place for a camp. 

8. se praestare, to show one's self, is always taken in a good 
sense, as: praesta te virum, show yourself a man; hence we cannot 
say, se crudelem or ignavum praestare, but only praebere. se gerere 
takes an Adverb, as to behave in English, thus: fortiter se gerere, 
to behave one's self manfully. 

59. The Active Verbs docere, edocere, to teach, and 
celare, to conceal, take two Accusatives, one of the 
Person, and the other of the Thing, as: 

quid nunc te, asine, litteras doceam? why should I now teach you 

litterature, you donkey? 
Antigonus iter omnes celiivit, Antigonus conceals his route 

from all. 

1. The Accusative of the Thing may remain with the Passive of 
Verbs of teaching, as: 

omnes militlae artes edoctus fuerat, he had been taught all the arts of tear. 
Commonly, however, discere aliquam rem, or, institui aliqua re, 
are used instead of doceri, as: 
Pericles a Damone musicam didicit, or, musica instructus est, Pericles was 
taught music by Damon. 

2. The Participle cloctus is used absolutely, as: nos a Graeeis 
docti, we instructed by the Greeks; calamitate doctus, made wise by 
misfortune, or it takes the Ablative or the Infinitive, as: doctus Grae- 
eis litteris, versed in Greek literature; Graece loqui doctus, versed 
in speaking Greek; and in like manner: fidibus doctus, instructed 
in playing the lyre; equo doctus, instructed in i*iding. 

3. When docere or edocere means to inform, acquaint, make 
known, it takes the Ablative with de, as- 

Adherbal Romam legatos miserat, qui senatum docerent de caede fratris, Adher- 
bal had sent envoys to Rome to inform the senate ofdhe murder of his brother. 

4. With celare, to keep in the dark, the Ablative with de is also 
used, as: 

Bassus noster me de hoc libro celavit, our friend Bassus has Kept me in the 
dark about this book. 

So always in the Passive, as: 

debes existimare te maximis de rebus a fratre esse celatum, you must suppose, 
that you have been kept in the dark about the most important affairs by your 
brother, 



_ 30 — 

60. Verbs signifying to ask, demand, poseere, po- 
stulare, reposcere, flagitare, take two Accusatives, one 
of the Person, and the other of the Thing. But the 
Person may also be expressed by the Ablative with 
the Preposition a, ab; regularly so with postulo, as: 

Caesar Aediios frumehtum flagitabat, Caesar kept demanding the 

corn from the Aedui, 
aquam a pumice nunc postulas, you are now ashing water of a 

pumice-stone. 

61. Yerbs signifying to ask, beg, orare, rogare, 
add to their Personal Accusative only a neuter Pronoun 
or Adjective in the Accusative; else a clause with ut or 
ne, is used; petere takes the Ablative of the Person with 
a, ab, and the Accusative of the Thing. Observe the 
phrases: precari deos, to pray to the gods; and precari 
aliquid a dis, to ask something of the gods in prayer. 

hoc te vehementer rogo, ut famae tnae servias, this I urgently 

beg of you to care for your reputation, 
Aedui pacem a Komanis petivSrunt, the Aedui begged peace of the 

Romans. 

1. petere allquem, to attack some one; petere aliquid, to strive 
for something. 

62. Yerbs signifying to ask, inquire, rogare, inter- 
rogate, add to their Personal Accusative only a neuter 
Pronoun or Adjective in the Accusative; otherwise the 
thiilg is expressed by the Ablative with de, as: inter- 
rogare, percontari allquem de allqua re ; quaerere 
and sciscitari take only the Ablative of the Person with 
ab, de, or ex. 

hoc, quod te interrogo, responde, answer what I ask you, 
Liscum Caesar retinet, quaerit ex solo ea quae in conventu dix&- 

rat, Caesar detains Liscus, he inquires from him alone what 

he had spoken in the meeting. 



— 31 — 

1. Observe: posttilo a te; peto a te; quaero (sciscitor) a, de, ex te. 

2. A Noun as second Accusative appears with the Verb rogare only 
in the official phrase: 

sententtam rogare aliquem, to ask one for his opinion or vote. 

DATIYE. 

63. Some Yerbs take, along with the direct Object 
in the Accusative, another in the Dative denoting the 
person or thing to or for which an action or quality 
exists. This is called the Indirect Object, as: 

f rater epistulam scribit sorori, the brother writes a letter to his 

sister, 
errantlbus viam monstrCmus, lei us show the way to the erring. 

64. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with 
many Intransitive Verbs signifying: 

to benefit or injure, prodesse ; nocere, obesse, offi- 

cere; 
to favor or resist, favere, studere; adversari, reniti, 

repugn are, resistere; 
to please or displease, placere ; displicere ; 
to command or obey, imperare; parere, oboedire, 

obsequi, obtemperare, dicto audientem esse; 
to trust or distrust, fidere, confidere; diffidere; 
to be angry with, irasci, succensere; thus: 

verba nobis magis nocent, minus prosunt nostra quam aliena, our 
own words do us more harm and less good than the words of 
others, 

Dumnorix cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus studebat, Bum- 
norix moved by a lust for power ivas anxious for a revolution. 

1. Some Yerbs apparently of the same meaning, are transitive and 
ake the Accusative. Mark the following: 

aequare, to be equal jubere, to order 

deficSre, to be wanting vetare, to forbid 

juvare, adjuvare, to help, assist 
fortes fortuna adj u vat, fortune helps the brave, 
me dies deficlat, the day would fail me. 



— 32 — 

2. Some Yerbs which are regarded in English as transitive take 
in Latin the Dative, and therefore belong to the class of Intransitives. 
Especially to be noted are: 

persuadere, to pwsuade, convince parcere, to spare 

mederi, to heal studere, to favor 

supplicare, to beg obtrectare, to decry 

maledicere, to curss invidere, to envy 

benedicere, to praise, bless satisfacere, to satisfy 

3. Passives are properly made only from transitive Yerbs. In- 
transitive Verbs which govern a Dative have an Impersonal Passive 
with the same Case, in the following manner : 

Active, bonus invidet nemini, a good man envies no one 
Passive, milil invidetur, I am envied 

■tl"bl invidetur, thou art envied 

ex invidetur, he is envied 

nobis invidetur, we are envied 

voMs invidetur, you are envied 

il s invidetur, they are envied 
qui invident egent, illi quibus invidetur, rem habent, those who envy are the 
needy, those who are envied have the stuff. 

4. persuadere, lit. to make it sweet, is properly a transitive Yerb 
taking for its object a clause with tit, or an Accusative with Infinitive. 
lam convinced, may be expressed by mihi persuasi, mihi persua- 
sum est, or persuasum habeo; be convinced, persuade tibi. 

5. As the Active is tibi in video, so the Passive tibi invidetur. But 
we cannot say: in video tibi laudem, I envy you for your praise, 
but only: invideo laudi tuae, I am envious of your praise; and in 
like manner in the Passive: bonorum laudi invidetur, the good are 
envied for their praise. 

6. The Perfect Passive of parco is not used, but for it is substituted 
temperatum est, as: ne templis quidem deorum ab hoste tempera- 
turn est, not even the temples of the gods were spared by the enemy. 
The same is true of invlsum est which is replaced by an Active ex- 
pression or by the phrase, invidiae alicui esse. (See below, 72. 1.) 

65. Adjectives signifying usefulness, fitness, accept- 
ableness, similarity, nearness, service and inclination, 
and their Opposites take the Dative. Their Adverbs 
follow the same construction, as: 

semper flamma fumo est proxlma, fire is aye next door to smoke, 
sapientis est naturae convenienter vivere, it is the part of a wise 
man to live according to nature. 



— 33 — 

1. These include, among others, the following: 
acceptus, acceptable jiicundus, agreeable 
amicus, friendly injucundus, disagreeable 
Inimicus, unfriendly, opposed molestus, troublesome 
aptus, apt, suitable necessarius, necessary 
carus, dear odiostis, hateful 
communis, common par, equal, a match for 
dulcis, agreeable dispar, unlike 

facilis, easy saliitaris, beneficial 

ditficTlis, difficult similis, like 

gratus, pleasing dissimilis, unlike 

ingratus, unpleasant turpis, disgraceful 

gravis, burdensome utilis, useful 

2. amicus (arnica), inimicus (inimlca), and familiaris are used in 
the Positive and Superlative as Substantives, and as such take a Posses- 
sive Pronoun or a Genitive, as: amicisslmus, familiarissiinus (also in- 
tlmus) meus, my dearest friend; Caesaris amicisslmus, Caesar's 
dearest friend; inimicissimus meus, my bitterest enemy. In like 
manner are used: aequalis, a contemporary] affims, propinquus, 
necessarlus, a relative; vicinus, finitlmus, a neighbor. 

3. Adjectives of Inclination, such as: amicus, aequus, comis, fidelis, 
Jiberahs, benignus, benevolus; inimicus, infestus, inlquus, infldus, 
crudelis, saevus, malevolus, &c, may take, instead of the Dative, 
the Accusative with erga when friendly feelings are spoken of, or 
with in, adversus, for friendly and unfriendly feelings. Adjec- 
tives signifying useful, noxious, suitable, necessary (utilis, inutilis, 
aptus, idoneus, necessarlus) take oftener the Accusative with ad, to 
denote the Thing for which, but regularly the Dative of Persons, as: 

ManlTus fuit severus in fllmm, Manlivs teas severe towards his son, 
nobis utile est ad lianc rem, it is of use to us for this thing. 

For alicmus, foreign, see below 80; noxius, injurious > noxious, 
is only used absolutely, without any Object-Case. 

4. After similis, Wee and dissimilis, unlike, the Genitive is used 
to denote exact resemblance; hence we say: mei, tui, nostri similis, 
my, your, our like, and veri similis, likely, as: Dionysius tyrannus 
Neronis simillimus, the tyrant Dionysius, the true picture of Nero. 
The Dative includes the idea of casual likeness, as: films in hoc patri 
similis est, in this particular the son is like his father. 

5. par and dispar in the sense of like, unlike take the Genitive, 
otherwise the Dative; par alicui means, a match for. - superstes, sur- 
viving, may take the Genitive or Dative, 

6. The Adjectives proplor and proxtmus also take the Accusative, 
and this i§ the regular construction with th^ Adverbs propius ii'd 



— 34 — 

proxime, as: Ubii proximi Rhenura incolunt, the Ubii dwell next the 
Rhine. Proxime Pompejum sedebam, I was sitting next to Pompey. 

7. proprius, own, and communis, common take the Genitive when 
the idea of property or peculiarity prevails, as: populi Bomani est 
propria iibertas, liberty is characteristic of the Roman people — 
caelum omnium hominum commune est, the sky is the common pro- 
perty of all; but: omni aetati mors est communis, death is common 
to every age. With Personal Pronouns the Dative is used or a Possessive 
Pronoun in their stead, as: commune est mihi alTquid cum aliquo, 
I have something in common with some one. — sacer, set apart, 
sacred, also takes the Genitive, as: insula deorum sacra, an island 
sacred to the gods. 

66. The Dative is used with transitive and intran- 
sitive Verbs to denote that to or for which, to the in- 
terest or loss of which any thing is done: Dativus corn- 
modi et ineommodi, Dative of Advantage and Dis- 
advantage, as: 

domus pulchra dommis aedificatur, non murlbus, a handsome 
house is built for its owners, not for the mice. 

1. This construction occurs also with the Yerbs vacare, to have 
leisure for a thing, and nubere, to veil one's self, as the bride for 
the bridegroom, i. e. to marry, as 

vaco litteris, philosophiae, I have leisure for literature, philosophy; I devote 

'myself to literature, philosophy \ 
Venus nupsit Vulcano, Venus married Vulcan. 

In the Passive nubere takes cum, as: regis Parthorum films, quocum 
erat nupta regis Armeniorum filia, the Parthianjcing's son to whom 
the daughter of the king of the Armenians was married. (Marry, 
as a man marries a woman, is, uxorem ducere, or in matrimonium 
ducere. ) 

67. The Dative of the Personal Pronoun is used to 

denote a certain degree of concern or sympathy. It 

is called Ethical Dative and is properly a Dative of 

Advantage, as: 

his mihi quisquam mansuetudmem etmisericordiam nominat ! such 
• being the facts some one names to vry face gentleness and pity! 



— 35 — 

1. Especially to be noted are the Expressions: 
quid hoc sibi vult ? what does that mean? 

quid huic homini faciam ? what is to be done with that fellow? 

2. For, meaning instead of, in defense of , in behalf of must be 
expressed by the Ablative with pro, as: pro rege, lege, grege, for the 
king, the laws and the country. 

68. Some Verbs take the Dative or Accusative ac- 
cording to their signification. These are: 

metuere, timere aliquem, to dread some one, 

metuere, timere alicui, to fear for some one, 

metuere, timere de aliqua re, to be anxious about something ; 

consulere aliquem, to consult some one, 

consulere alicui, to consult the interest of some one, 

in aliquem graviter consulSre, to proceed severely against one; 

prospicere, providere aliquid, to foresee something; to prepare 

for something, 
prospicere, providere alicui rei, to provide for something; 

cavere alicui, to take precautions for some one, 
cavere aliquem, to take precautions against some one, 
cavere ab aliquo, to be on one's guard; 

moderari aliquid, to manage something y 
moderari alicui rei, to set bounds to a matter; 

temperare aliquid, to mix (vinum); to rule, govern (rempublicam 

legibus); to use with moderation (victorlam), 
temperare alicui, to spare some one, 
temperare ab aliqua, re, to restrain from something; 

manure aliquem, to await one (as his fate), 
manure alicui, to continue, to remain to some one. 

1. volo te, I have something to say to yow, volo te paucis, / have a 
few words to say to you ; volo (cupio) tua causa omnia, I wish you welt 

69. Many Verbs, both transitive and intransitive, 

compounded with these Prepositions: 

&d, ante, cdn, in, inter, 
6b, post, prae, sub, super, 

take the Dative. Transitive Verbs take an Accusa- 
tive besides, Mark the following: 



— 36 — 

addere alicui animos, to give courage to a person, 

afferre alicui dolorem, to cause pain to a person, 

afferre alicui vim, to offer violence to a person, 

sibi manus afferre, to lay hands on one's self, 

adhibere remedia morbis, to apply remedies to diseases, 

adjungere fidem alicui, to give credit to one, 

anteponere rem rei, to prefer a thing to another, 

inferre bellum alicui, to wage war upon some one, 

injicere metum alicui, to strike fear into one, 

injungere alicui onus, negotium, to charge one with a burden, task, 

imponere alicui nomen, to give one a name, 

imponere alicui negotium, to impose a task on some one, 

se interponere bello, to engage in ivar, 

se opponere periculis, to encounter dangers, 

aliquem morti objicere, to give one up to death, 

se hostium telis objicere, to throw one's self in the way of the ene- 
mies 1 missiles, 

proponere aliquid oculis, to set something before the eyes, 

postponere, posthabere rem rei, to put a thing below another, 

praeferre rem rei, to prefer a thing to another, 

praeficereimperatorem bello, to appoint to the command of the war, 

subjicere aliquid oculis, to place something before the eyes, 

ignem tectis subjicere, to put the houses on fire, 

intercedere legi, to protest against the law, 

intervenit nox proelio, the night put a stop to the battle, 

obrepit senectus adulescentiae, old age steals upon youth, 

obversatur aliquid ammo, oculis, something presents itself to the 
mind, to the eyes, 

praesidere provinciae, to govern a province, 

succumbere oneri, to sink under a load, 

adesse alicui, to assist one, 

deesse alicui, to forsake some one, 

interesse pugnae, to be present at a battle, 

praeesse reipublicae, to be at the head of, to govern a state, 

prodesse omnibus, obesse nemini, to do good, to all, harm to no one, 

subest ratio rei, there is a reason at the bottom. 
1. The Preposition and its Case may follow any of these Com- 
pounds. According to the rules of good usage the Preposition is 
commonly repeated with Compounds of ad, con, and in, as: 

appellere classem ad ripam, to land a ship, 

communicare aliquid cum aliqno, to communicate, share some- 
thing with a man, 



— 37 — 

inesse in allqua re, to be in something (Perf. fuit, never infuit), 

ineumbere in gladiuin, to fall on one's sword. 
Also with aclhibere, conferre, comparare, contendere (to contrast), 
congrSdi (to meet with one), conjungere, congruere, consentire, the 
Preposition is commonly repeated. 

2. If a local relation is distinctly expressed (as place to, in, or from 
which), the Preposition is repeated, as: 

accedere ad aliquem, to approach a man, 
accedere ad rempublicam, to enter upon a public office, 
appropinquate, to approach, commonly with the Dai, rarely with ad, 
accidere ad pedes alicujus, to cast one's self at a person's feet, 
adesse ad senatum, in judicio, to be present in the senate, at court, 
admovere exercltuin in locum, to lead an army to a place, 
admovere stimfilos alicui, to put the goad to a man, 
incidere in aliquem, to fall in with; in morbuin, periculum, invi- 
diam incidere, to fall sick, &c; incldit in mentem aliquid, some- 
thing comes to my mind, 
incurrere, irruere, invadere in hostem, to attack, assault the enemy, 
injicere se in medlos hostes, to throw one's self into the midst of 

the enemy, 
inferre signa in hostem, to advance to the attack; but always: in- 

ferre bellum hosti, injuriam alicui, 
procumbere ante pedes, ad genua, to fall on one's knees. 

3. For the Compounds of ante and prae, signifying to surpass, 
see S3. 

4 Especially to be noted are: 

attendere animum ad all quid, or simply: attendere aliquid, to mind 

something, 
occumbere mortem, to fall against death, i.e. to die, 
illudere, to mock at, may take the Dative or the Accusative: exist i- 

mationi, corpori; praecepta alicujus, 
insultare, to insult, takes the Dative, or the Accusative with in, as: 

insultare in rempublicam, 
irridere, to laugh at, takes only the Accusative, 
assuetus and assuefactus, accustomed to, take the Ablative (Caesar 

and Cicero), as: assuetus labore, accustomed to toil 

70. Certain Verbs of giving and putting may take 
either a Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative 
with an Ablative. These are: 

aspergo, circumdo, 

dono, incluo, 



— 38 

dono tibi librum, I present you a book, 

dono te libro, I present you with a book, 

circumdat urbi murum, he puts a wall around the city, 

circumdat urbem muro, he surrounds the city with a wall 

So also aspergere, to besprinkle and to sprinkle on; 
induere, to clothe and to put on. 

71. The Dative is used with esse and similar words 
to denote, possession, as: 

homini cum deo similitude* est, man has a likeness to God. 

1. The Genitive or a Possessive Pronoun with esse places empha- 
sis on the possessor, as: domus Caesaris est, the house is Caesar's 
(and no one's else); the Dative with esse, on the fact of possession, 
as: Caesari domus est, Caesar has a house (among other things). 
This is the usual form to denote simple possession, and is commonly 
translated by to have. Accordingly we say: regis officlum est, it is 
the king's duty, and not, regi officium est, (See 44.) 

2. The possession of qualities of body and mind is expressed 
by esse in with the Ablative, or some other turn, as: maxima in 
Cicerone eloquentia fuit, Cicero had very great eloquence. 

3. After est (datur, inditur) mihi nomen, cognomen, the Name 
is put in the Dative or in the Nominative, as: puero nomen est Carolo 
(Carolus), the boy's name is Charles. In like manner with Active 
expressions the Dative or Accusative is used, as: dare alicui nomen 
Ascanio or Ascanium, to give one the name Ascanius. 

72. With Gerunds and Gerundives the Dative denotes 

the person on whom the necessity rests, as: 

Caesari omnia uno tempore erant agenda, Caesar had every thing 

to do at the same moment, 
nobis omnibus moriendum est, we all must die. 

The same construction is sometimes used with 
the compound tenses of Passive Verbs, so especially with 
auditus, cognitus, constitiitus, deliberatus, perspectus, 
provisus, as: 

mihi deliberatum et constitutum est, / have deliberated and re- 
solved, 



— 39 — 

1. By the poets and later writers the Dative is used in this way 
after almost any Passive Verb, as: 

barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intellegor ulli, I am a barbarian 
here, because I am not understood by any one. 

2. Probatur mihi aliquid, something pleases me (from probare 
alicui aliquid, to make a thing acceptable to a person); probatur 
aliquid a me, something is approved by me. 

73. Certain Yerbs take the Dative to denote the 
purpose or end, and often at the same time another 
Dative of the person for whom or to ivhom. This 
double Dative occurs 

a. With the Verb esse in such phrases as: est 
mihi aliquid laudi, honori, decori, dedecori, saluti, 
calamitati, oneri, impedimeiito, detrimento, emolu- 
mento; res est argumento, documento. tcstimonio, 
etc., thus: 

nimia fiducia magnae calamitati solet esse, excessive confidence 

is usually a great calamity, 
cui bono? for whose advantage. 9 

b. With Verbs signifying to impute, reckon, dare, 
tribuere, vertere, habere, as: laudi dare, vitio dare, 
crimini dare, to count it a praise, charge it as a fault 
or crime; tribuere ignavtae, superblae, to attribute it 
to cowardice or haughtiness, thus: 

vitio mihi dant quod nominis necessarli mortem graviter fero, 
. they charge it to me as a fault that I resent the death of a man 
so dear to me; 

c. With Verbs signifying to com&, give, take, send, 

leave, and the like, as: dono aliquid dare, to give as 

a present; subsidio, auxilio venire, to come as a relief, 

to assistance, thus: 

Pausanlas, rex Lacedaemoniorum, venit Attieis auxilio, Pausanias, 
king of the Lacedaemonians, came to the help of the Athenians, 



— 40 — 

1. Especially to be noted are the Phrases: admiration i, odlo 
esse, which are used as Passives to admlror, / admire, and odi, I 
hate; likewise, aliquid mihi cordi est, something is a pleasure to 
me, I have it at heart, and, aliquid mihi (magnae, majori, maximae) 
curae est, something is a matter of (great, greater, greatest) con- 
cern to me. Active phrases are formed with habere, as: rem reli- 
gioni non habere, to make no conscience of a thing; habere quaestu 
rempubllcam, to consider the state the means of making money. 

ABLATIVE. 

74. The Ablative is the Case of the Adverbial Re- 
lations expressed in English by the Prepositions 
from, at, in. with, by, as: 

omni iiber cura, free from all care, 

bello Persico, at the time of the Persian ivar, 

prima pueritia, in early boyhood, 

summa aequitate, with the greatest fairness, 

lapide interfectus, killed by a stone. 

75. The Ablative is used to express the Cause 
(Ablativus causae). It designates that by which, by 
reason of which, because of which, something is or is 
done, and is common with Passive Verbs and such 
Active Yerbs and Adjectives as imply a Passive 
meaning, as: perire = interfici, to be slain; crescere = 
augeri, to increase; aeger = affectus, diseased. The 
Ablative of the Passive construction becomes the 
Nominative (Subject) of the Active, thus: 

Dei providentia mundus administratur, the world is governed by 

God's providence, 
concordla res parvae crescunt, by concord small affairs grow, 
milites praelio fessi erant, the soldiers ivere weary with the battle, 
cometae radiis solis obscurantur, the comets are dimmed by the 

rays of the sun, 
radii solis obscurant cometas, the rays of the sun dim the comets. 



— 41 — 

76. The Living Agent of a Yerb in the Passive 
voice, or of an intransitive Verb with the sense of the 
Passive, is in the Ablative with a or ab, as: 

natura fit, ut liberi a parentibus amentur, by nature it happens, 
that children are loved by their parents, 

1. With gigni, nasci, orlri, the Ablative is used to denote parentage, 
as: hunrilibus parentibus ortus, sprung from loiv parents. With nasci 
and orlri, ex is usually employed of the mother, and ab of remote 
progenitors, as: plerlque Belgae sunt orti a Germanis, Belgians 
are mostly of German descent A Preposition must be used with 
Pronouns, as: ex me atque hoc natus es, you are my son and his. 

77. The Ablative of Cause is used with Adjectives 
of a Passive meaning and intransitive Verbs o£ feeling, 

such as: 

dolere, to grieve gloriari, to boast 

maerere, to mourn laborare, to suffer 

gauderg ) tQ rejoi dd superbus proud 

laetari 1 laetus, pleased — aeger, -ill 

delectari, to be delighted anxius, anxious 

agricola gaudet equis, the husbandman delights in horses, 
Miltiades aeger erat Yulnerihus, Miltiades ivas ill from Ids wounds, 
allis malis laboras, you suffer with other ills. 

1. With laborare, to suffer, the affection is expressed by the Ablative, 
as: fame laborare, to suffer with hunger; the part of the body 
which suffers, by the Ablative with ex, as: ex capite laborare, to be 
sick of the head. 

2. The motive which influences the person acting is often ex- 
pressed by the Ablative with a Participle, as: motus, commotus, ini- 
pulsus, adductus misericordia, moved, driven on, led by pity; ira, 
odio incitatus, egged on by anger, hatred,; metu perterritus, sore 
frightened. 

3. The Object on account of which an action is performed is re- 
gularly expressed by the Prepositions ob, propter, causa; but 
the Ablative is common with nouns of the Fourth Declension occur- 
ring only in that case,' as jussu, hortatu, mandatu, thus: 

in oppidum propter metnm sese recipiunt, they betake themselves into the city 

on account of their fear, 
jussu civlnm, at the bidding of the citizens; meo rogatu, at my request. 



— 42 

4 In negative expressions the preventing cause is expressed by 
prae, for, with the Ablative, as: 

prae maerore loqui non potuit, he could not speak for grief. 

78. The Ablative of Cause includes also the con- 
struction of the following Verbs: 

gioriari aliqua re, to glory in a thing, 

gioriari in aliqua re, to seek one's honor in a tiling, 

gioriari de_ aliqua re, to speak very highly of a thing. 

fidere, confidere, to trust, take the Ablative when the Object is 

a Thing, as: virtute militum confidere; and the Dative when it 

is a Person: tibi ficlo. — difficlo, / distrust, commonly takes the 

Dative, iretus, equivalent to conflsus, trusting, always takes 

the Ablative, 
niti aliqua re, to lean on a tiling] but also with m, as: Pom- 

peji in vita nitebatur salus reipublicae, the iveal of the slate 

depended on Pompey's life. — niti ad aliquid, to strive for 

something. 
acquiescere aliqua re, to rest satisfied with a thing; acquiescere 

in aliqua re, to rejoice in a thing, as: in carifcate suorum. 
contentum esse aliqua re, to be satisfied with a thing. 
contineri aliqua re, to depend, to rest upon something, as: salus 

reipublicae concordla civium continStur, the weal of the state 

depends on the concord of the citizens* 

79. The Ablative is used to denote the Means or 

Instrument by which anything is effected (Ablativus 

instrumenti), as: 

Pyrrhus a muliere lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed, 
by a woman with a stone. 

The Person considered as Means or Instrument is ex- 
pressed by per with the Accusative, or by opera 
(auxilio) with a Genitive or Possessive, as: 

Caesar certior factus est per legatos, Caesar was informed by 

means of ambassadors, 
Ciceronis unlus opera respublica conservata est, by the help of 

Cicero alone the state was saved. 



_ 43 — 

i. When per is used to express the means, it denotes the man- 
ner rather than the real means or instrument, as: per fraudem, 
by fraud; perjocum, in jest; per vim, by force. 

2. The Ablative of Accompaniment regularly takes cum, as: esse 
cum telo, to go armed. In military phrases the troops with which 
a -march is made are put in the Ablative with or without cum; 
generally with cum, when a special numeral is used, without ciim 
in general expressions where the men are regarded as real means; 
as: omnibus copiis, magna manu. But to this there are many 
exceptions, as: 

Caesar cum omnibus copiis Helvetios sequi coepit, Caesar with all his troops 

began to follow the Helvetians, 
hostes ad castra Caesaris omnibus copiis contenderunt, the enemy hastened 

totoard the camp of Caesar tcith all their troops. 

3. The Ablative of Means is used with Verbs denoting to affect in 
any way, afficere aliquem allqua re; to adorn, ornare, instruere; to 
instruct, instituere, erudlre, imbuere, as: aliquem artibus erudire. 
to instruct one in the arts. Afficere aliquem or allquid allqua re, 
to affect a person or thing with something, is commonly translated 
by a Verb or verbal expression akin to the Latin Ablative, as: ali- 
quem honoribus afficere, to honor a person-, cruciatu afficere, to 
torture; laetitia afficere, to gladden-, and in the Passive: magna diffi- 
cultate affici, to be brought into great difficulty. 

4. With Verbs of valuing this Ablative is put in answer to the 
questions according to what? by what? as: 

magnos homines virtute metimur, non fortuna, we measure great men by worth, 
not by fortune. 

5. This construction includes also the Ablative after Verbs signi- 
fying to hide, take in, involve, as: 

latebris se occultare, to conceal one's self in a lurking-place, 
tyranni nomen humanitate sua tegere, to cover the name of a ty- 
rant with one's kindness, 
recipere aliquem tecto, to take a person into one's house, 
se castris tenure, to keep within the camp, , 
erroribus implicari, to be involved in eri*ors. 
And in like manner: 
tibiis, cithara, fidibus canere, to play on the flute, cittern, lyre, 
pila, al^a, tessgris ludere, to play at ball, at dice, 
vehi curru, equo, to drive, to ride, 
pedibus, navi proficisci, to travel on foot, by water. 



_ 14 — 

80. That in respect to which or in accordance with 
which anything is or is done, is denoted by the Ablative 
of Limitation (Ablatlvus limitationis), as: 

ab his castris oppidum Remorum nomine Bibrax aberat milia pas- 
suum octo, a town of the Remi, Bibrax byname, was eight 
miles distant from this camp, 

crine ruber, niger ore, brevis pede, lumine laesus, red-haired, 
black-lipped, club-footed, blink-eyed. 

1. Especially to be noted is the use of iiatu, by birth, with Ad- 
jectives to denote the age, as: 

grandis natu (not magnus), old minor natu, younger 
major natu, older minimus natu, youngest 

maxim us natu, oldest 
Ennius fuit major natu quam Plautus et Naevius, Ennius was 
older than Plautus and Naevius. 

2. Instead of the Ablative of Limitation the Accusative is used by 
the poets in imitation of a Greek idiom, as: os humerosque deo si- 
milis, like a god in countenance and shoulders. This Accusative 
is used with passive and intransitive Verbs and Adjectives to denote 
the part affected, as: miles fractus membra labore, the soldier 
weakened in body by haixlship. 

3. The Ablative of Limitation is often used to qualify a whole 
sentence. Such Ablatives are: sententia, opinione, judicio, testi- 
monio alicujus (mea quidem sententia, according to my opinion), 
thus: 

Cato perfectus mea sententia Stoicus fuit, Cato was, according to my opinion, 
a pei feet Stoic. 

4. The Ablative is used in a similar construction with facio and 
fio, as: quid illo fiet ? what will become of him? quid hoc homlne 
facies ? what are you going to do with this man? 

si. The Ablative of Manner (Ablatlvus modi), an- 
swers the question how? and is used with the Pre- 
position cum when it has no Adjective, as: beate vi- 
vere et honeste id est cum virtute vivere, to live 
happily and honestly means to live with virtue (vir- 
tuously); cum cura scribere, to write with care; cum 
voluptate audlre, to hear with pleasure, 



— 45 — 

1. The following Ablatives are used without an Adjective or Pre- 
position: 

silentio, in silence jure, rightfully 

ordine, in an orderly manner injuria, unjustly 

casu, by chance vi, violently 

via et ratione, methodically vi et armls, by force of arms 

voluntate, voluntarily pedibus, a-foot 

dolo, fraude, fraudulently navibus, by ship 

82. The Ablative of Manner is used ivith or ivithout 

cum when it has an Adjective, as: magna cura, cum 

magna cura, magna cum cura, with great care. The 

Preposition is commonly expressed to denote an 

accompanying circumstance or a result, as: 

Yerres Lampsacum venit cum magna calamitate eivitatis, Verres 
came to Lampsacus with great disaster to the state. 

1. Words signifying manner themselves, such as: modus, ratio, 
mos, ritus, and likewise animus, mens, consilium never take cum ; 
thus: aequo animo ferre, to bear with an even mind; hac mente or 
hoc animo profectus sum, with this intention I set out. This rule 
applies also to lege, condicione, under condition, and to Substan- 
tives denoting parts of the body } as: nudo capite incedere, to go with 
head uncovered. 

2. The Negative without is often expressed by the Ablative of 
Manner with nullo, -a, -is: nullo negotio rem conficere, to accomplish 
a thing ivithout any trouble; nulla mea culpa, without any fault on 
my part. 

3. The Ablative modo is admissible only in general expressions, 
such as: hoc modo, in this way; simili, pari modo, in like manner; 
but is never used to denote the manner of acting; instead of 
fortissimo modo, hostlli modo, the Classics use: multa cum virtute, 
hostilem in modum, or other turns. 



Akin to the Ablative of Manner is the Ablative of Quality, 
see 30. 3. 

S3. Difference of Measure is put in the Ablative in 
answer to the question by how much? The Ablative 
of Measure (AblatTvus mensurae) is used after 



+- 40 — 

Comparatives and words implying comparison (Ad- 
verbs, Prepositions, Verbs), such as: ante, post, 
infra, supra, citra, ultra; malo, antecello, praesto, 
etc., thus: 

multo praestat virtus divitiis, virtue is much better than riches, 
Hibernia est dimidio minor quam Britannia, Ireland is less by 
half than Great Britain. 

1. This- construction is especially frequent with the Ablatives: 
multo, much altero tanto, twice as much 

paulo, a little nihilo, by nothing, no 

allquan to, so me more quo.. eo (hoc) )^ - 

tanto, so much; quanto, how much quanto . . tanto 1 

tanto est accusare quam defend&re, quanto facere quam sanare vulnera facilins, 
it is as much easier to accuse than to defend as it is easier to inflict wounds 
than to heal them. 

84. The Ablative of Comparison (Ablatlvus com- 

parationis) is used with the Comparative, instead of 

quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative, as: 

films melior est quam pater ) ^ SQn ^ heUer ^ m father, 
hlius melior est patre ) 

scio filium meliorem esse quam patrem, / know that the son is 
better than his father. 

1. The Ablative after Comparatives is admissible only instead of 
quam and a Nominative or Accusative of the object with which the 
comparison is made. As a rule, the Ablative of Comparison instead of 
quam must be used when the second member of comparison is a 
Relative Pronoun, as: 

Phidfae simulacra, quibus nihil in illo gen&re vidimus perfectius, the statues of 
Phidias in comparison with which we saw nothing more perfect of that de- 
scription. 

2. After plus, amplius, more; minus, less; longius, farther, 
quam is often omitted without influence upon the construction. But 
the Ablative of Comparison may also be used when the word with quam 
would be in the Nominative or Accusative, as: 

ex Romanis minus trecenti perierunt, of the Romans less than 300 perished, 

tecum plus annum vixit, he lived with you more than a year> 

plus quam ducenti interfecti sunt J 

plus ducenti interfecti sunt > more than 200 were killed. 

plus ducentis interfecti sunt \ 



— 47 — 

3, Certain Ablatives as: opinione, exspectatione, spg, solito, pre- 
ceding a Comparative are used instead of a Clause, as: 

opinione celerius, sooner" than is expected, 

dicto citlus, quicker than the word was spoken, 

gpe serius, later than was hoped, 

amnis sollto citatior, the river running faster than usual. 

85. Price (including both general and special value 
or cost) is put in the Ablative (Ablativus pretii) with 
Verbs signifying: 

to buy, emere, redimere, mercari, 

to sell, vendere (Pass, veneo, venire), 

to he for sale, licere; to value, appraise, aestimare, 

to cost, esse, stare, constare, 

to let, locare, collocare; to hire, conducere. 

In this construction, price is regarded as means 

of purchase. General Value or Cost is expressed by 

the Ablatives: 

magno, at a high price plurimo, at a very high price 

parvo, at a low price minimo, at a very low price 

nihil o, for nothing 

equus mihi talento stetit, the horse cost me a talent, 
hortos istos emamus magno, si parvo non possumus, let us buy 
those gardens at a high price, if we cannot have them cheap. 

1. Verbs of buying and selling take the following Genitives of 
Comparative Value or Cost: 

tanti, so much; quanti, how much pluris, dearer 
tantidem, at the same price minoris, cheaper 

mercatores non tantidem vendunt, quanti emerunt, merchants do not sell at the 
same price at which they bought. 

2. Mark the Particular Phrases: 

bene eniere, to buy cheap bene vendSre, to sell dear 

male emere, to buy dear male vendere, to sell at a loss. 

86. The Ablative of Separation (Ablativus separa- 
tisms) answers the question ivhence? with or without 



_ 48 — 

the Prepositions ab, off; de, from; ex, out of; and is 
used with Verbs signifying: 

to remove, drive away from, pellere, depellere, ex- 
pellere, movere, amovere, demovere, removere, 
dejicere, deturbare; to withdraw, retire, cedere, 
abscedere, decedere, excedere; more rarely: 
abire, exire, egredi, evadere; 
to keep from, arcere, prohibere, excludere, inter- 
cludere, deterrere; to abstain from, abstinere, 
desistere, supersedere; 
to free, relieve from, liberare, levare, solvere, ex- 
solvere. 
The Prepositions are usually omitted when these 
Yerbs are used figuratively; but with Persons the Pre- 
position ab must be used, as: 

populus Atheniensis Phocionem patria pepulit, the Athenian 

people drove Phocion from his country, 
libera me ab homine nialo, a me ipso, liberate me from that bad 

fellow, myself, 
ita multae civitates omni aere alieno liberatae, multae valde 

levatae sunt, thus many cities have been altogether freed from 

debt, and many greatly relieved. 

1. Among the constructions of most frequent occurrence are 
the following: 
pellere allquem regno (ex regno), to drive one from a throne; 
pellere allquem patria, civitate, to banish a person; 
depellere hostes loco (e loco, ab urbe, de moenibus), to drive an 

enemy from his position (out of town, down from the wall); 
depellere allquem de spe conatuque, de suscepta causa, de sen- 

tentla, to compel a person to give up hope and attempt, an 

undertaking, his opinion; 
expellere aliquem domo, civitate, possessionibus, ex urbe, to turn 

one out of his home, country, estate, out of town; 
movere allquem loco, to remove one from a situation; movgre 

aliquem tribu, senatu, to expel one from the tribe, senate; 



— 49 — 

dejicere aliquem honore, principatu, spe, to deprive a person of 
his office, the chief place, his hope; dejicere aliquem de sen- 
tentla, to divert one from his opinion; dejicere aliquem de 
gradu, to drive one from his position; 

deturbare hostem de moenibus, to drive an enemy down from 
the wall; deturbare aliquem spe, de mente, to deprive one of 
hope, of reason; 

cedere loco (ex loco), to give up a post; cedere urbe (ex urbe), 
to leave town; cedere vita (de vita), to depart from life; posses- 
sione bonOrum alicui cedere, to make over one's property (in- 
stead of payment) ; 

abscedere incepto, to desist from an undertaking (also with ab 
or ex); 

decedere provincia (de provincia), ex Italia, to retire from the 
province, from Italy; decedere vita (de vita), to depart from 
life; 

abire magistratu, to retire from an office; the Ablative is confined 
to this phrase; otherwise ab or ex must be used; 

se abdicare magistratu, to abdicate an office. 



arcere aliquem tecto, to keep a person from the house; 

prohibere aliquem fuga, to hinder one from fleeing; 

excludere aliquem re frumentarla, a reditu, to cut one off from 

provisions, from retreat; excludere aliquem a republica, to 

shut one out from the state; 
intercludere aliquem a commeatu, a castris, to cut a person off 

from supplies, from the camp; 
deterrere aliquem a consilio, to deter a person from a plan; 
abstinere injuria, maledicto, scelere, to refrain from ivrong, 

curse, crime; abstinere manus ab alienis, to keep one's hands 

from other people's property; abstinere milites a praeda, to 

keep the soldiers from plundering; 
desistere conatu, to desist from the attempt 



liberare aliquem metu, to rid a person of fear; liberare patrlam 
a tyrannis, to deliver the country from tyrants ; 

levare aliquem onere, to relieve one of a burden; 

solvere civitatem religione, to relieve the state from a religious 
offense; solvere aliquem leglbus, to relieve a person from the 
obligations of the law; 



_ 50 ~ 

exsolvere se occupationibus, to free one's self from all occupa- 
tions; exsolvere se suspicione, to clear one's self from sus- 
picion. 

2. As the examples have shown, the Preposition is generally 
omitted when the Verbs are used figuratively. — liberare (except 
when used with persons), levare, solvere, exsolvSre, supersedere 
take the Ablative without a Preposition; the rest of Verbs signifying 
to keep from, abstain from, take the Ablative with or without the 
Preposition a. Certain Verbs capable of two different senses admit 
of a different construction, as: 

, levare alicui curas, molestias, to ease a man of his cares, troubles; 
levare aliquem curls, to free one from cares; 

prohibere aliquem calamitate, to guard one against misfortune; 
prohibere aliquem reditu, to prevent a person from returning; 

defendere aliquem ab aliqua re, to defend a person from some- 
thing; defendere aliquid ab aliquo, to keep off something from 
somebody; 

intercludere alicui viam, to bar one's way; intercludere aliquem 
commeatu, to cut a person off from supplies; 

interdicere alicui foro, aqua et igni, to forbid one the admittance 
to the forum, the use of fire and water, i. e. to banish; (inter- 
dicere alicui = arcSre). 

3. Verbs compounded with dis and se take always ab; such are 
Verbs signifying to distinguish, discernere, distinguere; to differ, 
differre, discrepare, dissidere, dissentlre, distare; to separate, 
separare, secernere, segregare, sejungere; and likewise: to alienate, 
alienare, abalienare; to be averse, abhorrere. 

87. The Ablative of Plenty and Want (Ablativus 
copiae et inopiae) is used with Verbs signifying: 
to abound, abundare, redundare, affluere, circuni- 

fluere; 
to be in want of, to be free from, car ere, vacare; to 

need, require, egere, indigere; 
to fill, complere, explere, implere, refercire, cumu- 

lare, onerare; 
m to deprive, orbare, privare, spoliare, nudare, frau- 

dare. 



— 51 

boni assidulque doralni villa semper abundat lacte, casSo, melle, 

the villa of a good and industrious master always abounds in 

milk, cheese and honey, 
Thales interrogates, quid esset deus: Quod, inquit, caret initio et 

fine, Thales being asked, what was God, replied, that which 

wants beginning and end, 
Deus constituit bonis omnibus mundum explore, mali nihil admi- 

scSre, God resolved to fill the world with all blessings and to 

add nothing bad, 
Democrltus dicitur oculis se privasse, Democritus is said to have 

deprived himself of his eyes. 

1. egeo, and more frequently indigeo, also take the Genitive, 
as: quid est, quod defensionis indigeat? what is there that needs 
defence? 

2. In the best prose, complere and impl6re ; to fill, sometimes 
take the Genitive, following the analogy of plenus, fall, (see 39). — 
nudus, naked; orbus, deprived of; liber, free, take the Ablative of 
Things, as: urbs nuda praesidio, the city naked of defence; but with 
Persons the Preposition ab must be used, as: contio ab optimatibus 
orba, the assembly deprived of the aristocracy. — inanis, vacuus, 
void; onustus, laden; praeditus, endowed, always take the Ablative. 
— refertus, stuffed (Partic. of refercio) always takes the Ablative of 
the Thing; with Persons also the Genitive may be used, as: maria sunt 
rcferta praedonibus, or praedonum, the seas are replete with pirates. 

88. opus est, there is need, it is needful, necessary, 
takes the Dative of the Person who is in want, and the 
Ablative of the Thing wanted. But the Thing wanted 
may be the Subject and opus est (sunt) the Predicate. 

opus mihi est libro, I want a book, 

liber mihi opus est, a book is what I want, . 

opus mihi est libris, I want books, 

libri mihi opus sunt, books are what I want. 



1. The former construction must regularly be used in 
sentences, and th^ latter with Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives; dpus is 
always indeclinable, as: 

nihil opus est duce, there is no need of a leader, 

multa opus sunt, there is need of many things. 



_ 52 — 

2. When the thing wanted is expressed by a Verb, the Infinitive 
or the Accusative with tho Infinitive is used, as: opus est te animo 
valere, ut corpore possis, you must be well in mind in order to be 
well in body. The Ablative of the Perfect Participle Passive and of 
the Supine are rare, thus: quod parato opus est, para, what must be 
got ready, get ready. 

89. The Adjectives dignus, worthy, indignus, un- 
worthy take the Ablative, as: 

vir patre,- avo, majoribus dignissmms, a man most worthy of his 
father, grandfather, and ancestors. 

1. So also dignor, I am deemed worthy; Active: dignum judico, 
I deem worthy. — alienus, foreign = not appropriate, may take the 
Ablative, as: aliquid alienum sua dignitate ducere, to deem something 
beneath one's character. When meaning averse, alienated from, 
alienus must take the Preposition a, as: alieno a te ammo fuit, his 
mind was alienated from you. 

90. The Deponents 

utor, fruor, fungor 
potior, and vescor, 

and their Compounds, abutor, perfruor, defungor, 

perfungor, govern the Ablative, after the manner of 

a direct object: 

&tor, -I, to use defungor, -T, to discharge 

abutor, -I, to abuse perfungor, -I, to fulfil 

fruor, -I, to enjoy potior, -Iri, to make one's self 

perfruor, -i, to enjoy fully master of 

iungor, -I, to discharge vescor, -I, to feed 

Hannibal cum victoria posset uti, frui maluit, ivhile Hannibal 
could make use of his victory he preferred to enjoy it } 

Numidae plerumque lacte et carne ferina vescuntur, the Numi- 
diansfeed mostly on milk and game. 

1. uti, to use, often takes a second Ablative of further definition, 
as: uti aliquo amico, to avail one's self of a man's friendship, to 
have a friend in a man. This Verb has a great range of meaning. 
Special Uses worthy of note are the following: 

consilio uti, to follow advice; leglbus uti, to obey the laifs; [thing. 

bono patre uti, to have a good father; male uti aliqua re, to make bad use of a 

2. potior sometimes takes the Genitive, always in the phrase: 
pdtlrl rerum, to get control of offhir$. 



— 53 — 

Time and Place. 
Prepositions. 

91. The Preposition marks the relation of a Sub- 
stantive to another word, and was originally employed 
to indicate more clearly direction or place. Preposi- 
tions are used either with the Accusative or Ablative. 

92. Prepositions construed with the Accusative: 

ante, apud, ad, ad vers us, 
circum, circa, citra, cis, 
erga, contra, inter, extra, 
infra, intra, juxta, 6b, 
penes, (pone), post & praeter, 
prope, propter, per, secundum, 
supra, versus, ultra, trans, 
ad, with many varieties of application, generally means to. It 
denotes: 

direction toward a place or person, as: ad urbem, to town; 
venio ad te, / come to you; 

nearness with reference to place, time or quantity, as: urbs sita 
ad mare, a town situated near the sea; ad vesperam, towards 
evening; ad ducentos, nearly 200; 

time, answering the question till when? as: ad summam senec- 
tutem, until extreme old age. It also denotes a fixed time, as: ad 
horam, at the hour; 

aim or purpose = in respect of, as: res ad bellum utiles, 
things useful for ivar; 

accord or agreement = according to, as: ad voluntatem ali- 
cujus loqui, to speak according to some one's will. 
Particular Phrases are: 
ad verbum, word for word, 

nihil ad hanc rem, nothing in comparison with this thing, 
ad unum omnes, all to the last man. 
&pud, at, chiefly used of persons, denotes: 
nearness or presence, as: apud Caesarem, at Caesar's house; 
apud judices, before, in presence of, the judges; apud Can- 
nas, near Cannae; 

situation or estimation among, regard by, as: apud vetSres, 
among the ancients; apud rae nihil valet homlnum opinio, ivith 
me the opinion of the multitude has no weight* 



— 54 — 

apiid is also used with the Names of Authors instead of In 
with the name of their works, as: apiid Plinium legtmus, we read 
in Pliny (in his works). 

ante, before, means preceding in space or time, as: ante 
portas, before the gates; ante noctem, before night. It is never 
used in the sense of preceding in rank or dignity. 

ad versus, more rarely adverstim, indicates: 

direction toward & place or person, and combines the meanings 
of both against and toward, in a friendly or hostile sense, as: 
castra adversus urbem ponere, to pitch the camp over agaitist 
the city; ad versus allquem pugnare, to fight with (against) 
some one; pietas adversus parentes, duty to(ward) parents. 

cis and citra, on this side, are used in reference to place, 
opposed to trans, as: citra Kubiconem, on this side of the 

Rubicon. 

circa and circum are equivalent to both around and about 
with reference to place, as: circum haec loca, hereabout: homi- 
nes circum se habent, they have people with them, circa is also 
used of time, as: circa eandem horam, about the same hour. 

Particular Phrase: 
circum amlcos mittere, to send around to one's friends. 

circiter, near, about, is used of time only, as: circiter meri- 
diem, about noon, but is more commonly an Adverb. 

contra is equivalent to against in both its meanings: 
opposite to, as: contra Italiam, over against Italy; 
in opposition to (with the notion of hostility), as: contra naturam 
vivere, to live against nature. 

erga, toicard, always implies friendly feelings, as: divina boni- 
tas erga homines, God's goodness toward men. 

extra means without = out of sometimes beyond or except, 
as: extra urbem, without the city; extra modum, beyond 
measure; extra ducem reliqui rapaces sunt, except the leader the 
rest are robbers. 

intra denotes within, in regard to both place and time, as: 
intra urbem, within the city; intra decern annos, within or 
during 10 years, intra with an Ordinal Number means before the 
expiration of, as: intra declmum diem urbem cepit, before the 
expiration of the loth day he took the city. 



00 



inter is equivalent to both between and among, as: inter Pa- 
dum ct Alpes, between the Po and the Alps; Croesus inter reges 
opulentissimus, Croesus, the ivealthiest among kings. It is also 
used to denote time, as: inter cenam, daring dinner; inter lu- 
dendum, tvhile playing. "With the Personal Pronouns, as: inter 
nos, vos, eos, se, it is employed in a reciprocal sense, answering to 
the English one another, each other, as: Ciceronis pueri amant 
inter se, Cicero's boys love one another. 

infra, below, means: 

lower in place, as: infra caelum, tinder the sky; 

lower in rank or esteem, as: eum infra omnes puto, I think 
him beneath all men; 

later in time, as: HomGrus non infra Lycurgum fuit, Homer 
was not later than Lycurgus; 

smaller than, as: magnitudme infra elephantum, in size 
smaller than an elephant. 

jnxta, hard by, beside, as: juxta murum castra posiiit, he 
-pitched the camp hard by the wall. 

6b sometimes means before, as: ob ociilos versari, to be before 
the eyes. Generally it means by reason of, on account of, as: ob 
earn causam, for that reason. 

penes denotes in the possession or power of, as: summum im- 
perluin penes Agamemnonem erat, the chief command was in 
the hands of Agamemnon. 

per, through, is used in a great variety of applications, as: 

denoting place, from end to end, as: per urbem ire, to go 
through the city; 

denoting duration, as: per noctem, during the night; 

denoting the agent or means, as: per amlcum servatus sum, by 
(means of) my friend I was saved; 

denoting the manner in which a thing is done, as: per litteras, 
by letter; per potestatem, by authority; per iram, from or in 
anger; per vim, by violence; 

denoting the object invoked in forms of swearing y as: per deos 
immortales jurare, to swear by the immortal gods. 

Particular Phrases: 
per me licet, you may for all I care; per aetatem, on account 
of his age; per valetudlnem, on account of ill health; per se, of 
itself. 



- 56 — 

post, after, denotes: 

behind in place, as: post equitem sedet atra cura, behind the 
rider sits black care; 

later in time, as: post tenebras lux, after darkness comes light 

praeter primarily means along, as: praeter litus, along 
shore; yet it is more commonly equivalent to except or besides, as: 
praeter te amicum neminem habeo, except you I have no friend; 
praeter auetoritatem etiam vires habet, besides authority he has 
also strength. 

Particular Phrases: 
praeter spem, contrary to hope; praeter modum, immoderately; 
praeter ceteros, more than the rest 

prope, near, near by, as: prope urbem, near the city; (also, 
prope ab urbe; hence the expression: prope abesse ab aliqua re, 
to be not far from a thing). 

propter is equivalent to propg, near, as: propter Siciliam in- 
sulae Yuleaniae sunt, near Sicily are the Vulcanian islands; but 
most frequently it is on account of implying motive or reason, as: 
propter modestiam tuam te diligo, Hove you on account of your 
modesty, 

secundum (derived from sequi, to follow) means: 

along, as: secundum mare iter facere, to, make a journey 
along the sea shore; 

next to, immediately after, as: secundum cenam, imme- 
diately after dinner; 

according to, as: secundum naturam vivere, to live according 
to nature; in favor of, as: secundum allquem decernere, to de- 
cide in one's favor. 

supra, above (opposite to infra,), denotes: 

higher in place, as: supra lunam, above the moon; 

more than, superior to, as: supra duos menses, more than 
two months; supra vires, above one's strength. 

trans, beyond, across, on the other side, is used with Yerbs ex- 
pressing motion, as: multae aves ante hiemem trans mare migrant, 
many birds migrate across the sea before winter; also with Yerbs 
expressing rest, as: eo ipso tempore trans mare fui, at that very 
time I was beyond the sea. 

versus, towards, -ward, follows an Accusative which is usually 
governed by ad or in, as: ad Oceanum versus proficisci, to set out 



— 57 — 

towards the ocean. With domiis and names ot towns versus alone 
is used, as: Romam versus, Homeward; domum versus, home- 
ward. 

ultra signifies beyond, on the further side, as: ultra Atlantem 
m out em, beyond mount Atlas. It is also used to denote measure^ 
as: ultra septa transilire, to go beyond bounds. 

93. Prepositions construed with the Ablative: 
a, ab, al>s, cum, de, 
coram, pro, ex, e, 
tenus, sine, prae. 

a (ab, abs), from, is used in a variety of applications; it de- 
notes: 

the point of time or space at which the action, state, etc. are 
regarded as setting out, or beginning, as: a prima aetate, from an 
early age; ab urbe profectus est, he departed from the city; of 
time also immediately after, as: a cena allquid facere, to do some- 
thing immediately after dinner; 

that from which anything proceeds or by which anything is 
produced, as: calor est a sole, the heat is from the sun; ab hoste 
mterfectus est, he was killed by an enemy; 

that from which anything is guarded,, with such Verbs as de- 
fendere, tuerl, etc., as: urbem defendere ab hostlbus, to defend the 
city against the enemy; 

that with reference to which anything is or is done, equivalent 
to w ith respect to, as: imparati sumus a militibus, as to soldiers 
we are not ready. 

Before vowels and li, it is ab; before consonants, a or ab; 
abs before te and before c and t in Compounds, as: abscGdo, absttili. 
We say a te and abs te, never ab te. 

absque, without, is rarely used. 

de primarily means down from or away from, as: de caelo, 
down from heaven; de vita decedere, to depart from life. It is 
also used in a partitive sense in such expressions as: unus de 
plebe, one of the people. When denoting time, it is as early as, 
even at, as: de nocte, even at night; de mense Decembri, as 
early as December. Most commonly, however, it is concerning, 
about or on, as: de gestis Alexandri, on the exploits of Alexander; 
liber de amicitia, a book <m friendship. Sometimes it is equivalent 
to secundum, according to, as: de consilio meo, according to my 
advice; and frequently it denotes the manner of action, as: fieiitto 



~ 58 — 

(de novo), de integro, afresh; de improvlso, unexpectedly; de in- 
dustria, purposely; qua de causa, quibus de causis, for which reason 
or reasons. 

coram, in the presence of before, as: coram amico, in the 
presence of a friend. When used as an Adverb, coram means 
personally, as: coram adesse, to be present in person. 

cum, with, expresses association or accompanying circum- 
stances, as: cum aliquo ire, to go with some one; esse cum telo, 
to go armed; confligere cum hoste, to fight with the enemy, 

cum witli the Ablative of a Personal Pronoun is always appended 
to it, as: tecum loquitur, he talks ivith you; and commonly also with 
the Relative: quocum, quibuscum (likewise cum quo, cum quibus) ; 
quicum is used for the Ablative of both Numbers and all Genders. 

e, ex, out of, from, denotes: 

the place, answering to the question whence? as: aliquem ex 
regno pellere, to drive some one out of the kingdom; e longinquo 
videre, to see from afar; ex equo pugnare, to fight on horseback; 

the point of time from xohich, as: ex illo die, from that day; 

the cause out of which anything proceeds, as: ex nihilo nihil fit, 
of nothing nothing comes; aeger ex vulnere, sick from a wound; 
ex quo, whence or for which reason. 

In a great many cases e (ex) has the signification in accordance 
with, as: ex ejus sententia, according to his opinion; or it denotes 
the manner of an action, as: ex ammo laudare, to praise heartily; 
ex improvlso, ex inopinato, unexpectedly; ex composite, according 
to agreement; ex memoria, by heart; ex tempore clicere, to speak 
extempore (off hand). In such phrases as: unus e multis, one of 
many, it is used in a partitive sense. 

Mark the Particular Phrases: 
ex tua re, to your advantage; e republica, for the good of the state. 
Before consonants it is e; before vowels and consonants, ex. 

pro means: 

before or in front of preceding in space, as: pro castris aciem 
instruere, to array the army for battle before the camp; 

for = in defence of, in behalf of, as: pro patrlamori, to die for 
one's country; 

for = instead of, as: pro consule, in place of consul; 

in accordance with or in proportion to, as: pro portione, in 
proportion; pro virlli parte, to the best of one's ability. 



— 59 — 

prae is before = in front of only in combination with agere* 
and lerre, as: prae se ferre, to carry before one's self i. e. to show. 
Most commonly it means: in comparison with, in contrast with, 
denoting preference, as: prae me beatus es, in comparison with 
me you are happy; but, before all is praeter omnes (see praeter). 
It is also frequently used in negative sentences in the sense of on 
account of, implying an obstacle, as: prae lacrimis scribere non 
possum, I cannot write on account of tears. 

teniis, as far as, follows its noun, as: Tauro tenus, as far as 
Taurus; hoc tenus, hitherto. 

sine, without, opposed to cum, has a negative power, hence 
we say: sine ulla spe, witJiout any hope. 

94. Prepositions construed with the Accusative & Ablative: 
sub, super, subter, in. 

stib and in, when followed by the Accusative, indicate motion 
towards, when by the Ablative, rest in, a place. 

sub with the Accusative means: 

under, close to, as: sub montem succedere, to come close to 
the hill; 

about, shortly before, of time, as: sub noctem, towards night; 
sub lucem, near daylight; 

sub with the Ablative is always: 

under, as: sub terra habitare, to live under ground; sub divo, 
in the open air; sub monte, at the foot of a hill. 

super has the Ablative only when used in the sense of de, con- 
cerni)ig, as: hac super re, concerning this thing. With the 
Accusative it is over, above, answering to the questions whither? and 
where? as: super allquem sedere, to sit above some one. 

Particular Phrases: vulnus super vulnus, ivound upon wound; 
super cenam, during dinner. 

subter, beneath, takes the Accusative answering to the questions 
whither? and where? as: subter togam, under the toga. 

in, with theAccrsative denotes entrance with regard to place, as: 
in urbem venit, lie came into town; it also indicates the object 
toward which an action is directed, either with & friendly or hostile 
intention, as: amor in patrem, love for one's father; oratlo in 
CatilTnam, a speech against Catiline. With words denoting time 
it is equivalent to for, expressing a predetermination of that time, 
as: in diem vivere, to live for the day; in perpetuum, forever; in 
dies, from day to day. 



— 60 — 

Particular Phrases: hunc in modum, in this way; mirum in modum, 
in a wonderful manner; in vicem, alternately or instead of; in has 
leges, under these conditions; in speclem, apparently; accipere in 
bonam, malam partem, to take well, ill. 

in with the Ablative, denotes presence in place, time or circum- 
stances, as: in urbe habito, / live in town; est mihi in ammo, / 
have it in mind; in scribendo, while writing. When a number 
or quantity is indicated, it is equivalent to among, as: numerari in 
bonis civibus, to be counted among the good citizens. 

Particular Plirases: in armis esse, to be under arms; aliquid in 
oculis est, something is before the eyes; aliquid in manibus mihi est, 
/ have something in hand; quantum in me est, to the utmost of my 
ability. 

Place. . Names of Towns. 

95. To express relations of Place Prepositions are 
necessary, viz: 

In with the Ablative to denote the place where; 

In or ad with the Accusative to denote the place to 
which ; 

ex with the Ablative to denote the place from which. 

Besides the appellative nouns, the names of the great 

divisions of the globe, of countries, and large islands 

belong to this rule, thus: 

in urbe, in town ad urbem, to town 

in Europam, to Europe ex Britannia, from Britanny. 

96. But the Prepositions are not used with the 
names of Towns and small Islands. 

In answer to the question whither? names of towns 
and small islands are put in the Accusative. 

In answer to the question whence ? names of towns 
and small islands are put in the Ablative. 

In answer to the question where ? names of towns 
and small islands, if of the First or Second Declension 



— 61 — 

and in the Singular are put in the Genitive ; but if 
the names are of the Plural number or belong to the 
Third Declension, they are put in the Ablative. 
Examples are: 
legati AthSnas missi sunt, envoys were sent to Athens; 
Demaratus fugit Tarquinlos Corinth o, Demaratus fledto Tarquinii 

from Corinth; 
ut Romae consules, sic Carthagine quotannis bini reges creabantur, 
as at Rome two consuls, so in Carthage two kings were yearly 
created; 
Tarquinlus Superbus mortuus est Cumis, Tarquinius Superbus 
died at Cumae. 

1. For the place ivhere there was formerly a special Case, the 
Locative, ending in I which is preserved in Carthagini, at Carthage; 
run, in the country, etc. 

2. Prepositions are used with names of towns to mark the relation 
more definitely; thus, ad means to the neighborhood of as: ad Cap fl- 
am, in the neighborhood of Capua; tres sunt viae ad Mutlnam, there 
are three roads to Mutina. In like manner, ab is used to denote 
from the neighborhood of a place, as: Caesar a Gergovia discessit, 
Caesar withdrew from the neighborhood of Gergovia. To denote 
origin, or coming from a place, Gentile Adjectives are commonly em- 
ployed, as: Pindarus Thebanus, Pindar, a native of Thebes; oriun- 
dus a, denotes the birthplace of remote progenitors. 

3. In answer to the question where? names of towns when qualified 
by a Pronoun, by totus,or anAdjective which forms part of the proper 
name, are put in the Ablative, with or without the Preposition In, as: 

ipsa Roma (in ipsa Roma), at Rome itself, 

tota Corintho, in the whole of Corinth, 

Athenis tuis, at your Athens, 

Alba Longa, at Alba Longa, 

Eboraco Novo, at New York, 
Adjectives v)hich do not form part of the proper name, mast be 
joined with urbs, oppidum, civitas as Apposition; see 5, below. 
In answer to the questions whence and whither, Adjectives and 
Pronouns do not influence the construction. 

4. urbs, oppidum, colonia, municipium, etc., without an 
Attribute, are placed before the proper name, and the Preposition 
in or ex is always employed, thus: 

in urbem Cirtam, to the city of Oirta, 

ex opptdo Gergovia, from the town of Gergovia, 

in urbe Roma, in the city of Borne. 



— 62 — 

5. urbs, oppidum, colonia, municipium, etc., with an 
Attribute, are placed after the proper name, commonly with in or ex. 
But in answer to the question where? the Ablative may be used with 
or without in, even though the proper name be in the Genitive, thus: 

AulTde, ex oppido BoeotTae, from Aulis, a tovm of Boeotia, 
Thalam, in oppidum magnum, (o Thala, a great town, 
Albae, (in) urbe munlta, at Alba, a fortified city. 

07. The words domus, rus and partly humus are 
used like names of towns without a Preposition, thus: 

domi, at home] domo, from home; domum, home; 

run, in the country ;riire, from the country; rus, into the country; 

domum reverti, domo profugere, domi remanere, 

rus ex urbe evolare, ruri vivere, rure in urbem redire, 

humi jacere, humi prosternere aliquem, humi se movere. 

1. The Prepositions in and ex are used with clomns when quali- 
fied by Adjectives, as: in domum vete rem remigrare ex novo, to remove 
to the old house from the new. When domus is accompanied by a 
Genitive or Possessive, both constructions with or without Prepositions 
are admitted, as: 

domi tuae (alienae) or in domotua (aliena), 

domum Caesaris „ in domum O.esaris, 

domo Manlii n e domo Manlii. 

2. Notice also: domi belllque, in peace and in war; domi militlae- 
que, at home and in the field; but when used alone: in pace, in 
bello, in militia. 

98. The Ablative is used without a Preposition 
to denote the place where, when the name of the 

place is qualified by totus or cunctus, 
to denote the way by which, 

with locus in the sense of passage in a book, posi- 
tion, situation, when qualified by Adjectives, thus: 

Callimachus toto semper cantabTtur orbe, Callimachus will al- 
ways be sung throughout the world; 

Caesar equites via breviore praemlsit, Caesar sent forward the 
cavalry by a shorter road; 

nunc meliore loco res sunt nostrae, our affairs are now in better 
condition. 



— 63 — 

1. locus in its proper meaning when accompanied by an Adjec- 
tive or Pronoun, may be used with or without in, as: hoc loco, in 
hoc loco; nmltis locis, in multis locis. — Loco (in loco) means, at 
the right place or lime. 

2. In citations from books the Ablative of the place where is used 
without in: libro tertlo, book third; versu declmo, tenth verse. 

99. The Ablative is used with in to denote the 
place whither (the result of the motion), with Verbs 
Signifying: 

to place, put, ponere, locare, collocare; to set, sta- 
tuere, constituere; to place one's self , consistere; 
to settle, considere; 

to fix, figere, defigere; to carve upon, insculpere, 
inscribere, incidere; to press upon, imprimere ; 

to count among, numerare, habere, ducere, putare; 

Plato ratiohem in caplte posuit, Plato has put reason in the head; 
Lucretla cultrum in corde deflgit, Lucretia plants a knife in her 

heart; 
in bonis civibus numerari summa laus est, it is the greatest praise 

to be counted among the good citizens. 

1. Of the compounds of ponere, imponere takes in with the 
Accusative, as: milites in navem imponere, to put the soldiers on 
board ship. 

100. Again, the Accusative is used with the Prepo- 
sition in, to denote the place where, with Yerbs signi- 
fying: 

to arrive, advenlre, pervenlre; 

to come together, con venire, colre, concurrere- to 

meet, congrcgari; to assemble, call together, cogere, 

contrahere; as: 

conjurati in curiam convenSrunt, the conspirators met in the 

senate house, 
consilium domum suam convocavit, he called a council at his oivri 

house. 



— 6^ — 

1. nuntiare, to carry a message, also takes in with the Accusa- 
tive; deverti, to put up, and appelli, to land take &d, as: appelli ad 
oram AMcae, to land at the shore of Africa; deverti ad villain, to 
put up at a country-house. 

2. When the place at which a person arrives is expressed by 
the name of a town, the Accusative alone is used, and when expressed 
by an Adverb, hue, eo, quo. 

3. Prepositions often' retain their original meaning as Adverbs. 
This is especially the case with: 

ante, post, circiter, circa, circum, citra, ultra, extra, infra, supra, 
super, juxta, propter, contra, coram, subter. 

These may be used without any Case when two Prepositions be- 
long to the same Substantive, as: intra vallum et extra, inside the 
rampart and outside; not: intra et extra vallum. With different 
Cases the Substantive is repeated, as: pro Scipione et adversus 
Scipionem, for and against Scipio; but also is may be used in the 
second place, with like or different Cases, as: ante pugnam et post 
earn, before and after the battle. 

Space. 

101. Extent of Space is put in the Accusative after 
Adjectives and Adverbs in answer to the questions 
how far? how long? how wide? how high? how 
deep? as: 

milites aggerem altum pedes octoginta exstruxgrunt, the soldiers 

threw up a mound eighty feet high, 
fossa pedes trecentos longa est, sex pedes alta, the ditch is 

three hundred feet long, six feet deep, 
terra duos pedes alte infossa est, the earth was dug into two feet 

deep. 

1. Measure is often expressed as Quality by the Genitive (see 30. 2) 
without an Adjective of extent (latus, longfis, altus), as: 

vallnm pedum duodecim fieri jussit, he ordered a rampart to be made of twelve 
feet (in height). 

The Adjectives crassus and magniis, thick, are commonly re- 
placed by the Substantives crassitudo and magnitudo in the Ablative 
of Quality, as: 
clavi ferrei digfti pollicis crassitudtne, iron naiU an inch thick (of the thickness 
of an inch)* 



— 65 — 

102. To denote distance how far, how long, especi- 
ally with abesse, distare, the Accusative or the Ablative 

may be used, as: 
campus Marathon abest ab oppido Atheniensmm circiter milia 

passuum decern, the plain of Marathon is about ten miles from 

the city of Athens, 
Ariovistus milibus passuum sex a Caesaris castris consedit, Ario- 

vistus halted six miles from Caesar's camp. 

1. With spatium and intervallum, only the Ablative is used, as: 
quindecim ferme milium spatio castra ab Tarento posuit, he pitched his camp 

a distance of nearly fifteen miles from Tarentum. 

2. When the starting-point is not expressed, a, ab with the 
Ablative may be used to denote the distance, as: 

hostes ab niillbus passuum duobus castra posueruut, the enemy pitched their 
camp two miles ojf. 

Time. 

103. Time when is expressed by the Ablative of 

words denoting time, such as: 
tempiis, time dies, a day aestas, summer 

aetas, an age mensis, a month auctumnus, autumn 

punctum temporis, annus, a year hiems, winter 

a moment saecfilura, a cen£u?v/ vesper, evening 

hora, an hour ver, spring nox, night 

qua nocte natus est Alexander, eadem Dianae Ephesiae templum 
deflagravit, on the same night on which Alexander ivas born, 
the temple of Diana of Ephesus burnt to the ground. 

1. Words not explicitly expressing time, such as: bellum, pax, 
pueritia, and the like, usually take in with the Ablative; but they 
are without in, if accompanied by an Adjective or Genitive, thus: 

in bello, in icar times bello Persico, at the time of the Persian 

in pace, in time of peace war 

in pueritia, in boyhood prima pueritia, in early boyhood 

in adulescentia, in youth bello Antiochi, during the war icith 

in senectute, in old age Antiochus. 

2. The Preposition is omitted in the following Idiomatieal Phrases: 
initio | . temporibus } . r . 

principio [ «* the beginning ^ q ^ m the times of 

adventu, at the arrival bis die, twice a day 

discessu, at the departure hora nona, at 9 o'clock 

ludis, during the games comitlis, at the time of the fcc'io** 



— 66 — 

3. in tempore means at the right time. In place of our Cardinals 
the Latin employs the Ordinals to denote the dates of years and 
hours of the day, as: 

anno millesimo o<tingentesTmo octogesimo tertio post Christum natum, in the 
year 1833 after the birth of Chrtet; 

quota hora est? tertia hora, what o'clock is it? Tliree o'clock. 

104. Time how long is put in the Accusative, as: 

lacrimans in carcere mater noctes diesque assidebat, the mother 
sat in prison weeping night and day. 

1. The Preposition per may be added to denote from beginning 
to end, as: 

ludi per decern dies facti sunt, the games were celebrated through ten whole days. 

2. In connection with a Substantive time how long is expressed 
by the Genitive of Quality (see 30. 2.), as: 

exsillum quattuordecim annorum toleravit, he bore an exile of fourteen years. 

105. Distance of time how long before, or after, is 
expressed by the Ablative of Measure with ante or 
post following, thus: 

paucis ante diebus, paucis diebus ante, a few days before, 
paucis post diebus, paucis diebus post, a few days after. 

1. The Accusative may also be employed, but then the Preposition 
precedes, as: 

ante, post paucos dies, a few days before, after. 

Either Case and the Cardinal as well as the Ordinal Number may be used 
when the Preposition is placed between the Numeral and the Sub- 
stantive. Hence the English phrase: three years after, may be ex- 
pressed as follows: 

tribus annis post post tres annos 

tertio anno post post tertium annum 

tribus post annis tres post annos 

tertio post anno tertium post annum 

2. An Accusative may be added to ante and post when they are 
postponed, as: 

paucis diebus post mortem Africani, a few days after the death of Africanus. 

3. qu&m and a Verb may be added to all the forms specified 
above, as: 

tribus annis postquam venerat \ 

post tres annos quam venerat / three years after he had 

tertio anno postquam venSrat C come. 

post annum tertium quam venSrat ) 



— 67 — 

4. Time hoiv long before the present moment is expressed by ab- 
hinc with the Accusative, as: 

abliinc sex menses, six months ago. 
But ante with the Accusative may also be used, or the Ablative with 
the Pronoun hie, thus: 

ante tres annos or his tribus annis, these three years, within the last three 
years. 

106. Time within which is expressed by the Abla- 
tive or by intra with the Accusative, as: 

Agamemno vix decern annis (intra decern annos) unam cepit ur- 
bera, Agamemnon in ten years hardly took one city. 

1. intra, with an Ordinal Numeral, means: before the expiration 
of as: 
Hannibal intra dectmum diem urbem cepit, before the expiration of the tenth 
day Hannibal took the city. 

107. Time how long since is commonly expressed 
by an Ordinal Number in the Accusative, including the 
running term, with or without jam, as: 

Mithridates jam annum tertlum et vigeslmum regnat, Mithridates 
has reigned going on twenty three years. 

108. Time for how long or for which is expressed 

by In with the Accusative, as: 

Phaeton currum paternum in diem rogavit, Phaeton asked his 
father's chariot for a day. 

109. The question how old is answered in different 
ways: 

By natus with the Accusative, as: 

puer decern annos natus est, the boy is ten years old; 

By the Genitive of Quality, as: 
Hamilcar secum duxit filium Hannibalem annorum novem, Ha- 

milcar took with him his son Hannibal nine years of age; 

By agere, to pass, with annus and an Ordinal 
Number, as: 

quartum annum ago et octogeslmum, lam eighty three years oloL 



— 68 — 

1. Older and younger are expressed by major and minSr with 
following Ablative, as: 

major quinque et triginta annis, older than thirty five years, 

but natus major (minor) with following Accusative without quam 
may also be used, as: 
annos natus major quadraginta, over forty years old. 

Special Uses of Substantives. 

no. The Latin employs Concrete Substantives in- 
stead of Abstracts: 

a. In stating the age at which a person performs any action; 
piier, adulescens (adiilescentiilus, admodiim adulescens) juvenis, 
senex (admodum sen ex), grandis natii, instead of: in pueritia, adu- 
lescentia, &c. So likewise: a parvulo, ab infante, a puertilo, ab 
adulescentiilo (when said of several persons all in the Plural) ; but 
only ab ineunte, or a prima aetate, from the outset in life; 

b. When official titles are used to denote time, as: Cicerone con- 
sole = in consulatu Ciceronis; ante or post Ciceronem consulem. 
In apposition to a subject, both expressions may be used, as: Clo- 
dius, tribunus plebis, and: Clodius in tribunatu plebis T Clodius while 
tribune of the commons. 

ill. Again, Abstract Nouns are often used for 

Concretes, as: 

custodia for custodes 

levis armatura ,, leviter armati 
gravis armatura ,, graviter armati 
conjurati5 ,, conjurati 

latrocmium ,, latrones 



112. When a particular stress is laid upon an Ad- 
jective, it is often replaced by a Substantive expres- 
sing the quality in the abstract, the other Substantive 
being joined to it in the Genitive, as: viarum asperi- 
tates, for viae asperae, the rough roads; verni tern- 
poris suavitas, sweet spring-time, 



j uven tus for 


juvenes 


nobilitas ,, 


nobiles 


posteritas,, 


posterl 


vleinitas „ 


vicini 


servitiiim ,, 


servi 


legatio ,, 


legatl 



— 69 — 

lis. The Singular in a collective sense is often used 
for the Plural: 

a. Of persons, especially in military expressions, as: miles, pedes, 
eques, hostis, Roman ns, the soldiery, infantry, &c; 

b. Of animals, plants and fruits, as: faba, beans; porcus, pig 
(meat); galllna, fowl (as articles of food). 

114:. In Latin the Plural is often used where the 
English employs the Singular: 

a. With Abstract Substantives signifying the quality in separate 
acts or exhibitions, as: adventus imperatorum, the arrival(s) of the 
generals; interitus exercituum, the defeat(s) of the armies. In a 
similar manner the Plural of Abstract Nouns often denotes different 
species of the same quality, as: fortitudlnes, gallant actions; in- 
sanlae, mad tricks; 

b. With Concrete Substantives when referring to several subjects, 
so always of the body and its paints, as: milltes terga dant, corpora 
curant, the soldiers turn to flight, refresh themselves; 

c. With Substantives denoting phenomena of nature, as: nives, 
snow; grandlnes, hail; pluvlae, rain; prulnae, hoar-frost. 

1. Nouns of materials are also used as names of articles made of 
that material, or kinds of it, and as such have Plurals, as: aera, 
articles of bronze; vina, kinds of wine; carnes, p)ieces of meat; 
ligna, logs of wood. 

2. animus and corpus are often used as a periphrasis for the 
person himself instead of a Pronoun or Substantive, as: anlmos mili- 
tum confirmare, to encourage the soldiers; animum coercere, to re- 
strain one's self; corpora lavare, to bathe one's self; corpus humi 
prosternere, to throw one's self on the ground. 

115. Proper Names are capable of forming Plurals 
signifying either the more than one individual bear- 
ing the same name, or individuals resembling the 
one to whom the name belongs, as: Horatii, the 
Horatii; Nerones, Neros (tyrants). 

116. Substantives which are properly Perfect Par- 
ticiples (Passive), such as: factum, deed; dictum, 



— 70 — 

saying; responsum, ansiver; inventum, invention, may 
be modified either by Adverbs or Adjectives, as: 

bene facta, good deeds facete dicta, witty remarks 

male facta, evil deeds praeclare facta ) illustrious 

recte facta, right actions praeclara facta f deeds. 

117. The Substantive nemo (never nullus) may be 

joined to such Substantives as are originally Adjectives, 

as: nemo'mortalis, Romanus. In like manner it is used 

for nullus with Substantives denoting persons, as: nemo 

civis, hostis, poeta, scriptor, and even homo. Instead of 

nemlnis and nemine, the Genitive and Ablative of 

nullus are regularly used as Substantives. The oblique 

Cases of nihil are supplied by the corresponding Cases 

of nulla res. But the Ablative nihilo is found with the 

Prepositions ab, de, ex and pro, and the Accusative 

nihilum in such phrases as: interire in nihilum, to be 

reduced to nothing; ad nihilum venire, to come to nothing. 

I. Mark the Idiomatic Expressions: 

nemo unquam, never anybody nihil unquam, never anything 

nemo usquam, nowhere anybody nihil usquam, nowhere anything* 

Special Uses of Adjectives. 

I. Positive. 

US. Adjectives are often used as Nouns, the Mas- 
culine chiefly in the Plural to denote men or people in 
general of that kind, as : 

boni, the good summi, the gentle 

improbi, the loicked infirm, the simple 

divites, the rich docti, the learned 

pauperes, the poor indocti, the ignorant 

The Singular of Adjectives in this use is rare except 
in the Genitive, as : stulti est, it is the mark of a fool 
(see 44. 2.). 



— 71 - 

1. Gentile Adjectives in Ajiposition are used as Substantives, as: 
Epaminoudas Thebanus, Epaminondas, a native of Thebes; other- 
wise a noun must be added, as : homo Thebanus, or when meaning 
a certain one not definitely designated to the hearer, Thebanus qui* 
dam. 

119. A Neuter Adjective in the Singular commonly 
denotes an abstract quality, as : 

honestum, honor calidum, heat 

justum, justice frigidum, cold. 

Occasionally it is also used to denote a single object, 
as in the phrases: gratum facere, to do a favor; ve- 
rum dicere, to tell the truth; falsum scribere, to write 
something wrong. 

1. Adjectives which have practically become Nouns, are used in 
the Singular and Plural, as: 

bonum, a good simile, a simile 

bona, blessings insigne, a decoration 

malum, an evil commune, a community 

ma:a, misfortunes extremum, the end 

commodum,prq/i£ reltquum, the rest 

incommodum, injury hibenia, winter^quarters. 

2. The use of the Neuter Singular of an Adjective is common in 
the Partitive Genitive, as: nihil novi, and in connection with Pre- 
positions, as: 

de medio tolle're, to dispatch, 

in media relinquere, to leave undecided, 

in praecepa dare, to bring to the brink of ruin, 

in tuto esse, to be safe, 

in publico, in the street; — de integro, afresh. 

120. A Neuter Adjective in the Plural is used to 

denote objects in general of that kind, as : honesta, 

honorable deeds; praeterita, the past; omnia praeclara 

rara, everything remarkable is scarce. 

1. But when the Gender of the Adjective so used would be 
doubtful, especially in the oblique Cases, res with a feminine 
Adjective is used, as: rerum multarum, rather than multorum, of 
many things. 



_ 72 — 

121. The Adjective is often used instead of 

I. a Subjective or Objective Genitive, 

II. a Noun with a Preposition to denote origin, time, 

place or material, as : 

domusregia, the king's palace Miltiades Atheniensis, Miltiades 
films herilis, the master's son of Athens 

amor patrius, the father's love urbs maritima, a city on the sea 

aliena domus, another man's iter campestre, a journey over 

house field 

turba praetoria, a retinue like oratlo Catilinaria , a speech 

a praetor's against Catiline 

divlnum humanumque scelus, proelium Cannense, the fight at 

crime against gods and men Cannae 

gestus oratorms, an orator's victoria Mithridatlca, a victory 

gesture over Mithridates. 

1. On the other hand, a Substantive in the Genitive often supplies an 
Adjective, as: 

omnium gaudium, general joy litterarum stud mm, litter ary occupation 

corporis dolor, bodily pain barbarorum mos, bai*barous custom 

grammaticorum leges, grammatical animi morbus, mental disease 

rules bestiarum or beluarum ritu, in a beastly 

corporis voluptas, sensual pleasure manner. 

122. The first part, last part, middle part, &c, of 

any place or time is generally expressed in Latin by 

the Adjectives primus, medius, ultlmus, extremus, 

infimus, Imus, summus, reliquus, etc., as: 

in summa arbore, on top of the tree, 

per mecliam urbeni, through the midst of the city, 

in imo raari, at the bottom of the sea, 

in extremo ponte, at the end of the bridge. 

1. When so used, these Adjectives precede their Nouns; in their 
proper meaning they follow their Nouns, thus: 
medius locus, the middle of the place summus mons, the top of the hill 

locus medius, the middle place mons summus, the highest hill. 

123. To a Proper Name an Adjective is only added 
as Surname, thus: Alexander Magnus. If not a 



— 73 ~ 

surname, the Adjective can only be added with vir, 
homo, urbs, oppidum, civltas, &c. as Apposition, as: 
Cato, homo doctus; Corinthus, urbs opulentissima. 

II. Comparative and Superlative. 

124. The Comparative often denotes a considerable 
or excessive degree of a quality, as: brevior, rather 
shorty audacior, too bold. 

125. The Superlative often denotes a very high 
degree of a quality without a distinct comparison, 
Superlative of Eminence, as: maximus numerus, a very 
great number; vir optimus, a very good man. 

1. This Superlative is especially usual with Proper Names where it is 
to be rendered by the English Positive, as: Quintus Fablus Maxi- 
mus, Quintus Fabius, the Great. 

2. The force of the Comparative is modified by multo, much, far; 
allquanto, some more, considerably; etlam, even, still; paullo, 
a little, somewhat, as: muito mellor, much better; etlam doctior, 
still more learned. 

3. The Superlative is strengthened by longg, by far; multo, much; 
v£l, even; unus omnium, one above all others; quam, quantus po- 
ttiit, as., as possible, as: multo maxima pars, by far the largest part; 
quam maximae coplae, forces as large as possible; sophistes vel 
maximus, the very greatest sophist. 

For the Ablative with Comparatives see 84. 

126. When two Qualities of the same object are 
compared, both Adjectives (or Adverbs) are either in 
the Comparative, or magis is used with the Adjective 
(or Adverb) denoting the higher degree, as: 

longior quam latlor acies erat, the line was longer than it icas 
broad; 

plurlmi oratores diserti magis sunt quam eloquentes, most orators 
are rather fluent than eloqxient 



_ 74 — 

127. The Comparative is to be used in reference to 

only tivo Objects, the Superlative when comparing more 

than two Objects, as: 

uter fratrum natu major est? which of the two brothers is the 
older? 

quaerltur ex duobus uter dignior, ex pluribus quis dignissTmns, 
the question is: Of two which is the worthier; of more which 
is the worthiest. 

Special Uses of Pronouns. 

Personal Pronouns. 

128. The Ferscnal Pronouns are not expressed in 

Latin, except for distinction and emphasis. In like 

manner, the Pcssessives are omitted when they are 

plainly implied in the context, as: 

amamus parentes, we love our parents; 

natura tu illl pater es, ego consillis, by nature you are his father, 
as I in guardianship. 

1. When not implied in the context, Possessives precede their 
nouns if emphatic, otherwise, they follow, as: sua sponte, of one's 
own accord; mea opinione, according to my (own) opinion; meo 
Marte, of my own head. 

For the Genitive Plural of Personal Pronouns see 28. 3. 

2. A Possessive in any Case may have a Genitive in Apposition, as: 
mea solius causa, for my sake only; nostra omnium patrla, the 
country of all of us. 

Demonstrative Pronouns. 

129. hie, this, the Demonstrative of the First Person, 

points directly to what is near the speaker or writer, 
in place, time or thought; iste, that (of thine, of yours), 
Demonstrative of the Second Person, denotes what is 
near the person addressed (hence in judicial language 
one's opponent, while hie means one's client)] ille, that % 






Demonstrative of the Third Person, refers to what is 
remote from the speaker or writer in place, time or 
thought. 

1. Accordingly, haec urbs is to the Roman, Rome, our city; haec 
temptfra, these = the present times; iste liber, that book of yours, 
or when referring to a third person, a book like that, sometimes 
implying contempt; illud mare, that (yonder) sea, or that which has 
been previously mentioned; ill<5 may mean that which is well 
known, notorious, often put after the Substantive, as: Socrates 
ille, that famous Socrates/ praeclarum illud Solonis, that famous 
saying of Solon's. 

2. In historical narrative, hie means that which has last been 
mentioned. 

3. The same distinction of place appears in the Adverbs: hie, 
hinc, hue; istic, istinc, istuc; illic, illinc, iliuc. 

ISO. hie is commonly used of what is about to be 
mentioned, as: his condicionibus, on the following 
terms. But if what follows is in contrast to some- 
thing previously mentioned, ille refers to the follow- 
ing object, while hie refers to the preceding, as: sed 
haec leviora, ilia vero graviora, but these things (just 
mentioned) are slight, those (the following) serious. 

131. In reference to two objects previously men- 
tioned, hie refers to the latter object, ille to the 
former, as: 

melius de quibusdam acerbi inimici merentur, quam ii amici, qui 
suaves videntur; illi saepe verum dicunt, hi numquam, bitter 
enemies deserve better of some people than those friends who 
seem obliging; the former often tell the truth, the latter 
never. 

But sometimes the order is reversed so that hie 
refers to the object first mentioned (usually the more 
important in which the speaker is peculiarly in- 
terested), and ille to the one mentioned last i as: 



— 7G ~ 

inelior est certa pax quani sperata victoria; haec in tua, ilia in 
deorum manu est, letter is certain peace than hoped-for 
victory; the former is in your hands, the latter in the hands 
of the gods. 

1. When used in contrasts without reference to preceding nouns, 
hie and ille are the one. .the other, as: 

aliter alii vivunt; liic lionorlbus petendis opSram dat, ille quaestui dedltus est, 
some live in one way, othei*s in another; the one strives for honors, another 
is intent on making money. 

Determinative Pronouns. 

132. The Determinative Pronoun is, the same, that, 
refers to an object just mentioned or to be explained 
by a Relative Pronoun. In its oblique Cases it is the 
common substitute for the third Personal Pronoun 
when not emphatic, as: 

mihi obviam venit tuus puer; is mihi litteras abs te reddidit, / 
was met by your servant; the same delivered to me a letter 
from you; 

is sapiens est, qui se ad casus accomodatomnes, he is a wise man 
who accommodates himself to all circumstances. 

1. As the Antecedent of a Relative, is, that, is often omitted, 
especially when it would stand in the same Case as the Relative, as: 
quern arma non fregerant, vitia vicerunt, (him) whom arms had 
not crushed did vices overcome. When emphatic, is is retained, 
and then follows the Relative Clause, as: male se res habet, cum 
quod virtute effici debet, id tentatur pecunia, it is a bad state of 
affairs when what ought to be accomplished by worth is attempted 
by money. 

2. When a quality is ascribed with emphasis to an object already 
named, is with a copulative or adversative particle is used: et is, 
isque, atque is, and that too; neque is, et is non, and that not; as: 
unam rem explicabo, eamque maxlmam, one point I shall explain, 
and that a very important one. 

If that which is added belongs to the Predicate or to the whole 
Clause, the Neuter is employed, et id, idque, as: negotium mag- 
num est navigare idque mense Quintili, it is a great affair to go to 
sea x and that too in the month of July. 



— 77 — 

133. No Determinative Pronoun is employed in 
Latin in phrases where that or those in English is 
used in place of a noun which would have to be re- 
peated, as: 

Terentii fabulis plus delector quam Plauti, I find more delight in 
the plays of Terence than in those of Plautus. 

1. Instead of the second Genitive an Adjective may be substituted 
or the name of the Person itself, as: 
Terentii fabulis plus delector quam Plautinis; 
Terentii fabulis plus delector quam Plauto. 

But the Substantive is repeated before the Genitive if the con- 
struction requires different Cases, as: 
nulla est celeritas, quae possit cum animi celeritate contendere, there is no speed 
that can possibly vie with that of the mind. 

But even then the Substantive is regularly omitted after com- 
parare, conferre cum, to compare with, as: 
bona externa comparantur cum corporis, external possessions are compared 
with those of the body. 

134. idem, the same, is used with the force of 

also, tog, yet, at the same time, to show that two or 

more Attributes or Predicates belong equally to the 

same Subject, as: 

nihil vero utile quod non idem honestum, nothing, indeed, is 
useful which is not at the same time virtuous. 

1. To show that the same Attribute or Predicate belongs to two or 
more Subjects, item, likewise, is used, as: 

aderat Romulus augur cum Remo fratre item augure, there was present Romulus 
as augur with his brother Remus, likewise as augur. 

135. ipse, self (and none other), is used for the 
sake of emphasis, which is often expressed in English 
by very, just so many, just, mere, of one J s own accord, 
and the like, as: 

nunc ipsum, just now; turn ipsum, at the very moment; 
triginta erant ipsi dies, it was just thirty days. 



— 78 — 

186. ipse, when added to Personal Pronouns, is in 
the Nominative when the Subject is emphatic, in the 
Oblique Cases when the Object is emphatic, as: 

se ipse laudat, he praises himself; 

piger sibi ipsi obstat, the lazy man stands in his own way. 

But the Nominative is often allowed or even more 

usual than an oblique Case where the English would 

lead us to expect an objective Case, especially when 

ipse precedes the Personal Pronoun, as: 

medici ipsi se curare non possunt, physicians cannot heal them- 
selves. 

1. With Possessives ipse is in the Nominative when Subject and 
Possessor are the same person, as: 

vestra ipsi virtute vicistis, you have conquered by your own valor. 
But the Genitive is necessary when the Possessive does not refer 
to the Subject, as: 
nostra ipsorum virtute vicistis, you have conquered by our own valor. 

2. ipse quoque, likewise, as well, or ipse alone, is used when 
a new Subject takes an old Predicate, the same as item, as: 

rex ipse quoque pugnavit, the king likewise fougJU. 

Relative Pronouns. 

187. The Antecedent of a Relatives is often incor- 
porated into the relative clause when the relative 
clause stands first and a Demonstrative (hie or is) 
follows in the principal clause, as: 

quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat, what trade each 
man understands, in that let him practice himself. 

188. In like manner the Adjective or the Appcsition 

of the Antecedent may stand in the relative clause, 

thus: 
vasa ea quae pulcherrlma apud eum vidSrat, those most beautiful 

vessels which he had seen at his house; 
Amanus Syrlam a Cilicla divldit, qui mons erat hostium plenus, 
Sy7*ia is divided from Cilicia by Amanus, a mountain which 
was full of enemies. 



— 79 — 

1. This construction is especially common with Comparatives, 
Superlatives and Numerals, as: 
Themislocles tie servis suis quern liabu it fid clissYmuin, ad Xerxcm raisit, The- 
mistocles sent the most faith ful slate he had to Xerxes. 

130. The Relative is often used at the beginning of 
a sentence, having nearly the value of and with a 
Personal or Demonstrative Pronoun, as: 
quae cum ita sint, since these things are so; 
futfira modo exspectant, quae quia certa esse non possunt, con- 
ficiuntur et angore etmetu, they only look forward to the future, 
and because that cannot be certain they wear themselves out 
with anguish and fear. 

1. quod is often a mere expletive at the beginning of a sentence, 
especially before si, nisi, cum, quia, quoniam, to continue a 
statement; it is sometimes translated by and, but, sometimes not at 
all, as: 

quod si illinc inanis profu^isses, tamen ista tua fuga nefarlx judicarelur, and 
even if you had fb j d icithout taking anything with you, still your flight would 
have been considered criminal. 

2. Especially to be noted is the use of a relative clause in 
parenthesis, in such phrases as: quae tua prudentla est, which 
(such) is your prudence; qua prudentla es, of which (such) pru- 
dence you are = in accordance ivith your prudence, as: 

quod si mihi permisisses qui meus amor in te est, confecissem cum heredibu?, 
if you had left this matter to me, such is my affection for you, I would 
have settled it with the heirs. 

140. When two sentences arc dependent upon each 
other, the Relative may be joined to the Principal 
Sentence, thus: 

ex quo generc est illud Catonis, qui cum ab eo quaererCtur, quid 
maxTmc in re familiari cxpedlret, respondit: bene pas'tere, here 
belongs that saying ofCato's who when asked what was the 
first requisite in a household, answered, a good board. 

But much more often the Relative is joined to the 
Dependent Clause, the Demonstrative of the Principal 
Clause being understood, thus: 
ex quo genere est illud Catonis, a quo cum quaereretur, quid 

maxlme in re familiari expediret, respondit: bene pascere. 



— 80 — . 

The latter construction must be employed when 

the clause dependent upon the relative clause has a 

Demonstrative referring to the Antecedent in the 

principal clause, thus: 

Gratidius, Antonii familiaris, cujus cum praefectus esset in Cilicia, 
est interfectus, Gratidius, Antonius*s friend, who was killed 
when he was his (Antonius's) prefect in Cilicia* 

Interrogative Pronouns. 

141. The Interrogative quis is used both as a Sub- 
stantive and as an Adjective, but quid only as a Sub- 
stantive, and qui, quod only as Adjectives, as: 

quis? who? quis rex? which king? (inquiring for the individual); 
quid dixit? what did he say? 

qui vir? what sort of a man? (inquiring for the character); 
quod scelus fecit? tvhat is the nature of the crime he has com- 
mitted? 

1. The Interrogative qui is rarely used as a Substantive, and in 
indirect questions only, as: 
Tliemistocles domino navis, qui sit, aperit, Themistocles malces known to the 
master of the ship w7io he was. 

Indefinite Pronouns. 

142. The Indefinite Pronouns quis, alTquis, quis- 
piam, are used to indicate that some person or thing 
is meant without indicating what one. Of these quis 
is used only as a Substantive in principal sentences 
and after Relatives, such as quo, quanto, etc., thus: 

dixerit quis, some one may say; 

quo quis sapientior est, eo modestlor solet esse, the wiser any 
one is, the more modest he is wont to be. 

. After the Conjunctions si, nisi, ne (neve), num, 
both quis and qui are used indifferently as Substan- 
tives and as Adjectives, as: 

ne quis, and ne qui — ne quis dux, and ne qui dux 



— 81 — 

1. quls is chiefly used after ciiin, when; si, if; nisi, if not; 
ne, lest; num, whether, and in Relative sentences, when there is 
no emphasis, as: 

ne quid nimis, nothing in excess! 

si quid juves, pluma levior gratia, if you give assistance, you will receive thanks 
lighter than a feather. 

2. aiiquis is used after si, nisi,&c, when there is emphasis, thus: 
si aliquis, if some one si aliquid, if somethin 

si quis, if any one si quid, if anything. 

143. quisquam (Subst.) and ullus (Adject.) mean 
any one at all, and are chiefly used in negative sen- 
tences; also in conditional and interrogative sentences 
implying a negative, and after vix, hardly; sine, with- 
out; quasi, as it were, thus: 

justitia numquam nocet cuiquam, justice never hurts anybody, 

legati sine ulla spe pacis domura redierunt, the ambassadors re- 
turned home ivithout any hope of peace, 

legati non sine aliqua spe pacis domum redierunt, the ambas- 
sadors returned home not without some hope' of peace. 
1. Sentences implying a Negative are the following: 
Rhetorical Questions implying a negative opinion on the part of the 
speaker, as: 

ne divitisstmi quidem homines semper beati sunt; an quisquam Croeso divitior 
fuit? Not even the richest people are always happy; or was there any one 
richer than Crozsus? (None). 
Sentences with the Comparative and quam, as: 

in rege Mithridate devincendo Pompeius fuit felicior quam quisquam superi- 
orum ducum, in the conquest of king Mithridates Pompey was more suc- 
cessful than any of the former leaders. 
Conditional Sentences, as: 

si quisquam sapiens fuit, is certe fuit Socrates, if any one at all was wise, 
Sooxites assuredly was. 

144. quidam means a certain one; in the Plural it 
is equivalent to some, sundry, as: 

quidam rhetor antiquus, a certain ancient rhetorician; 
certi quidam homines, some reliable persons. 
1. quidam is joined to Adjectives and Substantives, with or without 
qu^si, as if, to modify an expression, as: 

admirabtlis quaedam anlmi magnitudo, truly a wonderful greatness ofmind 9 
quoddam bellum naturale, a kind of natural warfare, 



— 82 — 

145. unusquisque means every single one, qulvis 
and quilibet, any one you like; quisque, each one; 
omnes, all together. 

1. The Distributive quisque has certain special uses: 

a. After the reflexive Pronoun sui, sibi, sS, and its possessive 
suiis, as: 

sua cuique voluptas, each man has his hobby, 

sibi quisque proximus est, each one is nearest to himself. 

b. After relative and interrogative Pronouns in dependent sen- 
tences, as: 

quod cuique obtigit, id quisque teneat, let each one keep what has fallen to 
Ids lot. 

c. After Superlatives and Ordinals, quisque is commonly translated 
every, as: 

optimum quidque rarissTmum est, every good thing is rare, 
primo quoque tempore, as soon as possible, 
quinto quoque anno, every fifth year. 

146. quisquis and quicunque, whoever, are general 
Relatives requiring & finite Verb, as: 

quidquid ortum est, aliquando intereat necesse est, whatever has 
been born, must needs perish some day. 

1. quaeunque ratione (quocunque modo), quoquo modo, anyhow, 
may be used in abbreviated sentences, as: 
quae sanari poterunt, quaeunque ratione sanabo, what can be healed, I shall 
heal anyhow. 

Syntax of the Verb. 
Distinction of Tenses. 

147. An action may be represented in each of 
the three times Present, Past, and Future, as going on, 
or finished. Accordingly the Tenses in Latin are, 
as follows: 

Present. 

1. The Present, denoting continuance in the present (scrlbo). 

2. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present, sometimes 
called the Present Perfect (scrips!). 



— 83 — 

Past. 

1. The Imperfect, denoting continuance in the past (scribSbam). 

2. The Pluperfeot, denoting completion in the past (scripseram). 

3. The Historical Perfect, denoting a past action without reference 
to its duration (scripsl). 

Future. 

1. The Future, denoting continuance in the future (scrlbam). 

2. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future (scripsero). 

148. The Tenses are divided into Principal and 
Historical The Present, Present Perfect, Future and 
Future Perfect are Principal lenses. 

The Imperfect, Pluperfect and Historical Perfect are 
Historical Tenses. 

1. Of especial importance is the Historical Perfect which differs ma- 
terially in Syntax from the Present Perfect which is also called Definite 
Perfect. 

Present. 

149. The Present is used of what is going on now, 
at the present time, and of what is true at all times, as: 

loqueris adhuc, dum omnes tacent, you are still srpeaMng while 

all are silent; 
nihil semper floret; aetas succedit aetati; nothing lasts forever; 

seasons succeed each other. 

1. The Present is regularly used of writers whose works are ex- 
tant, as: 

Epicurus vero ea elicit, but Fpicurus says such things. 

150. The Present is used, in narrating past events, 
as Historical Present for the Historical Perfect, thus: 

triginta rectores reipubllcae Atheniensis constituuntur, qui fhint 
tyranni, 30 rulers of the Athenian commonwealth are appointed 
who become tyrants. 

1. With jamdiii, for a long time now, and words of similar 

meaning, the Frcccnt denotes what has been and is still going on, as: 

jamdiu in his periculis versamur, for a long time now we have been living in 

the midst of these dangers, 
anni Funt ccto cum ista causa ve*eatur, it is now eight years that tJtis case 
has been in hand. 



— 84 — 
Perfect. 

151. The Perfect has two distinct uses : 

I. As the Perfect Definite it denotes an action that 

is now over and gone, or the present result of a more 

remote action, as : 
ut ego feci, qui litteras Graecas senex didici, as I have done who 

have learned Greek in my old age; 
is mos usque ad hunc diem permansit, this custom has remained 
up to this day (and still exists). 

II. As the Historical Perfect it represents an action 

as a simple historical fact without reference to its 

duration, as: 

Caesar armis rem gerere constituit, exercitum Italiae finibus ad- 
movit, Eubieonem transiit, Eomam et aerarium occupavit, Pom- 
pejum cedentem persecutes est, eumque in campis Pharsalicis 
devlcit, Caesar resolved to use armed force; he advanced with 
his army to the frontiers of Italy, passed the Rubicon, took 
possession of Rome and the treasury, pursued Pompey and de- 
feated him in the plain of Pharsalus. 
1. The Perfect Passive is often present in sense, denoting existence 
in a state which is the result of the previous action, as: 
navis ornata est, the ship is equipped ready to go to sea, 
navis ornata fuit, the ship was ready to go to sea. 

Imperfect. 

152. The Imperfect denotes an action continued or 
not accomplished in the Past. 

The Imperfect is employed to represent an action 

as unfinished at a certain specified time past, as : 
scribebam epistulam, cum amicus adesset, / wrote the letter when 
my friend was present 

When so used it is often combined with the Historical 

Perfect to denote the particulars of an action, while the 

general statement is given by the Historical Perfect, thus: 

Yerres in forum venit, ardebant oculi, toto ex ore crudelltas emi- 

nebat, Verres came into the Jorum, his eyes were blazing, 

cruelty was standing out from his whole countenance. 



— 85 — 

153. When the action is represented as absolute, 
i. e. not relative to some other time, the Imperfect is 
employed to describe manners, customs, situations, 
thus: 

Pausanlas epulabatur more Persarum, Pausanias was wont to 

banquet in the Persian style; 
erant omnlno itinera duo . . . mons altissimus impendebat, there 

were in all two ways . . a very high mountain overhung. 

1. The Imperfect sometimes denotes an action merely intended, 
but never accomplished (Imperfect-urn de conatu), as: 

in exsillum ejiciebam, quern jam ingressum esse in bellum videbam? was I try- 
ing to send, into exile one who I saw had already gone into war? 

2. As the Historical Present is used in lively narrative, so the 
Historical Infinitive is used to give animation to description, instead of 
the Imperfect, as : 

pars cedere, alii insequi, neque signa neqne ordlnes servare* a part give way, 
others press on t they hold neither to standards nor to ranks. 

Pluperfect. 

154. The Pluperfect is used of an action that was 
completed before another was begun, as : 

consul copias, quas pro castris coilocaverat, reduxit, the consul 
led back the forces which he had stationed before the camp. 

1. In letter-writing the tense is often adapted to the time when the 
letter is received, the Imperfect being used for the Present, and the 
Pluperfect for the Perfect, as: 

nihil erat quod scriberem, I have nothing to write, 

ad tuas omnes (epistulas) rescripseram pridie, I answered all your letters 
yesterday. 

Future. 

155. The Future represents an action that is yet 
to come. In subordinate clauses it is used with much 
greater exactness in Latin than in English, as : 

sanabimur si volemus, we shall be healed if we wish. 

1. The Future sometimes has the force of an Imperative, as: 
in sudore vultns tui comSdes panem tuum, in the sweat of thy face thou 
shaU eat tiiy bread. 



— 86 — 
Future Perfect. 

156. The Future Perfect denotes an action as com- 
pleted in the future; when one action precedes an- 
other in the future, the action that precedes is ex- 
pressed by the Future Perfect, thus : 

ut sementem feceris ita metes, as you sow, so shall you reap. 

1. The Future Perfect may be used instead of the Future to repre- 
sent an action as completed already, so especially videro with mox, 
post, alias, as: 

quid inventum sit paullo post videro, uhat has been found out I will present- 
ly see. 

Periphrastic Conjugation. 

157. The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are for- 
med by combining the tenses of esse with the Future 
Participle in urus, and denote either intention or being 
on the point of doing something, thus: 

scripturus sum, / am about to write, I am to write, I purpose to 
write, I am likely to write, 

scripturus eram, / teas about to write, &c, 

scripturus fui, I have been, or was, about to write (often I should 
have written), 

scripturus fueram, I had been about to write, 

scripturus ero, / shall be about to write, 

scripturus fuero, I shall have made up my mind to write (very 
rare) ; 

bellum scripturus sum, quod popiilus Romanus cum Jugurtha 
gessit, I purpose to write the history of the war which the Bo- 
man people carried on with Jugurtha. 

Tenses in Dependent Clauses, 

Tenses of the Indicative. 

158. Asa rule, Temporal Conjunctions are used with 
the Indicative of the same tenses as in English. But 
to this there are the following exceptions: 



— 87 — 

159. Contrary to English idiom, dum, while, while 
yet, takes the Present Indicative, though the time re- 
ferred to is past, as: 
dum haec aguntur, Caesari nuntiatum est, while this was going 
on, ivord was brought to Caesar. 



160. In historical narrative, the Conjunctions 

postquam ) ~ r ubi 

posteaquam \ ubi primiim 

ut I Mt > <^„ „ a sim Cilac 

. „ t as soon as j „. A 

ut pnmum 1 simulatquc 

take the Historical Perfect or the Historical Present, 
while the English translation is not unfrequently the 
Pluperfect, as: 

milltes postquam victoriam adepti sunt, nihil rellqui victis fece- 
runt, when the soldiers had won the victory, they left nothing 
to the vanquished. 

1. The Pluperfect is used with postquani when a definite interval 
is mentioned, as: 

Hamilcar nono anno postquam in HispacTam venerat, occlsus est, Hamilcar 
was killed nine years after he came to Spain. m 

2. When meaning since, postquam may be used with the Imper- 
fect or Pluperfect Indicative without any statement of time. 

3. If the Yerbs of the leading and the dependent clause in com- 
pound sentences with cltim, postquam, cum, &c, have the same 
subject, the subject which belongs to the whole is placed first, as: 

Pausanias cum semianmrs de templo elatus es'set, confestim anTmam emavit, 
Pausanias when he had been carried out of the temple but just alive, imme- 
diately expired. 

161. In the statement of Iterative Action, when one 
action precedes the other, the Temporal Conjunctions 
cum, as, when; ubi, when; slmulac, as soon as (also 
si, when, and Relatives, as: quotiens, as often as; 
ubieunque, ivherever) take the Perfect, Pluperfect, or 
Future Perfect, corresponding to the Present, Imperfect, 



— 88 — . 



or Future in the Principal Clause. The English 

W thus emP JS ^^ Pr6Sent Wkh th6Se ° 0n ^ c - 
quotlens cecldit, surgit, as often as he falls, he rise?- 
quo nens cec Merat, surgebat, as often as he fell* hZ lose- 
quouens ceciderit, surget, as often as he falls e 2 rise 
Alcbmdes s.mulac se remiserat, InxuriOsus repSa ur « 
soon as AlcMades relaxed, he was found a delaulZ ' 

162. To the Future in a Principal Clause corre- 
sponds in the Dependent Clause the Futare to denote 
contemporaneous action, and the Future Perfect to de 
note antecedent action, thus: 
nattatm si sequemur ducem, numquam aberrablmus, if we follow 
nature as our guide, we shall never go astray we J ollow 

« sementem feceris ita mete, as you low, solj'ou will reap. 

proper; oportet, opus est, it is necessary, denote fuLeactZl t 

les. To denote that both actions will be mmvl- 

z^irs*^ the "- peW - -- * 

1. Sometimes, however, the Future Perfect in the Prinr»m a i ni 
seems to denote certainty, as- CIpal Clause 

q « s«$;s s ir quam ***** <** - * - *« r«% 

,*/ e w! ° f ^ Sufc J unctive ' - Sequence of Tense S . 

J /w, n tW ° sentences ar e so related to each 

f that ?he o he ° ne , defi T Md «PW- ^e other 

or that the one ts dependent on the. other, they are 

connected m the way of Subordination as- J 

crepant aediflcla, priusquam cadant, houses creak before the,, f„n 

crepant aediflcla, is the Principal Clause- J they fall; 

priusquam cadant, is the Dependent Clause, 



— 89 — 

165. The Subjunctive is largely used in Dependent 
Clauses which may be classified as follows: 

Conjunctive Clauses, introduced by Conjunctions; 

Relative Clauses, " " Relatives; 

Indirect Questions, " M Interrogative Words. 

1. In Dependent Clauses the tenses of the Subjunctive denote 
time icith reference to the time of the leading Verb, the Present and 
Imperfect being used for contemporary action, and the Perfect and 
Pluperfect for antecedent action. 

166. In those Dependent Clauses which require 
the Subjunctive, the choice of the tenses of the 
Dependent Clause is determined by the tense of the 
Principal Clause according to the following 

GENERAL RULES. 

I. Tenses, in regard to their connection, are 
divided into two classes: 

Principal, including the Present, both Futures, and 

the Perfect Definite; 
Historical, including the Imperfect, the Historical 

Perfect, and the Pluperfect. 

II. Principal Tenses are followed by the Present 
Subjunctive for contemporary action, and by the Perfect 
Subjunctive for antecedent action. 

III. Historical Tenses are followed by the Imper- 
fect Subjunctive for contemporary action, and by the 
Pluperfect Subjunctive for antecedent action. 

Principal Clause. f Dependent Clause. 

Present, cognosco,/ am finding out ,, . , - w 7 

Future, cojnoscam,/^ ndout j qmd .f mS ' what »° u are do ' 

Put. Perf. cognovgro, J shall have J „„ iA m J!„ x , , 

foundout(shaUknow) qUld / ec6r,S ' f mt f ou \ ave 

Perf.Defin. cognovi, I have foundout f?*' whc f y , OU ha ™ been 

(I know) doing, what you did 



90 



Imperii cognoscebam, I was find- 
ing out 

Pluperf. cognoveram, Iliad found 
out (I knew) 



Hist. Per£ Caesar cognovit, Caesar 
found out 



quid fac6res, what you were 

doing 
quid fecisses, what you had 

done, had been doing 
quid facerent hostes, what the 

enemy was doing 
quid fecissent hostes, what the 
enemy had done. 
Principal Tenses. 
Present. Nemo adeo ferus est, ut non mitescere possit, no one is 

so savage that he cannot soften. 
Future. Quod nihil de ea re scripserim, facile ignosces, you will 
readily forgive that I did not write anything about. this matter. 
Fut. Perf. Laudabo te, si quid optimum factu sit invenSris, / will 

praise you, if you have found out what is best to do. 
Perf. Def. Oblltus es, quid initio dixerim, you forgot what I said 
at the beginning. 

Historical Tenses. 
Imperf. Tanta opibus Etruria erat, ut jam non terras solum sed 
mare etiam nominis sui fama implesset, so powerful was Etru- 
ria that she had already filled not only the land but even the 
sea with the reputation of her name. 
Pluperf. Hannibal omnia, priusquam excedgret pugna, erat ex- 
pertus, Hannibal had tried every thing before withdrawing 
from the fight. 
Hist. Perf. Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus, EpamU 
nondas asked whether his shield was safe. 

167. The Perfect Definite is properly a principal 

tense and must be treated as such when it is a real 

Present Perfect with the force of a Present, as : novi 

= scio; oblitus es = nescis; thus: 

nondum satis constitui (= certo scio) molestiaene plus an volupta- 

tis ea res mihi attulerit, / do not yet know for a certainty 

whether this affair has brought me more trouble or pleasure. 

But more commonlv the Perfect Definite is treated as 
a Historical Tense, and followed by the Imperfect, 
especially if the action is conceived in its progress, 
and not merely in its conclusion or result, as : 

feci hoc, ut intellegeres, I have done this that you might understand. 



— 91 — 

Exceptional Sequence of Tenses. 

1C8. In Sentences of Result with ut, qui, quin, the 
Verb of the Dependent Clause does not conform to 
the general rule, but takes the same tense as it would 
have, if the clause were a Principal one, thus: 

Yerres Siciliam ita perdldit, ut ea restitiu in antiquum statura non 
possit, Verres so ruined Sicily that she cannot be restored to 
her former condition (possit — since the Principal clause 
would be: ea restitui in antiquum statum non potest); 

Hortensius ardSbat dicendi cupidltate, ut in nullo unquam flagran- 
tius studium viderim, Hortensius teas so hot with desire of 
speaking that I have never seen a more burning ardor in any 
man (viderim — since the Principal clause would be : vidl). 

1. The same is taking place in Relative Clauses implying cause, con- 
cession, or characteristic, as: 

CaninTus fuit mirifica vigilantia qui suo toto consulatu somnum non viderit, 
Caninius has shown marvellous watchfulness, not to have seen sleep in his 
whole consulship, 

169. In Indirect Questions the Present and the 
Perfect Subjunctive are used after Historical Tenses 
when the result of the past action extends to the pre- 
sent, as: 

hie, quantum in bello fortuna possit, cognosci potuit, here it could 
be seen how much fortune can do in war. 

170. The Historical Present may be followed by 
either Principal or Historical Tenses, but more com- 
monly by Historical Tenses when the Historical Pre- 
sent follows, as: 

Athenienses creant decern praetores qui exercitui praeessent, the 
Athenians make ten generals to command their armies. 

1. After the Present, when it has the force of a Perfect, the Imperfect 
sometimes follows, especially of authors, thus: 

Chryeippus diktat aethera esse eum, quem homTnes Jovem appellarent. 
Chrysippus maintains Viat to be ether which men call Jove. 



— 92 — 

• 

171. The Present of a leading clause has no bearing 

upon the tense of a dependent clause which, by other 

principles of construction, must be in the Imperfect 

Subjunctive (Potential), as: 

quaero ex te, cur C. Cornelmm non defenderem, I ask you why I 
was not to defend C. Cornelius. 

172. In such Compound Sentences as have a Sub- 
junctive clause subordinate to another which is itself 
subordinate, the tense of any subordinate clause follows 
the tense of the clause on which it is immediately de- 
pendent, no matter whether it be a Principal or a 
Dependent Clause, thus : 

. , ( cur nullas ad me litteras des 

nescio, quidnam causae sit -J „ , ..... w ■, .~ . 

1 ( cur nullas ad me litteras dedens 

... . t . \ cur nullas ad me litteras dares 

nesciebam quidnam causae esset < ,, . ..,.„ , ,. 

1 ( cur nullas ad me litteras dedisses 

nesciebam quidnam causae fuisset, cur nullas ad me litteras dares. 

173. When a Subordinate Clause depends on an In- 
finitive or Participle, Gerund or Supine, the tense of that 

clause follows the tenses of the Finite Verb, thus: 

( quid agas ( quid ageres 

cupio scire < quid egeris cupiebam scire 4 quid egisses 

( quid acturus sis ( quid acturus esses 

quare id faciat 
mihi quaerenti -<( quare id feeerit }■ non respondet 

quare id f acturus sit 
quare id faceret 
mihi quaerenti -{ quare id fecisset y non respondit. 

quare id facturus esset 
Athenienses miserunt Delphos consultum quidnam facerent, the 
Athenians sent to Delphi to ask the oracle what they should do, 
cupldo incessit animos juvenum sciscitandi ad quern eorum reg- 
num Eomanum esset vent drum, a desire seized the minds of 
the young men of inquiring on which of them the kingdom of 
Rome should devolve. 



— 93 — 

174. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect 
which are either represented by Periphrastic forms or 
replaced by other Subjunctives. 

175. After a Principal Clause not having a future 
character, especially in dependent clauses with quin, 
and in Indirect Questions, the Periphrastic forms are 
used in the following manner: 

I. The Future Subjunctive Active is represented by the Present and 
Imperfect of the Periphrastic Conjugation, or with Supineless Verbs by: 

futurura sit, ut - with the Present Subjunctive Active; 

futurura esset, ut - with the Imperf. Subjunctive Active; thus: 
non dubito, quin hanc rem brevi confecturus sis, 
non dubitabam, quin hanc rem brevi confecturus esses; 
non dubito, quin futurum sit, ut te paeniteat hujus facti, 
non dubitabam, quin futurum esset, ut te paeniteret hujus facti. 

II. The Future Subjunctive Passive is represented by: 
futurum sit, ut - with the Present Subjunctive Passive; 
futurum esset, ut - with the Imperfect Subjunctive Passive; thus: 

non dubito, quin futurum sit, ut haec res brevi a te conficiatur; 

non dubitabam, quin futurum esset, ut haec res brevi a te conficeretur. 

III. The Future Perfect Subjunctive (both Active and Passive) is re- 
presented by 

futurum sit, ut - with the Perfect Subjunctive; 

futurum esset, ut - with the Pluperfect Subjunctive; thus: 
non dubito, quin futurum sit, ut hanc rem brevi confeceris, 
non dubitabam, quin futurum esset, ut hanc rem brevi conficeres; 
non dubito, quin futurum sit, ut haec res brevi sit confecta, 
non dubitabam, quin futurum esset, ut haec res brevi esset confecta. 

1. For the Subjunctive of the Future Perfect Passive, Cicero uses an 
abbreviated form, thus: 
non dubito, quin confecta res futura sit, I do not doubt, but the matte)" icill have 
been settled. 

176. "When the expression of futurity is contained 
in the Principal Clause, the Future and Future Perfect 
Subjunctives are replaced by the other Subjunctives, viz.: 

the Future by the Present and Imperfect; 

the Future Perfect by the Perfect and Pluperfect; thus: 
negat Cicero, si naturam ducem sequamnr, Dumquam nos aberraturos; 
negabat Cice*ro, si naturam ducem Fequeremur, numquam nos aberraturos; 
pronritto me rem facturum, ubi pvimum ad te vene*rim, 
promisi me rem facturum, ubi primum ad te venissem. 



_ 94 — 

In the same way in the Passive: 

pollicetur Caesar, si obstdes sibi dentur, sese cum Helvetlis pacem facturum; 

pollicitus est Caesar, si obstdes sibi darentur, sese cum Helvetlis pacem fac- 
turum. 

1. This construction is not only used after a Future or Future 
Perfect Tense, but also when the leading Yerb has & future character 
(Fear, Hope, Power, Will), as: 

tantum moreo, hoc tempus si amise'ris, te esse nullum umquam magis idone*- 
um reperturum, I only warn you, that, if you should lose (should have 
lost) this opjpo7*tunity, you will never find one more convenient. 

Moods. — Indicative. 

177. The Indicative is the Mood of direct assertions or 
questions and represents the predicate as a reality, as: 

necessitas non habet legem, necessity recognizes no law; 
quare vitla sua nemo confitetur? quia etiam nunc in illis est, why 

xi ill no man confess his faults? Because he continues to in- 

dulge in them. 

1. The use of the Indicative Mocd, in its various tenses, corre- 
sponds upon the whole pretty cfosely in Latin and in English. The 
principal points of difference will be stated below. 

1 78. The Indicative is sometimes used where the 
English idiom would suggest the Subjunctive, chiefly 
in expressions of power (possum, licet), obligation and 
necessity (debeo, necesse est, oportet, Gerund with 
est, convenlt, decet), as: 

ad mortem te, Catiiina, duci oportebat, you ought to have been 

led off to execution, Catiline; 
possum persequi multa oblectamenta rerum rusticarum, I might 

rehearse many delights of country life, 

179. With Impersonal Expressions such as: aequum 

est, it is fair; par, justum est, it is right, and the like, 

the Indicative is used where the English idiom would 

lead us to expect the Subjunctive, as: 

longe utillus fuit angustlas adltus occupare, it would have been 
much better to occupy the pass. 



— 95 — 

1. Mark the particular expressions: 
difficile e>t, it would be difficult; 
longum est, it would lead too far, it would be tedious; 
infinitum est, there would be no end, 

180. The Indicative is used in like manner after 
general relative expressions, such as the double for- 
mations quisquis, no matter ivho; quotquot, no matter 
how many 9 and all forms in -cunque, ever, and in 
sentences connected by sive. .sive, whether, .or, as: 

utut est; utcunque est; cuicuimodo est; quoquo modo est; quo- 

cunque modo est, however that may be; 
quidquid id est, timeo Danaos et dona fere'ntes, whatever it may 

be, I fear the Banal, even if they bring presents; 
sive verum, sive falsura est, mihi quidem ita renuntiatum est, 
may it be true or false, at least I have been so informed. 
1. To this the only exception is the Second Person which is in the 
Subjunctive (Ideal Second Person), as: 
quotquot oratores etmmeres, no matter how many orators you may enumerate. 
2. The Indicative is the regular construction with paene, vix, 
scarcely, hardly, and the like, as: 
pons iter paene hostlbus dedit. ni unus vir fuisset, the bridge well nigh gave a 
passage to the enemy had it not been for one man. 

Moods. — Subjunctive. 

181. The Subjunctive represents the action of the 
Verb as something merely entertained by the mind 
and dependent on other circumstances. It is used in- 
dependently to express: 

Possibility (Potential), 

A Wish (Optative), 

An Exhortation or Command (Hortatory), 

A Concession (Concessive), 

A Question of Doubt or Deliberation (Bubitative). 

182. The Present and the Perfect Subjunctive are 

used to denote an action as possible (Potential of the 
Present) and the Imperfect Subjunctive in the same 
manner as Potential of the Past, but the latter only 
in the expressions: 



— 96 

credSres, putares, you would, might have tought, 

videres, cerneres, you would, might have seen] thus: 
quis dubitet quin in virtute divitiae sint? who can doubt that 

true wealth consists in virtue? 
ut aliquis fortasse dixSrit, as one perhaps may say; 
maesti milites — credSres victos — redi grunt in castra, the soldiers 

sorrowful — you might have thought them beaten — returned 

to the camp. 
1. The regular negative of the Potential Subjunctive is non. 

183. The Subjunctive is used to denote a ivish (Op- 
tative), the Present and Perfect a wish conceived as 
possible, no matter how extravagant it is, the Imper- 
fect one unaccomplished in the present, the Pluperfect 
one unaccomplished in the past. When so used, the 
Present and Perfect are often, and the Imperfect and 
Pluperfect regularly, preceded by utinam, that, 
I wish that, would that, as: 

stet haec urbs, may this city continue to stand, 

falsus utinam vates sim, I wish I may be a false prophet, 

utinam me mortiium vidisses, would you had seen me dead. 

1. The Present and Perfect Subjunctive may be preceded by velim, 
malim, nolim, and the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive by vellem, 
mallem, nollem, thus: 

velim redeat, redierit, I wish he may return; 

vellem adesse posset Panaetius, would that Panaetius could be present. 

2. The Optative Subjunctive is also used in asseverations, as: 
ne vivam, si scio, I wish I may not live if I know. 

The regular negative of the Optative Subjunctive is ne. 

184. The Subjunctive is used in the Present — com- 
monly in the first person Plural — to express an 
exhortation (Hortatory), as : 

hos latrones interficiamus, let us kill these robbers. 
To express a command, the third person of the Pre- 
sent is used regularly, and the second person chiefly 
of an indefinite subject, as: 



— 97 — 

juvenes cavSant mtemperantiam, meminennt verecundlae, let 

young men shun excess and cherish modesty; 
injurlas fortunae, quas ferre nequeas, defugiendo relinquas, the 
wrongs of fortune, which you cannot bear, you may leave be- 
hind by flight. 

1. The regular negative of the Hortatory Subjunctive is ne, continued 
neve. 

185. The Subjunctive of the Present or Perfect is 
used to express a concession (Concessive), as: 

sit hoc verum, granted that this be true. 
The Negative is ne, as: 
ne sit sumnium malum dolor, malum certe est, granted that pain 
is not the greatest evil, at least it is an evil. 

186. The Subjunctive is used in questions implying 
doubt or indignation (Dubitative), as: 

quid hoc homlne facias ? quod supplicium dignum libidine ejus in- 
venias ? what are you to do with this man? what fit penalty 
can you devise for his wantonness? 

quid facerem ? what was I to do ? 

I. In like manner the third person of £ie Imperfect Subjunctive is 
used as Dubitative of the Past, as: 

cur tibi inimlcus esset ? why should he have been your enemy? 
The regular negative of the Dubitativo Subjunctive is non. 

The Subjunctive in Dependent Constructions. 

187. Dependent Subjunctive Constructions, as we 

have already seen (165) are of three kinds, viz.: 

I. Conjunctive Clauses, i. e., such as are introduced by a Conjunction 
or Adverb of time, 

II. Relative Clauses, i. e., such as are introduced by a Relative word, 
III. Interrogative Clauses, i. e., such as are introduced by an Interro- 
gative word. 

Consecutive and Final Conjunctions. 

188. Consecutive Clauses with fit, quommus, quin, 
and Final Clauses with fit, ne, quo have the Subjunctive. 



— 98 — 

189. ut may denote: 

I. a result, so that (ut consecutivum), negative: ut non, 
II. a purpose, that, in order that (ut finale), negative: ne, 
III. a concession, granted that (ut concesslvum), negative: ne. 

190. Consecutive Clauses with ut are used after 
Demonstrative Adjectives and Adverbs, such as: 

talis, Is (= talis), tantus, tot, 

ita, adeo, sic, eo (usque eo, usque adeo), tam, tantopere, to- 
tiens,as: • 

tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn in hoste etiam diligamus, so great 

is the power of uprightness that we love it even in an enemy; 
ita vixi, ut non frustra me natum esse existimem, / have so lived 

that I do not think I was born in vain. 

1. A clause of result with fit frequently follows quam after a Com- 
parative, as: 

urbs munitior erat quam ut primo impetu capi posset, the town was too strong to 
be taken in the first attack. 

2. Instead of talis or is, ^jusmodi is sometimes used. 

19 1. Consecutive Clauses with ut follow many Im- 
personal Verbs and expressions of Happening used 

without an Adverb. Such are: 
est, it is the case; fuTiirum esse ut or fore ut, to come to pass; 
fit, accidit, contingit, it happens; evenit, usu venit, it occurs; 
accedit, there is added; sequitur, it follows; consuetudo, mos 
(moris) est, it is the custom; proximum est, the next point is; 
restat, reliquum est, it remains; externum est; the last point 
is, it remains. 
quando fuit, ut quod licet non liceret? when was it thai what is 
now allowed, was not allowed? 

1. The phrase tantum abest ab eo (commonly tantum 
abest), it is so far (from being the case), regularly takes two 
clauses with tit, as: 

tantum abest ab eo, ut malum sit mors, ut verear, ne homini sit nihil bonum 
aliud, so far is death from being an evil that I fear man has no other 
blessing. 

The second clause with ut may take contra or etiam (never 
potius). Instead of tantum abest ut..ut, ita non..ut or adeo 
non. .ut, so little, .that, maybe used. 

2. The phrase in eoest ut, is always used impersonally, as: in 
eo est ut proficiscamur, we are on the point of setting out 



— 99 — 

192. Pinal Clauses or those expressing purpose take 
the Subjunctive after ut, in order that (negatively: ut 
ne, ne, that not, lest), as: 

esse oportet, ut vivas, non vivere ut edas, you must eat in order 

to live, not live in order to eat; 
Platonem ferunt, ut Pythagoreos cognosceret, in Itallam venisse, 

they say that Plato came to Italy to make the acquaintance of 

the Pythagoreans. 

1. This form is often to be translated by that, in order that, but 
oftener by the Infinitive with to or in order to. The purpose is ex- 
pressed by the Conjunction, which sometimes has a correlative in the 
main clause, such as: ideo, idcirco, therefore; eo, on that account; 
eo consillo or ammo, with the design; ea condicione, on condition, 
&c, as: 
legum idcirco servi sunms, ut liberi esse posslmus, for this reason we all 

are subject to the laws that we may be free. 

193. The Pinal Clause with ut (negative ne) is used 
as the Object of Yerbs denoting purpose or intent 
(Yerba studii et voluntatis). Such are: 

Yerbs of Endeavoring and Striving for a purpose: 
consulo, euro, prospicio, provideo, video (I see 
to); contendo, laboro, nitor, operam do, id ago, 
id specto, nihil antiquius habeo quam; 

Verbs of Willing and Wishing, of Commanding and 
Urging: opto, postulo, flaglto; oro, rogo, peto, 
precor, obsecro; mando, edico, impero, praecipio; 
impello, incito, moveo (commoveo, permoveo), 
adduco; hortor, moneo; suadeo, persuadeo; 

Yerbs of Permitting and Allowing: eoncedo, per- 
mitto (committo). For patior and sino, see re- 
mark below; 

Yerbs of Effecting and Attaining: facio, perficio, 
adipiscor, assequor, consequor, impetro. 



— 100 — 

Unus Miltiades maxim e nitebatur, ut primo quoque tempore 
castra fierent, Miltiades alone strove to his utmost that the 
camp might be formed as soon as possible; 

PhaSton ut in currum patris tolleretur optavit. Phaeton desired to 
be lifted up into his father's chariot; 

consuli permissum est, ut duas legiones scriberet novas, the con- 
sul was permitted to enlist two fresh legions; 

invltus facio, ut recorder reipubllcae rulnas, it is against my 
will that I recall the ruined condition of the commonwealth. 

1. The Verbs volo, nolo, malo, ciipio, studeo, contendo, statuo, 
constituo, decerno take the simple Infinitive when the subject remains 
the same (see 260); volo, nolo, malo, ciipio, regularly take the 
Accusative with the Infinitive when the subject is changed; iit is but 
seldom found after volo and malo, and never after nolo. — concedo 
and permitto commonly take ut; sometimes, however, with the Da- 
tive of the Person, the Infinitive is used, as: permitto tibi abire, I per- 
mit you to go. 

2. jiibeo, / bid, and veto, I forbid, regularly take the Accusative 
with the Infinitive (see 259. b.). So also sometimes impero, I command, 
but only the Eassive Infinitive. — euro, / take care, and mando, / com- 
mand, take the Gerundive to denote purpose (see 319). 

3. Many of these Verbs may take ut with the Subjunctive or the 
Accusative with the Infinitive, but strictly with a difference of meaning. 
When they are used as Yerbs of saying, the dependent clause con- 
tains an assertion, and is in the Accusative with the Infinitive, as: 

laudem sapientiae statuo esse maximam, I hold that the glory of wisdom is 
the greatest. 

But when such Verbs are used as words of commanding or effecting, 
the dependent clause contains a direction, and takes Ut with the 
Subjunctive, as: 

statuuntut decern milia homlnum mittantur, they resolve that 10,000 men shall 
be sent 

To this class belong : 

persuadeo ut, I persuade; persuadeo, with Ace. & Inf., I convince; 

moneo, admoneout, I admonish; m5neo, with Ace. & Inf. , I remark, 
warn; 

concede") \\tyl permit; concedo,w. Ace. & Inf., I grant (a proposition). 
To be noted are the constructions of facio: 

facio ut, I cause that, as: fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae tempg- 
rem, your fortune causes that I restrain my anger. (The ex- 
pression facere fit often forms a periphrasis for the simple 
Verb; see 193, last example); 



— 101 — 

fac, with the Aco. & Inf., suppose, assume, as: fac, quaeso, qui ego 
sum, esse te, suppose, I pray, yourself to be me; 

faclo, with the Pres. Participle Act. or the Present Inf. Passive, / make 
out, represent, as: Polyphemum Homerus cum ariete loquentem 
facit, Homer represents Polyphemus as talking with the ram; 

efflcio lit, I make, achieve, as: sol efticit, ut omnia floreant, the 
sun causes all things to bloom; 

efflcio with Ace. &Inf. or tit, I make out, show, prove, and likewise: 
efficitur, sequitur, it follows, as: sequltur illico esse causas 
immutabiles, it follows directly that there are unalterable causes. 
Other examples are: 

hoc volunt persuadere, non interire anlmos, they wish to convince 
that souls do not perish, 

huic persuadet ut ad hostes transeat, he persuades him to go over 
to the enemy, 

res ipsa monebat tern pus esse, the thing itself warned that it was 
time, 

admoneo ut quotidie meditens, / admonish you to reflect daily. 

4. As a rale, any Verb or phrase used as a Yerb of Willing or 
Demanding (dlco, scrlbo, respondeo) takes ut with the Subjunctive, as: 

frater mihi scripsit, ut domum redlrem: patrem esse aegrotum, my brother 
wrote to me to come home: father was sick, 

5. The particle lit is often omitted — generally after Verbs of 
willing (velle, nolle, malle), wishing, asking, and with the Impera- 
tive f&c, as: 

malo te sapiens hostis metSat quam stulti cives laudent, 1 had rather a wise 

enemy should fear you than foolish citizens should praise you, 
fac cogites, quis sis, do reflect who you are. 

194. The Conjunction ne, that not, lest, is used: 

I. To express a negative purpose, as: nemo prudens punit, quia 
peccatum est, sed ne peccetur, no sensible man punishes, be- 
cause a sin has been committed, but to prevent its commission; 

II. After Verbs denoting purpose or intent (see 193), as: consul 
edixit ne quis injussupugnaret, the consul commanded that none 
should fight without orders; 

III. After Verbs denoting to prevent, to beware, to refuse, to oppose 
(cavere, deterrere, impedire, prohibere, obsistere, resistere, 
obstare, repugnare, interdicere, recusare), thus: Regulus ne 
sententlam dicSret recusavit, Regulus refused to pronounce an 
opinion, 



— 102 —< 

1. impedire, to hinder and recusare, to refuse sometimes 
have the Infinitive, as: 

morbo impedior domo exlre ) I am prevented by iUness from leaving the 
morbus me impedit domo exlre ) house, 

but without a personal object: 

morbus impedit, ne (quominus) domo exeam, illness prevents me from leaving 
the house. 

2. vide (videte) ne, see to it lest, is often used as a modest affir- 
mation for vereor ne, as: 

vide ne mea conjectura multo sit verior, (see to it lest) = I am inclined to think 
that my conjecture is by far truer. 

3. The conjunction ne is always omitted after cave, as: cave 
credas, beware of believing, do not believe; cave ut, means be sure 
to, as: cave ut credas, be sure to believe. 

195. Verbs of Fearing (metuo, timeo, vereor) and 
expressions that involve Fear (metus est, periculum 
est, metus incidit alicui) take the Subjunctive with ne 
affirmative, and ut (ne non) negative. By a difference 
of idiom, ne introduces an object that is not desired; 
ut (ne non), one that is desired. Accordingly, ne 
must be rendered by that or lest, and ut by that not; 
ne non is regularly used after the negative, as: 

timeo ne niagister veniat, I fear lest the teacher come (I wish he 

may not come) ; 
timeo ut magister veniat, I fear that the teacher is not coming 

(I wish he may come); 
non timeo ne magister non veniat, / do not fear that the teacher 

is not coming. 

1. After negative expressions of fear, or when the negative belongs 
to a single word, ne non is used, as: 

non vereor, ne tna virtus opinioni hominnm non respondeat, J do not fear that 

your virtue will not answer public expectation. 
vereor ne non aliorum utilitatibus, sed propnae laudi servisse videamur, I am 

afraid that it seems we have served not the interests of others, but our own 

glory. 

2. With the Infinitive, vereor means I fear to, I hesitate, as; 

vereor te laudpre praesentepa, I fear to praise you to your face, 



— 103 — 

Remarks on the Use of fit and ne. 

196. The constructions of Purpose and Result are 

precisely alike in the affirmative, but in the negative 

the former takes ne, and the latter ut non. 

1. The principal clause upon which a final clause depends, is 
often to be supplied, as in the expressions: ut non dicam = ut omit- 
tam, not to mention; ne dicam, not to say; ne longun? sim, not to 
be tedious. 

197. In independent clauses of purpose (192), fit 
non is only used when the negative refers to a par- 
ticular word, as: 

confer te ad Manlium, Catillna, ut non ejectus ad alienos, sed in- 
vitatus ad tuos esse videaris, betake yourself to Manlius, Cati- 
line, that you may seem not thrust out to strangers, but invited 
to your friends. 

198. Instead of ne, ut ne is frequently used, for 
the sake of emphasis, after Yerbs denoting purpose or 
intent (193), especially when these Verbs are used 
affiwnatively, as: 

Themistocles collegia suis praedixit, ut ne prius Lacedaemoniorum 
legatos dimitterent quam ipse esset remissus, Tliemistocles told 
his colleagues beforehand, not to dismiss the Lacedcemonian 
envoys before he were sent back. 

199. To a negative clause of purpose Negatives 
are added by neve (neu), and not. After a preced- 
ing ut, neve or neque may be used as a continua- 
tive, as: 

Thrasybulus legem tulit, ne quis ante actarum rerum accusaretur 
neve multaretur, Thrasybulus proposed a law that no one 
should be accused of or punished for past offences, 

monitor tuus tibi suadebit ut kine discedas neque mihi ullum ver- 
bum respondeas, your adviser will counsel you to depart hence 
and to answer me never a word, 



— 104 — 

200. The different use of Negatives in Clauses of 
Purpose and Result will be best seen from the following: 

Parpose: nS (ut n£) Result: ut nOn, that not 

n6 quis (ng quisquam) fit nemo, that no one 

ne quid (ne quidquam) ut nihil, that nothing 

ne ulliis ut nullus, that no 

ne quando (nS unquam) ut nunquam, that never 

neciibi , ut nusquam, that nowhere 

When the negative is emphatic, nS quisquam, n<5 quidquam, ne 

unquam are used. — that not perhaps is ne forte (not fortasse). 

201. The Ablative quo (= ut eo, that thereby), in 
order that, so that, with the Subjunctive is used as a 
Conjunction in clauses of Purpose, especially with Com- 
paratives, as: 

ager aratur, quo meliores fructus edere possit, the field is plowed 
that it may yield better fruit 

202. quominus (= ut eo ramus, that thereby the 
less), that not, is used after Verbs of preventing, hinder- 
ing, opposing, refusing, such as: 

impedire, to hinder; prohibere, to keep from (more 

rarely); tenere, to hold; deterrere, to frighten 

off; obstare, to be in the way; resistere, to resist; 

non recusare, not to refuse, as: 
aetas non impedit quommus et ceterarum rerum et inprimis agri 
colendi studla teneamus, age does not prevent us from contin- 
uing the pursuit of other employments, and especially of agri- 
culture. 
1. Yerbs of preventing also take ne (194. III.), and some of them 
the Infinitive, so prohibere. Some of them, when they are in the 
negative, may take quin; so npn recusare, not to refuse, object, as: 
non possumus, quin alii a nobis dissentiant, recusare, we cannot object to others 
differing in opinion from us. 

2. After per me stat, or fit, it is my faulty quominus is used 
in the sense of that not, as: 
per Atranium stetit, quominus proelto dimicarStur, it was Afranius 1 favlt that 
there was no decisive battle. 



— 105 — 

203. quin (= qui, how, and ne, not), that not with 
the Subjunctive is used only after negative clauses or 
such questions as expect a negative answer. It is 
equivalent to: 

I. qui non, quod non, but, as: nemo est, quin hoc vidSat, there 
is no one but sees this; 

II. ut non, but, as not, as: nemo tarn fortis est, quin rei novitate 
perturbetur, no one is so brave as not to be confounded by the 
newness of a thing. 

1. When qum is used for the Relative, it is equivalent to qui 
non or quod non (seldom to quae non). The Oblique Cases are ex- 
pressed by the Relative with non, as: 
cum nullo unquam congressus sum, quern non vicerim, I never joined battle with 

any one whom I did not conquer. 

204. quin is also used after Negative Verbs and Ex- 
pressions of preventing, omitting, refusing, doubt and 
uncertainty. When so used, the negation in qum is 
superfluous and it is generally translated by thai, but 
that, or to with the Infinitive. Especially common are 
the following expressions: 

non dubito quin, I do not doubt that, 

non dublum est quin, there is no doubt that, 

quis dubitet quin, who can doubt that, 

non multum abest quin, there is not much wanting to, 

nihil abest quin, there is nothing wanting to, 

nihil praetermitto, intermitto quin, I omit nothing to, 

temperare mihi non possum quin, I cannot restrain from, 

vix me contineo quin, I hardly restrain from, 

retineri non possum quin, I cannot be restrained from, 

facSre non possum quin, I cannot do without, 

fieri non potest quin, it cannot happen but that; thus: 
non debet dubitari, quin fuerint ante Homerum poetae, it is not 

to be doubted that there were poets before Homer, 
faeSre non possum quin quotidle ad te mittam litt£ras, J cannot 

do without sending a letter to you daily. 

1. Mark the opposite meanings of fieri non potest quin, and 
figri non potest ut, as: 
fiSri non potest quin te reprehendam, I cannot but blame you, 
figri non potest ut te reprehendam, I cannot possibly blame you. 



— 106 — 

2. To be noticed are the Constructions of dubito, I doubt : 

When used affirmatively, dubito may have the ordinary inter- 
rogative construction with quis or the interrogative particles -ne, 
num. — dubito an, / doubt = I am inclined to think, gives a 
modest affirmation (see 278). 

In the sense of to hesitate, dubito and non dubito are generally 
followed by the Infinitive; but also qum is sometimes used in this con- 
struction, and must be used after dubitandum non est, and noli (no- 
Hte) dubitare. 

In Nepos, Livy and later writers, non dubito, I do not doubt, is 
followed by the Accusative and Infinitive; (non dubito = existimo or 
credo). 

Temporal Conjunctions. 

205. In Historical narrative, cum, when, as, is 
used with the Imperfect Subjunctive of contemporaneous 
action and with the Pluperfect Subjunctive of antecedent 
action, (Historical cum), as: 

Agesilaus, cum ex Aegypto redlret, mortuus est, Agesilaus died 

as he was returning from Egypt, 
cum Caesar Anconam occupasset, urbem reliquimus, when Ccesar 

had occupied Ancona, we left the city. 

1. The Subjunctive in this construction is due to the fact that it 
involves time as well as cause or inner connection. In the leading 
clause the Historical Present may be used, as: 
cum finem oppugnandi nox fecisset, Iccms nrmtium ad eum mittit, when night 

had put an end to the assault, Iccius sent a messenger to him. 

206. cum, when, denoting time merely (= quando, 
when; quo tempore, at the time when; quotlens, as 
often as) is used with all the tenses of the Indica- 
tive, as: 

cum Caesar in Gallia m venit, alterius factiOnis principes erant 
Aedui, alterius Sequani, at the time when Ccesar came into 
Gaul, the Aedui were at the head of one faction, the Sequani 
of the other, 

Graeci oracula consulebant, cum bella inituri erant, the Greeks 
consulted the oracles when (as often as) they were about to 
begin war. 



— 107 — 

1. When the clauses are inverted so that the real temporal clause 
becomes the main clause, and vice versa, cum takes the Perfect and 
(Historical) Present Indicative (cum inversum). In this case, the leading 
clause, in the Imperfect or Pluperfect, comes first and is commonly in- 
troduced by an Adverb, as: jam, \ix, aegre, nondum, thus: 

jam ver appetebat, cum Hannibal ex hibernis movit, spring was already ap- 
proaching when Hannibal moved out of winter quarters. 

2. When the clauses express simultaneous occurrences, cum in 
the sense of while is joined with the Perfect or Imperfect Indicative, 
often with the addition of interea or interim, as: 

Piso ultimas Hadriani maris oras petivit, cum interim Dyrrhaciiii milites domum 
obsidere coeperunt, Piso made for the remotest shores of the Adriatic sea, 
while in the mean time the soldiers at Dyrrhachium blocked up his house. 

3. When the actions of the two clauses are identical, ciim takes 
the tense and mood of the principal clause (cum coincidens), as: 

cum donant, petunt, when they give, they ask {to give an egg to get an ox). 

4. Expressions with est, fuit, erit tempus cum ; est, fuit 
erit cum, there was, will be a time when, denoting not merely 
time, but a characteristic feature of the time mentioned, require the 
Subjunctive, as: 

fuit tempus cum rura colerent homines neque urbem haberent, there was a 
time when all mankind tilled fields and had no town. 

For cum causal see 217. For cum concessive see 227. 

207. The Conjunctions dum, donee, quoad, as 
long as, ivhile (= quamdiu) take the Indicative of all 
the tenses, as: 

Lacedaemoniorum gens fortis fuit, dum Lycurgi leges vigebant, 
the nation of the Lacedaemonians was brave so long as the 
laws of Lycurgus were in force. 

dum, donee, quoad, signifying until, take the Present 

and Perfect and Future Perfect Indicative when a 

simple fact is to be expressed, as: 

donee Marcellus redlit, silentium fuit. until Marcellus returned, 
there was silence; 

haud desinam, donee perfecero, I will not cease until I have ac- 
complished it. 

dum, quoad, signifying until, take the Subjunctive 
if they imply purpose or futurity, as: 

dum Milo veniret, locum rcl inquire noluit, he was unwilling to 
leave the place until Milo should come. 



— 108 — 

1. The Indicative is sometimes used with dQm in this construction 
to denote a sure expectation, as: 

exspectandum est, dum quid de HispanTa agatur, scitur, we must wait until 
it is known what is to become of Spain. 

208. antequam and prmsquam, before, have the 
construction either of Historical cum or of postquam. 
Accordingly they are used with the Imperfect or 
Pluperfect Subjunctive, (like cum) when the action is 
expected or the one event is treated as the occasion 
or natural antecedent of the other, as: 

Themistocles inde non prius egressus est quam rex eum in fidem 

reciperet, Themistocles did not come out until the king should 

take him under his protection, 
ducentis annis antequam urbem Komam capSrent, in Itallam Galli 

descenderunt, it was 200 years before their taking Borne that 

the Gauls came down into Italy. 

They take the Perfect Indicative (like postquam) 

to designate merely priority of time, especially when 

the main clause is negative, meaning not before, not 

until, as: 

legati non ante profecti quam impositos in naves milites vidgrunt, 
the envoys did not set out until they saw the soldiers on board, 

209. With antequam and prmsquam the Present 
Indicative or Subjunctive is used (without any essen- 
tial difference of meaning) after positive clauses with 
the Present or Future, as: 

antequam ad sententiam redeo, de me pauca dicam, before Ire- 
turn to the subject, I will say a few things of myself 

The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person is 
especially common in general directions and sen- 
tences, as: 

priusquam incipias consulto, et ubi consulueris mattire facto opus 
est, before beginning you need reflection, and after reflecting, 
prompt action. 



— 109 — 

210. The Future Perfect Indicative is used after a 

Future in the leading clause to represent the action of 

the dependent clause as accomplished in the future, as: 

non defatigabor antequam illorum ancipites vias percepero, / 
shall not iveary till I have traced out their doubtful ways. 

Causal Conjunctions. 

211. Causal Clauses introduced by quod or quia, 

because, take the Indicative. The Subjunctive is used 

when the reason is introduced not as the view or 

sentiment of the speaker, but as that of some other 

person, as: 

Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet juventiitem, Socrates 
was accused, because (as was alleged) he corrupted the youth. 
(The charge of corrupting the youth is not made by the writer, 
but by the accusers of Socrates). 

1. The Yerbsdico, puto, arbitror, &c., are often construed in 
a similar manner after quod, although, properly speaking, not these 
Verbs, but those in the clauses dependent on them, should be in the 
Subjunctive, as: 

cum exisset de castris, redTit paullo post quod se oblitum nescio quod diceret, 
having left the camp, he returned a little later, because as he said he had for- 
gotten something (instead of: quod, ut dicebat, nescio quod oblltus esset). 

212. quod, that, with the Indicative, introduces a 
clause containing the explanation or ground of a fact; 
it refers to a Demonstrative (expressed or understood) 
in the leading clause, and means: the fact that, the cir- 
cumstance that. It is used after Verbs of Doing and 
Happening with an Adverb (see 191), as: bene, male, 
prudenter facio; bene, male fit, evenit, accldit; and 
after adde, add (the fact); accedit, it is added; as: 

magnum est beneficlum naturae, quod necesse est mod, it is a 

great boon of nature that we must needs die, 
bene facis, quod me adjuvas, you do well that you help me. 



— 110 — 

1. With accedit, it is added, fit can be employed as well 
as quod, as: 

ad Appii Claudii senectutem accedebat, ut etiam caecus esset, or, quod caecus 
erat, to the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his being blind. 

213. quod with the Indicative, corresponding to 
the English whereas, as to, is used at the beginning 
of a sentence, especially in letters, in repeating an 
expression for the purpose of answering it, as: 

quod me Agamemnonem imitari putas falleris, in that (if) you 
think that I am emulating Agamemnon you are mistaken, 

quod mihi de nostro statu gratularis, minime miramur te tuis prae- 
claris operibus laetari, as to your congratulating me on our con- 
dition, no wonder you are pleased with your own noble works. 

214. The expressions: est quod, habeo quod(= est 
cur), I have to, there is reason for, take the Subjunc- 
tive, as: 

est quod gaudeas, you have cause to rejoice. 

215. The uses of quod explanatory = the fact that, 
shade off into those of quod causal = because, with 
Yerbs of joy and sorrow, satisfaction and anger, praise 
and blame, thanks and complaint (see 261) which take 
quod, and not quia, as: 

tibi gratias ago, quod me omni molestia liberas, I thank you that 
you free me from all annoyance. 

1. The Subjunctive follows quod only when the view or sentiment 
of some other person than the writer or speaker is expressed (see 
211), as: 

landat Panaetius Africanum, quod abstlnens faerit, Panaetius praises Africa mis 
for having been abstinent. 

2. non quod, non quia, not that, introducing a reason expressly 
to deny it, take the Subjunctive, the same as: non quin, not as ifnot= 
non quo non. The real ground often follows with sed quia, sed 
quod, as: 

a Lacedaemoniorum exnlibus praetor vim arcuerat, non quia salvos vellet, sed 
quia perlre causa indicta noleb&t, the praetor had warded off violence from the 
Lacedaemonian exiles, not because he wished them to escape, but because he 
did not wish them to perish with their cause not pleaded. 



— Ill — 

216. The Causal particles quoniam, now that, quan- 
doquidem (more rarely quando) and siquidem, since, 
which point to acknowledged grounds, take the Indica- 
tive, as: 

quoniam de utilitate jam diximus, de efficiendi ratione dicamus, 
since we have spoken of its advantage, let us speak of the 
method of effecting it. 

217. Causal cum, whereas, since, seeing thai, with 
the Subjunctive is used to express the relation of 
cause and effect (often emphasized by utpote, quippe, 
praesertlm), as: 

cum Athenas sis profectus, inanem redlre turpissimura est, since 
you set out for Athens it would be utterly disgraceful to return 
empty handed. 

Conditional Conjunctions. 

218. The Conditional Conjunctions si, if; nisi or si 
non, if not, take the Indicative or Subjunctive. 

219. s! modo, if only, if indeed, commonly takes the 
Indicative; dummodo, dum, modo, provided, if only (ne- 
gative, dummodo ne, dum ne, modo ne) with the Sub- 
junctive, are used to express a wish or demand by way 
of condition or limitation. The tenses follow the use 
of the Optative (18S) when a ivish is expressed; other- 
wise the rule of sequence is to be observed (166), as: 

oderint dum metuant, let them hate, if only they fear, 
omnia honesta neglegunt dummodo potentlam consequantur, they 
disregard every honorable principle, provided they can ob- 
tain power. 

1. Not to be confounded with dum ne, provided only not, is 
nediim, still less, not to mention that, which is also used either 
with or without a Yerb in the Subjunctive; thus: 

satrSpa nunquam sufferre ho& sumptus queat, nedura tu possis, a nabob could 
never stand these expenditures, much less could you. 



— 112 — 

Conditional Sentences. 

220. In a Conditional Sentence the clause contain- 
ing the condition is called the Protasis, and that con- 
taining the conclusion, the Apodosis. The Apodosis is 
the Principal, and the Protasis the Dependent Clause. 

Protasis. Si bovem non possis, If you cannot drive an ox, 
Apodosis. asinum agas. drive a donkey. 

1. The Protasis is regularly introduced by the conditional particle 
si, if, or one of its Compounds, viz: nisi, unless; si non, if not; 
sin, if not, but if; quodsi, but if 

221. There are Three Classes of Conditional Sen- 
tences: 

I. The supposition is an admitted fact, and the 
result is therefore also true. Indicative in both 
Clauses, as: 

si hoc tibi accidSre potuit, quid nobis fiet? if this could happen to 

you, what will become of us? 
parvi sunt foris arma, nisi est consilium domi, of little value are 

arms abroad, unless there is wisdom at home. 

II. The supposition is merely possible, ivithout re- 
gard to fact, and the result can only be possible- or to 
some degree probable. Subjunctive Present or Perfect 
in both Clauses, as: 

haec si patria tecum loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat? if thy 
country should thus speak with thee, ought she not to prevail? 

III. The supposition is contrary to fact, and the 

result is therefore also untrue. Subjunctive Imperfect 

or Pluperfect in both Clauses, as: 

si meum consilium auctoritasque valuisset, tu hodie eggres, nos 
liberi essginus, if my judgment and authority had prevailed 
(as they did not), you would this day be a beggar, we should 
be free* 



— 113 — 

1. The Present or Perfect Subjunctive in the Condition ^Protasis), with 
the Indicative in the Conclusion (Apodosis) is used in the second Person 
only, to denote the act of an indefinite subject (you = any one) 
where, if the person were definite, the Indicative would be used, as: 

mens prope uti ferrum est; si exerceas conteritur; nisi exerceas rubigmem con- 
trahit, the mind is very like iron; if you use it, it wears away; if you don't 
use it, it gathers rust. 

2. si (lit si) with the Perfect Subjunctive is especially common to 
introduce & feigned example (exemplum fictum), as: 

si gladium quis apnd te sana mente deposuerit, repetat insaniens, reddere pccca- 
tum sit, officium non reddere, if a man in sound mind icere to deposit a sword 
with you, and reclaim it when mad, it would be wrong to return it, right not 
to return it. 

3. In Unreal Conditions, the Conclusion (Apodosis) is expressed by 
the Imperfect or Perfect Indicative with Verbs denoting power, obliga- 
tion or necessity — also with the Active and Passive Periphrastic, with 
vix, paene, scarcely, hardly (see 178), as: 

pons iter paene hostibus dedit, ni unus vir fuisset, Horatlus Codes, the bridge 
well nigh gave a passage to the enemy, had it not been for one man, Ror alius 
Codes, 

consul esse qui potui, nisi eum vitae cursum tenuissem ? how could I have been 
consul, if I had not kept that course of life? 

In general, the conclusion of an Unreal Conditional is sometimes ex- 
pressed by the Imperfect Indicative when the action is represented as 
begun, by the Pluperfect Indicative when the conclusion is confidently 
expected, as: 

labebar longius nisi me retinuissem, I began to let myself go on too far, had I 

not checked myself, 
peractum erat bellum, si Pompeium Brundisii opprimere potuisset, the war teas 

finished if he had been able to crush Pompey at Brundisium. 

4. When the conclusion of an Unreal Conditional is made to depend 
on a conjunction which requires the Subjunctive (ut, ne, quTii), or has 
the form of an Indirect Question, it is independent of the Sequence of 
Tenses and remains unchanged both in the Active and Passive, as : 

honestum tale est, ut vel si ignorarent id homines, esset laudabile, honesty is a 
thing to deserve praise, even if men did not know it. 

In this construction the Pluperfect Subjunctive is turned into the Peri- 
phrastic Perfect Subjunctive, and in Indirect Questions after a past tense 
into the Periphrastic Pluperfect Subjunctive, as: 

die, quidnam facturus fue^ris, si eo tempSre censor fuisses? tell me 
what you would have done if you had been censor at that time ? 

sciebam, quidnam fuisset faetHrtis, si eo temp5re censor fuisset, 
I knew what he would have done, if he had been censor at that time. 



_ 114 — 

When the Conclusion is in itself a dependent clause with a predicate 
implying necessity or possibility, the Perfect Subjunctive is regularly 
used, no regard being had to the sequence of tenses, as: 

baud dubium fuit, quin, nisi ea mora intervenisset, castra eo die capi potuerint, 
there was no doubt that, had not that delay interfered, the camp could have 
been taken on that day. 

5. In many cases the Imperfect Subjunctive is used instead of the 
Pluperfect Subjunctive either in one or in both members of an Unreal 
Conditional when a continued action is denoted, as: 

hie si mentis esset suae, ausus esset educere exerciium? if he was of sane mind 
viould he have dared to lead out the army ? 

6. Frequently the supposition is contrary to fact, but for tire sake 
of argument is supposed as possible, and the Present or Perfect Sub- 
junctive employed where we should expect the Imperfect or Pluperfect 
Subjunctive, as: 

dies me deficiat, si velim enumerare, time would Jail if I should wish to recount, 

(suppose I should wish), 
dies me deficeret, si vellem enumerare, time mow7c? fail if I should wish to recount, 

(I do not wish), 
tu si hie sis, aliter sentlas, if you were in my place you would feel differently. 

222. The Adversative conditional particle after a 

preceding si is sin, if on the contrary, but if, or 

(strengthened by autem), sin autem, but if, as : 

si domi sum, foris est animus; sin f oris .sum, animus domi est, if 1 
am at home, my mind is abroad; if on the contrary I am ab- 
road, my mind is at home. 

223. The Negative of si is either si non or nisi; 
nisi, unless, except, has always a reference to the whole 
idea; si non, if not or if one fail, is employed only for 
a particular word, as : 

nisi id confestim facis, te tradam magistrate, unless you do this 

at once, I shall deliver -you to the magistrate, 
si feceris, magnam habebo gratiam, si non feceris, ignoscam, if 

you do it, I will be very grateful to you, if you do not, I will 

forgive you. 

1. nisi is never used if the clause has a concessive force, as: 
si mihi bona republica frui non licuerit, at earebo mala, if J shall not be allowed 
to enjoy good government, I shall at least be rid of bad. 



— 115 — 

2. nisi after negative sentences or equivalents has the signification 
of but, besides, except, only, and is used in complete as well as in 
abbreviated clauses, thus: 

insplce quid portem : nihil hie nisi triste videbis, examine what I am bringing, 

you will see nothing here except what is sad, 
esse non potest amicitia nisi inter bonos viros, friendship cannot exist except 

among the good. 

After a Comparative with a negative, quam is used; after nihil 
aliud, we may use nisi or quam; nihil aliud nisi signifies nothing 
farther, nothing more; and nihil aliud quam, nothing else or no 
other thing but this. 

3. nisi quod after positive and negative sentences introduces a 
limitation = with the exception that, as: 

Tusculanum et Pompejanurn valde me delectant, nisi quod me aere alieno ob- 
ruerunt, my villas near Tusculum and Pompeji deligJUme very much except 
that they ran me into debt. 

4. In connection with conditional conjunctions perhaps is forte 
(not fortasse), see 200. — nisi forte, unless perhaps, and nisi 
vero, if indeed, :ake the Indicative. Of these the former is often, 
and the latter always used ironically to introduce a case which is 
in reality inadmissible, as: 

nemo fere saltat sobrius, nisi forte insanit, there is scarce any one that dances 
when sober , unless pet % haps he is cracked. 

224. si non must always be used when the con- 
dition is concessive = though not, and the conclusion 
introduced by at, tamen, at tamen, at certe. yet, rec- 
tifies the foregoing condition, as : 

perfections laudem si non assequimur, at, quid deceat, videmns, 
though we do not attain the praise of perfection, yet ice see 
what is becoming. 

1. If the Verb of the predicate is to be supplied from the princi- 
pal sentence, si minus, if not] sin minus, sin aliter, if other- 
wise, are commonly used, rarely si non, as: 

hoc si assecutus sum, gaudeo ; si minus, me consolor, if I hace attained this 
I am glad, if not, I comfort myself. 

Concessive Conjunctions. 

225. Concessive Conjunctions express a concession, 
with the general signification although, (/ranting that. 



— 116 — 

These are : 

etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, quamquam, although; 
quamvis (quantum vis), however much, however; 
licet, ut, cum, though, suppose, whereas. 

226. licet and quamvis (more rarely quantumvis) 
take the Subjunctive. The time referred to is the 
present; this is exclusively the case with licet, and 
commonly with quamvis, as: 

licet superbus ambules pecunia, fortuna non mutat genus, although 
you may strut about proud of your purse, fortune changes not 
birth, 

vitia mentis, quamvis exigua sint, in majus excedunt, defects of 
the mind, no matter how slight they be, go on increasing. 

1. licet may be used as a finite Verb of a principal clause with 
the Subjunctive, as: 

per me licet stertas, as for me you may snore. 

227. Concessive cum, whereas, although; ut, granted 
that; ne, granted that not (see 189), take the Subjunc- 
tive, as: 

Phoclon fuit perpetiio pauper, cum divitissimus esse posset, Pho- 
cion was constantly poor, though he could be very rich, 

ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas, granted that strength 
be lacking, nevertheless you must praise my good will, 

ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est, though pain may 
not be the greatest evil, it is certainly an evil 

228. etsi, tametsi, etiamsi take the Indicative or 
Subjunctive according to the rules for the use of si 
(221). But the Indicative is more common, especially 
with etsi and tametsi, as: 

viri boni recte agunt, etsi nullum consecuturum emolumentum 
vident, good men do right, though they see no profit about to 
result, 

me vera pro gratis loqui, etsi meum ingenium non moneret, neces- 
sitas cogit, even if my disposition did not bid me, necessity 
compels me to speak the truth instead of the smooth, 



117 

vita brevis est, etiamsi supra centum aunos duret, life is short, 

although it should last over 100 years, 
ista Veritas, etiamsi jucunda non est, mihi tamen grata est, that 

truth, although it is not agreeable, is nevertheless acceptable 

to me. 

229. quamquam, although, takes the Indicative. 
unless otherwise required by the structure of the 
sentence, as: 

quamquam omnis virtus nos ad se allicit, tamen justitia et libera- 
lltas id maxim e efficit, though all excellence attracts us to it- 
self, yet justice and liberality do this most. 

1. quamquam, and more rarely etsi and tametsi, are used 
at the beginning of sentences in the sense of and yet, however, 
in order to limit and partly to nullify the preceding statement, as: 

quamquam quid loquor? and yet why do I speak ? 

2. quamvis is used in an abbreviated clause with an Adjective 
or Adverb, and in later Latin, with a Participle, as: 

Germani ad quemvis numerum equitum quamvis pauci adire solent, the Ger- 
mans, however few, dare to attach any number of horsemen. 

Comparative Conjunctions. 

230. The Conjunctions quasi, tamquam (tamquam 
si, velut si, ut si, proinde quasi, proinde ac si), as if, 
implying a condition, are followed by the Subjunctive, 
a mere supposition being compared with a fact. Con- 
trary to English idiom, the tenses follow the general 
rule of sequence (166), as: 

tantus patres metus cepit, velut si jam ad portas hostis esset, a 
great fear took hold of the senators, as if the enemy were al- 
ready at the gates. 

1. The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are regularly used with these 
Conjunctions except where the sequence of tenses requires Historical 
Tenses, as: 

superbi saepe ita se gerunt, quasi ipsi soli sint homines, haughty people often. 

behave so as if they alone were men, 
noli timere quasi assem elephanti des, don't be afraid as if you were giving a 

penny to an elephant^ 



— 118 

3. Sometimes qu&si, tamquam, velut are found with a Parti- 
^iple in an abbreviated sentence, as : 

Antiochus securus erat de bello Romano, tamquam non transitiiris in Aslam Ro- 
manis, Antiochus was so unconcerned about the war with Home as if the Ro- 
mans did not intend to cross over into Asia. 

Occasionally the sequence of tenses is violated to point out more 
forcibly the unreality of the Conditional, as: 

negotia tibi non secus commendo, ac si mea essent, I recommend the business 
to you as much as if it were my own. 

231. The Conjunctions ut (utT), sicut (sieuti), quem- 
admodum,, as, so as, with following Demonstrative 
ita, sic, so; item, likewise, are used in comparisons 
of fact, and take the Indicative, as: 

ut hirundo aestate advolat, instante hieme avolat, sic infidus ami- 
cus rebus laetis praesto est, commutata fortima deserit amicum, 
as the swallow flies to us in summertime and flies away when 
winter approaches, so the false friend is at hand in prosper ity t 
when fortune changes he forsakes Ids friend. 

1. In abbreviated comparative sentences tit, sicut, tamquam 
(more rarely quasi) are used, as: 

gloria virtiitem tamquam umbra sequitur, glory follows virtue as its shadow. 

2. An example is introduced by lit, velut, for instance (for the 
so-called exemplum fictum see 221. 2.), as: 

multi gloriose mortui sunt, ut Leonidas, Epaminondas, alii, many died gloriously , 
as for instance Leonidas, Epaminondas and others. 

3. ita with the Subjunctive and lit following, is used in assever- 
ations (see 183. 2.), as: 

ita vivam ut maximos sumptus facio, as I live lam spending very largely (lit. 
so may I live as I am making very great expenses' 

Relative Clauses with the Subjunctive. 

232. As a rule, the Relative Clause takes the Indica- 
tive when a definite fact is stated, as: 

planta, quae saepius transfertur, non coalescit, a tree often trans- 
planted does not thrive. 

233. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses to 
denote purpose; qui = ut ego, ut tu, ut is, &c., as: 

missi sunt delecti cum Leonida, qui Thermopylas occuparent lon- 
giusque barbaros progredi non paterentur, picked men were 
sent with Leonidas to take possession of Thermopylae and not 
to let the barbarians proceed any further. 



... 119 — 

234. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses 

when qui is equivalent to cum ego, cum tu, cum is, 

in a Causal, Concessive or Adversative Sense, as: 

peccasse mihi videor, qui a te discesserim, I did wrong in leav- 
ing you, 
ego qui leviter litteras Graecas attigissem, tamen cum venissem 
Athenas, complures dies ibi commoratus sum, although I had 
touched Greek but slightly, nevertheless, having come to Athens, 
I stayed there several days. 

1. The causal relation may be emphasized by ut, utpote, as; 
quippe, namely, as: 
hos libros non contemno, quippe quos numquam legerim, I do not despise these 
books, since I never read them, 

235. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses 
with a restrictive or corroborative meaning. This Rela- 
tive commonly takes quidem, as: 

omnium oratorum, quos quidem cognoverim, acutissimum judico 
Sertorlum, of all orators, so far as I know them, I consider 
Sertorius the most acute. 
1. Especially to be noted are the expressions with quod, as: 
quod sciam, intellegam, sentiam, so far as I know, understand^ pei^ceive; — 
but: quantum scio, for all I know. 

230. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses ex- 
pressing result, or indicating a characteristic of the 
antecedent which would be followed by such a result, 
(qui = ut Is), as : 

ego is sum, qui nihil umquam men pottus quain meorum civium 

causa fecerim, lam one who have never done any thing for 

my own sake rather than for my citizens, 
nunc dicis aliquid, quod ad rem pertineat, now you state something 

which belongs to the subject (i. e. something of such a character 

as to belong to the subject). 

This construction of the Relative is used : 
I. After Nouns when introduced by such Correlatives as: talis, Is, 
ejus modi, as; tantus, so great; tarn, so; with an Adjective 
or Adverb, as: 

est innoeentta affectio talis antmi, quae noceat nemiui, innocence is such a 
quality of mind as to do harm to no one. 



— 120 — 

II. After the Adjectives dig-mis, worthy; indigniis, unworthy; 
idoneus, aptiis, fit, as: 

Livianae fabulae non satis dignae sunt, quae itSrum legantur, the plays of Livy 

do not icell deserve to be read a second time, 
indignus es, cui fides habeatur, you are unworthy of being believed. 

III. After general expressions of existence and non-existence, such as: 
est qui, sunt qui, there is, there are some who; non de- 
sunt qui, there are some who; reperiuntur, inveniuntur 

qui, persons are found who; nemo est qui, there is none to; 
nihil est quod, there is nothing; habeo quod, I have to; 
quis est qui, who is there who (to); quotusquisque est 

qui, how few are there; as: 
sunt qui censeant una animum cum corpore interire, there are some who believe 

that the soul perishes together with the body, 
quis est qui id non maximis efferat laudtbus ? who is there that does not extol it 

with the highest praise ? 

1. Comparatives may be followed by quam qui with the Subjunctive, 
corresponding to the English too., to; but the more regular con- 
struction (Cicero) is quam tit is; as: 

major sum quam cui possit fortuna nocere, lam too great for fortune to be able 

to hurt me, 
major sum quam ut sim mancipium corporis mei, lam too great to be the slave 

of my body. 

2. Relative Clauses after general expressions (sunt qui, &c.) take 
the Indicative in the statements of definite facts (sunt qui = non- 
nulli) or when a definite subject is expressed, as: 

sunt qui (= nonnulli) quod sentiunt non audent dicere, some dare not say what 
they think, 

sunt quaedam bestiae, in quibus inest aliquid simile virtutis, there are some ani- 
mals in which is something like virtue. 

Of course, this happens only after affirmative sentences. For est 
quod, &c. see 214. 

237. A Relative Clause which depends upon the 

Indicative of a principal clause, takes its Verb in the 

Subjunctive when it expresses the thought of some 

other person than the speaker or writer (see 211), as: 

Paetus omnes libros, quos pater reliquisset, mihi donavit, Paetus 
presented me all the books which (he said) his father had left. 
(This is Paetus' statement; quod pater ejus reliquerat, would be 
the writer's statement.) 



— 121 — 

238. A Relative Clause which depends upon a Sub- 
junctive or an Infinitive and forms an integral part of 
the thought, is put in the Subjunctive (Subjunctive of 
Attraction), as: 

sunt qui quidvis perpetiantur, cuivis deserviant, duni quod velint, 
consequantur, there are people who suffer patiently anything, 
are devoted to anybody, provided they attain what they wish, 

mos est Athenis laudari in condone eos qui sint in proellis inter- 
fecti, it is the custom at Athens that those who have been slain 
in battle are publicly eulogized. 

1. A Kelative Clause dependent upon a Conditional, takes the form 
of the Conditional, as: 

si solos eos diceres mis?ros, quibus moriendum esset, neminem eorum, qui vive*- 
rent, exciperes; moriendum enim est omnibus, if you called only those wretched 
who have to die, you would except none who live; for all have to die. 

On the Relative with the Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua, see 283. 

The Subjunctive in Indirect Questions. 

239. The Subjunctive is used in such questions as 
are dependent upon some word in the former part of 
the sentence (Indirect Questions). 

The words: ubi fuisti? where have you been? are a 
Direct Question, with the Verb in the Indicative; in the 
sentence: die mihi ubi fueris, tell me ivhere you have 
been? the same words are an Indirect Question, and 
the dependent Verb is in the Subjunctive Mood. 
For particulars see below under Interrogative Sentences, 268 ff. 

Moods. — Imperative. 

240. The Imperative is used to express a command, 
demand, advice or exhortation. It has but two tenses. 
The Present has only the Second Person and corre- 
sponds to the English Imperative. The Future has 
the Second and Third Persons, and corresponds to the 



_ 122 — 

imperative use of the English Future with shall, or to 

the imperative let, as: 

justitlam cole et pietatem, cultivate justice and piety, 
quod dixero facitote, you shall do what I say. 

1. A few Verbs have only the forms of the Future Imperative in 
common use, so: sclto, know thou; memento, remember thou ; ha- 
beto, in the sense of know, remember. 

241. The Present Imperative implies that the per- 
son commanding speaks directly to the person or per- 
sons commanded, and is used in ordering what is to 
be done immediately or to be continued if actually 
being done, as: 

vos, Quirltes, quoniara jam noxest, venerati Jovem ilium custodem 
hujus urbis ac vestrum, in vestra tecta discedite, do you, fellow- 
citizens, since night is now at hand, worship that Jupiter, 
guardian of this city and yourselves, and retire to your homes. 

-242. The Future Imperative is used in orders whose 
execution is in the future or depends upon a Condi- 
tional in the Future Perfect. Accordingly it is used 
in general directions, in wills, edicts, and laws, as: 

foenum, ubi tempus erit, secato, cavetoque ne sero seces, cut the 
hay as soon as it is time, and do not cut too late, 

cum valetuclini consulueris, turn consullto navigationi, when you 
have attended to your health, then look to your voyage, 

regio imperlo duo sunto ilque consiiles appellantor; illis salus po- 
puli suprema lex esto, there shall be two officers with royal 
power, and they shall be called consuls; to them the welfare of 
the people must be the supreme law. 

1. In mild commands and requests, quaeso, I beseech you, is 
added to the Imperative, or velim with the Subjunctive is used in its 
stead, as: dicas velim, please tell me; omitte ista, quaeso, prithee 
leave that off. 

2. When the command is emphatic, f£c with the Subjunctive is 
used instead of the Present Imperative, as: fac venias, do come. 

3. quin, with the Present Indicative may have the force of an 
Imperative, as: quin accipis, here take it 



— 123 

4. The third Person of the Future Imperative is only used in legal 
phrases, as: 
justa imperia sunto, iisque cives modeste parento, let the com- 
mands be justj and let the citizens strictly obey them. 

In its stead the Subjunctive is regularly used, see 184. 

243. Prohibitions are regularly expressed by ne 
(nihil, nemo, nullus, numquam) with the Subjunctive, 
viz.: 

I. The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive; 

II. The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive, as: 

Deus "hoc facito, hoc ne fecSris" dicSret, God would say: "This 

do, that leave undone", 
puer telum ne habSat, a boy is not to have a weapon. 

244. The regular Negative of the Imperative is ne 
which is found with the Future Imperative in legal 
phrases and general directions, with the Present Impera- 
tive in poetry only, as: 

hominem mortuum in urbe ne sepelito, thou shalt not bury a 
corpse within the city, 

tu ne cede malis, sed contra audentior ito, yield not thou to mis- 
fortunes, but go more boldly to meet them. 

1. In general prohibitions the second Person of the Present Subjunctive 
with ne is also used, as: 

isto bono utare, dnm adsit; cum absit ne requlras, use this good while present, 
when wanting do not regret it. 

2. ne is continued by neve or neu, as: 

homtnem mortuum in urbe ne sepelito neve urito, thou shalt not bury or bum 
a corpse within the city. 

3. Instead of the Prohibitive the following phrases are used: 
noli, nolite, be unwilling, with the Infinitive, 

c&ve, beware, with the Subjunctive, 

file ne, do not, with the Subjunctive; thus: 

noli oblivisci, quantum parenttbus debeas, donH forget how much you owe to 

your parents, 
cave cadas, donH fall, 
fac ne quid allud cures, don't care f on* anything else. 



— 124 — 

245. Instead of the Imperative the second Person of 
the Future (negative non) is sometimes employed, as: 

si quid accident novi, facies ut sciam, you will let me know if any 

thing new happens, 
non cessabis, you must not be idle. 

The Infinitive. 

246. The Infinitive expresses the general idea of 
the action or condition which the Verb asserts with- 
out being limited to a particular Number, Person or 
Tense. The Present Infinitive expresses contempora- 
neous action, the Perfect Infinitive prior action, and 
the Future Infinitive (properly speaking the Present 
Infinitive of the Periphrastic Conjugation) future action. 
The time is determined not by the Infinitive, but by 
the leading Verb on which the Infinitive depends. 

247. The Infinitive is really a Verbal Noun, and 

may be used as the Subject or Object of a Verb. It is 

treated as a Neuter Substantive, but it governs the 

Case of its Verb, and is modified by Adverbs and not 

by Adjectives, as: 

legere librum, the reading of a book, 

diligenter legere librum, the careful reading of a book. 

248. The Infinitive may be used as the Subject o* a 
Verb. The Predicate is either a Noun or an Adjective 
with esse, or an Impersonal Verb, such as: piget, pu- 
det, paenltet, taedet (45)) decet, dedecet (54)- opus 
est, oportet, necesse est; dele ctat, ju vat; placet, vldetur 
mihi (= placet), displicet; libet, licet; praestat, inter- 
est, refert, nihil attlnet (it is of no importance). For 
exceptions see 191 & 212. 



— 125 — 

turpe est allud loqui, allud sentire, it is a disgrace to say one 

thing and think another, 
interest omnium recte facere, it is the interest of all to do right. 

1. To a Subject Infinitive another Infinitive with esse may be the 
Predicate, as: 

docto homini vivere est cogitare, for the educated man to live is to think. 

2. The Infinitive as Subject is rarely found with other than imper- 
sonal Verbs, as: 

non cadit invidere in sapientem, envy is not becoming to the wise man. 

249. When the Subject Infinitive is not a single 
Verb, but a Noun or Adjective with the Yerb esse (or 
another Copulative Yerb, see lo) such Noun or Adjec- 
tive is put in the Accusative Case, as: 

senem ante tempus fieri miserum est, it is miserable to grow old 
before the time. 

250. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Yerbs 
which are commonly known as Auxiliary Yerbs and 
imply another action of the same Subject to complete 
their meaning. Such are Yerbs denoting: 

to be able, posse, quire, nequire [not valere), 

to wish, want, desire, velle, nolle, malle, cupere, concupiscere, 

expetere, gestire, avere, 
to be obliged, debere, 
to dare, audere, 

to hesitate, fear, dubitare, gravari, reformidare, verSri, 
to delay, cunctarl, morari, 
to begin, incipere, instltiiere, coepiss£, 
to continue, pergere, perseverare\ 

to cease, leave off, deslnere, desisted, intermittens, omittere, 
to hurry, maturare, festinare, properare, 

to have in mind, undertake, cogMrS, meditari, parare, adoriri, 
to resolve, statuere, eonstltiiere, decerned, [intendere, 

to be wont, solerg, consuSvisse, 
to be accustomed, assuescere, assuefieri, consuescere; to accustom 

another, assuefacere, 
to teach and to learn, docere, discere; to know, scire, 
to be unwilling, not to care, nollS, non eurar$, 
to have rather, to prefer, malle" {not praeferre), 



— 126 — 

When these Verbs are joined with esse, viderl, ha- 
beri or similar Verbs (see 10), the Predicate Noun or 
Adjective is in the Nominative, thus: 

vincere scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis, you know how to con- 
quer Hannibal, how to use a victory you know not, 

Cato esse quam videri bonus malebat, Cato preferred being good 
to seeming good, 

pater filium exheredare in ammo habebat, the father had it in 
mind to deprive his son of the inheritance, 

1. With Passive Infinitives the Verbs coepi, I have begun, and dS- 
sino, I cease, have Passive Perfects, as: 

veteres orationes post nostras a plerisque legi sunt desitae, after mine the old 
speeches have ceased to be read by most people. 

2. Like cogito and statuo, phrases of similar meaning such as: 
habeo in ammo, mini est in ammo, / have it in mind; consilium cepi 
or inn, animum induce, I resolve, take the Infinitive, as: 

Lysander consilium iniit reges Lacedaemoniorum tollere, Lysander resolved to 
supersede the kings of the Lacedaemonians. 

3. In model prose, valeo means / am capable of, and requires 
ad with the Gerund or Gerundive, as: 

Catilma valtiit non solum ad neglegendas, verum etiam ad evertendas leges, Ca- 
tiline was not only capable of neglecting the laws but also of upsetting them. 

4. On the Verbs which may take the Infinitive or the Accusative 
with the Infinitive (volo, nolo, malo, cup!o),see 193. 1. 

5. On the so-called Historical Infinitive, see 153. 2. 

Accusative with the Infinitive. 
251. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used like 
the English Objective with the Infinitive in such sen- 
tences as: hoc verum esse scimus, ice know this to be true. 
In English we might also say: We know that this is true, 
but Latin permits only of the Infinitive construction. 

1. To translate such clauses as are introduced in English by the 
conjunction that, and require in Latin the Accusative with the Infinitive: 
Take no notice of that; 

Translate the English Nominative following that by the Latin Accu- 
sative; 
Translate the English Verb by the Latin Infinitive. 



— 127 — 

252. A Predicate Noun or Adjective and the Par- 
ticiples of compound Infinitives must agree with the 
Accusative Subject; but, of course, the Supine remains 
unchanged, as: 

sentio boream frigldum esse, I feel, that the north wind is cold, 
medlci causa morbi inventa curationem esse inventam putant, 

physicians think that when the cause of disease is discovered, 

the cure has been discovered. 

253. The Accusative with the Infinitive, like the 
simple Infinitive, may be used as the Subject or the 

Object of a sentence. Thus, in 

it was a lucky thing that father was here 
the clause that father was here is the Subject of the 
sentence, equivalent to 

father's being here was a lucky thing. 

Again in 

we saw that the boy was sick, 
the clause that the boy was sick is the Object of the 

sentence, equivalent to 

we saw the boy's sickness. 

1. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used in Exclamations, as: 

te in tantas aerumnas propter me incidisse, alas, that you should fall into such 
grief for me! 

254. The Accusative with the Infinitive may be 
the Subject of a sentence. The Predicate is: 

I. A Substantive or Neuter Adjective with est, as: 

aequum, par, justum est, it is fair, just, 

apertum, manifest um, perspicuum est, it is evident, manifest, clear, 

credibilS, vSrum, vSrl similg, consentarieum est, it is credible, 
true, probable, reasonable, 

facile, difficilS est, it is easy, difficult, 

honestum, pulchrura, turpe, indignum est, it is honorable, beauti- 
ful, base, shocking, 

fas, ngias, facinus, sc£lus est. it is right, wrong, an outrage, a crime, 

lama. 5ploi5, spes est, the story goes, there is a report, there is hope. 



— 128 — 

II. An Impersonal Verb, as: 
apparet, it is clear ', 

constat, it is agreed, evident, well known, 

eonducit, expedit, prodest, it is useful, 

convenit, it is fitting, 

placet, displicet, it pleases, displeases, 

oportet, there is need; necesse est, it must needs. 

III. A Passive Verb of Declaring or Perceiving, as: 
creditur, it is believed;' proditum est, it is recorded, 

traditum est, there is a tradition; nuntiatum est, word was 
brought (see 262). 

I. credibile est mundum hominum causa factum esse, it is cred- 

ible that the world was made for the sake of men, 
facinus est vinciri civem Romanum, it is an outrage that a Roman 
citizen should be put in chains. 

II. legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur, 
a law ought to be brief that it may the more easily be grasped 
by the uneducated, 

quid Milonis intererat interfici Clodium? what interest had Milo 
in'Clodius' being killed? 

III. nuntiatum est adesse Scipionem cum legionibus, word was 
brought that Scipio was at hand with legions, 

creditur Pythagorae auditorem fuisse Numam, it is believed that 
Numa was a hearer of Pythagoras. 

1. oportet, it behooves, and necesse est, must needs, are often 
used with the Subjunctive, as: 
Leuctrica pugna immortalis sit necesse est, the battle of Leuctra must needs be 
immortal. 

But when these Impersonals are themselves in the Infinitive, they 
are regularly followed by the Accusative with the Infinitive, as: 
dico necesse essehanc legem valere, I say this law must needs be in force. 

2. A Predicate Noun or Adjective after the Infinitive esse, is often 
made to agree with the Dative depending on the Impersonal Verb 
licet, it is left (free), as: 
mihi neglegenti esse non licet, I must not be negligent 

But the Predicate Noun is regularly in the Accusative, when the 
Dative is not expressed with licet, as: 
haec praescripta servantem licet magnifice vivere, a person observing these rules 
may Uve magnificently. 



— 129 — 

3. An Impersonal Predicate Adjective with est takes the Subjunctive 
with fit instead of the Accusative with the Infinitive when the idea 
is considered as a result or an action that should be done, as: 
rarum est (= raro accidit) ut sit idoneus suae rei quisque defensor, it is rare 

for a man to be a good defender of his own case, 
praeclarum illud est ut eos qui nobis carissimi esse debeant amemus, it is a 
noble thing that we should love those who must be dearest to us. 

In this relation, however, the Accusative with the Infinitive is more 
common. 

255. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used as 
the Object of Verbs of Perceiving and Declaring (verba 
sentiendi et declarandi). 

Verba sentiendi are such Verbs and Phrases as de- 
note the exercise of the external senses and intellectual 
faculties, as: sentlo, animadverto; audio, video, ac- 
cipio, comperio; cognosco, intellego; coglto, arbitror, 
censeo, credo, duco, existimo, judico, opinor, puto; 
spero, suspicor; scio, nescio, ignoroj memmi, recor- 
dor, obliviscor. 

Verba declarandi are such Verbs as denote the com- 
munication of thought to others, as: dico, nego (I say 
that . . not J, affirmo, respondeo, scribo; fateor, declaro, 
demonstro, significo, narro, trado (memoriae trado 
or prodo), certiorem facio, indico, nuntio; doceo, 
ostendo; promitto, polliceor; minor. 

Caesarem certiorem faclunt, sese non facile ab oppidis vim ho- 
stium prohibere, they inform Caesar that they cannot easily 
ward off an attack of the enemy from their towns, 

Thales Mileslus aquam dixit esse initlumrerum, Tholes of Miletus 
said that water was the first principle of things. 

1. When Yerbs of saying imply an injunction or intention thai 
something should be done, they take tit or ne with the Subjunctive 
(see 193. 3) as; 

PythTa respondit, ut moen!bu3 lignSis se munlrent, the Pythiq answered that 
they must defend themselves with walls of wood, 



— 130 — 

The same is true of Yerbs of thinking (especially censere) when 
they are equivalent to Yerbs of resolving or, in general, to such as 
denote an influence upon some one, as: 

plerlque censebant, ut noctu iter f acerent, most were of opinion = advised to 
make the march by night 

2. After Yerbs of perception (audio, video, cerno, adspicio, con- 
spicio, animadverto) the Present Participle is used to express actual 
perception, the Accusative with the Infinitive to express intellectual 
perception, as: 

saepe ilium audivi furtiva voce loquentem, I have often heard him talking in a 

stealthy tone^ 
audiet cives acuisse ferrum, he (the youth) shall hear that citizens gave edge to 

steel. 

3. A completed action is represented by the Present Infinitive after 
memmi, memoria teneo, / remember, when used of personal 
experience , as: 

memmi Catonem anno antequam mortuus est, mecum et cnm Scipione disserere, 
I remember Cato's discoursing with me and Scipio the year before he died. 

When the experience is not personal, the ordinary construction 
is followed, as: 
meministis me ita distribuisse causam, you remember that I so laid out the 
case. 

4. Yerbs denoting to hope, promise, swear, threaten, are treated 
as Yerbs of saying and thinking-, contrary to English idiom the In- 
finitive which follows, is regularly in the Future: 

spero me hoc adepturam esse, I hope to obtain this {that I shall obtain this). 
The Future Infinitive is often expressed by fore or f uturum esse 
tit with the Present Subjunctive after PriDcipal Tenses, and the Imperfect 
Subjunctive after Historical Tenses, necessarily where there is no 
Supine, as: 
spero fore ut contingat id nobis, / hope that will be our happy lot. 
With the Auxiliary posse, the Present Infinitive is used after these 
Yerbs, as: 

Caesar in earn spem venerat se sine pugna rem conficere posse, Caesar enter- 
tained the hope of being able to conclude the affair without a battle. 

When sperare means to trust, flatter one's self, it may take any 
Infinitive, even that of the Perfect, as: 
spero tibi me causam probasse, I trust to have proved to you the cate. 

256. After Verbs of Perceiving and Declaring 
(verba sentiendi et declarandi), the Present Infinitive 



— 131 — 

expresses contemporaneous action. Accordingly it re- 
presents the Present after a Principal Tense and the 
Imperfect after a Historical Tense, as: 

I. credo eum scribSre, I believe that lie is writing, 

II. credebam eum scribere, I believed that he tvas writing. 

The Perfect Infinitive expresses antecedent action; 
accordingly it represents the Perfect, Definite and 
Historical after a Principal Tense, as: 

I. credo eum scripsisse, I believe that he has written, or that he 

ivrote, 

and the Pluperfect after a Historical Tense, as : 

II. credebam te scripsisse, I believed thai you had written, or 

had been writing. 

The Future Infinitive expresses future action ; it is 
only used in the Nominative and Accusative with the 
Infinitive, and determines only the relation to the time 
of the leading Verb, as: 

I. credo eum scripturum esse, / believe that he will write, 

II. credebam eum scripturum esse, / believed that he would 

write. 

257. The Future Infinitive (as we have seen al- 
ready 255. 4) is often expressed by fore or futurum 
esse ut with the Present Subjunctive after Principal 
Tenses, and with the Imperfect Subjunctive after His- 
torical Tenses, necessarily so when the Verb has no 
Supine or Future Participle, as : 

credo fore ut hujus facti te paeniteat, I believe you will repent of 

this deed, 
credebam fore ut hujus facti te paeniteret, I believed you would 

repent of this deed. 

1. In the Passive, the Future Infinitive of the Paradigms, composed 
of the Supine in urn and the Passive Infinitive of ire, to go, is less 
common than the Periphrastic form. Thus we may say : Eomani 



— 132 — 

putabant Gallos victum Irl; but more commonly: Komani putabant 
fore ut Galli vincerentur, the Romans were of opinion that the 
Gauls would be defeated. The Periphrastic form is regularly em- 
ployed after sperare. 

258. For the Future Perfect Infinitive the same 
periphrases are used in the Active as for the Subjunc- 
tive (see 174), thus: 

futurum esse (fore) ut laudaverim, 
futurum esse (fore) ut laudavissem. 

In Passive and Deponent Verbs lore with the Perfect 
Participle is used with the force of a Future Perfect 
Infinitive, as: 

Carthaginienses mox debellatum fore rebantur, the Carthaginians 
thought that the war would soon be brought to an end. 

259. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used as 
the Object of Yerbs of Will and Desire. Such are : 

a. volo, nolo, malo, ciipio when the Subject is 

changed in the dependent clause (see 193. l.), as: 

si vis me flere, dolendum est primum tibi ipsi, if you wish me to 
weep , you must first feel the pang yourself 

When the Subject remains the same, the Infinitive is 
used after these Verbs (see 250)- but even then the 
Accusative with the Infinitive is common when the 
Verb of the dependent clause is in the Passive, or 
expressed by esse, vlderi, haberi with a Predicate 
Noun. We say, therefore: 

volo hoc facere, I wish to do this, 

and on the other hand: 

Timoleon maluit se diligi quam metiii, Timoleon preferred that 
he should be loved rather than that he should be feared, 

discipiilum me haberi volo, non doctOrem, I wish to be taken for 
a learner, not for a teacher, 



— 133 — 

b. jubeo, I order, bid; veto, I forbid. When the 
person to whom the order is given, is expressed, it 
becomes the Subject- Accusative of the Infinitive Clause, 
and the Verb is in the Active Infinitive, as: 

Caesar Labienum jugum montis ascendere jussit, Ccesar ordered, 
Labienus to ascend the ridge of the hill. 

When the person to whom the command is given, 

is omitted, jubeo and veto always have the Infinitive 

of Passive Verbs, as: 

Caesar pontein jubet rescindi, Ccesar orders the bridge to be broken 
down. 

These Verbs may themselves be turned into the Pas- 
sive, the Accusative of the Active Voice becoming, as 
usual, the Nominative of the Passive (Nominative with 
Infinitive), as: 

jussus es renuntiari consul, you were under orders to be declared 
consul. 

The personal construction of the Passive is always 

used with jiibeo and veto, even if the Subject is not 

the person to whom the command is given, as: 

Deems Magius in eastra duci jussus est, Decius Magius was 
ordered to be taken to the camp. 

1. After jubeo, / bid, and veto, 1 forbid, the Infinitive Active can 
be used without a subject when it is obvious from the nature of the 
command, as: 

Caesar eastra munlre jussit (milites), Caesar gave orders to fortify the camp. 

2. Instead of the Accusative with the Infinitive, tit with the Sub- 
junctive is used with jubeo in decrees of the people (populiscitis), as: 
senatus decrgvit populusque jussit ut, the senate decreed and the 
people ordered &c. 

3. On the construction of impero see 193. 2. — prohibeo, 

prohibit, commonly takes the Infinitive or the Accusative with the In 
finitive (more rarely ne, see 194), as : 

barb&ri nostros navtbus egrSdi prohibebaftt, the barbarians hindered vur me 
from disembarking. 



— 134 — 

c. sTn5, patior, I permit, suffer, always have the 

Infinitive of Passive Verbs when the person to whom 

the permit is granted, is omitted, as: 

Augustus domlnum se appellari non passus est, Augustus did not 
allow himself to be called sovereign. 

When sino itself is turned into the Passive, it is 
only used in the Present, and in the tenses derived 
from it, with the Nominative and Infinitive, as: 

non sinor hoc fac6re, 1 am not allowed to do this. 

260. Verbs of Decreeing (statuo, constituo, decerns) 
which take the simple Infinitive when the Subject re- 
mains the same, and ut or ne with the Subjunctive 
when a new Subject is introduced, often take the 
Accusative and Infinitive with the Gerundive, as: 

id statuerat non esse faciendum = id statuSrat non facere, he 
had determined not to do this. 

261. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used as 

the Object of Verbs of Feeling and its expression 

(verba affectuum), such as: 

gaudeo, laetor, doleo, miror, admiror, indignor, quSror, succensSo; 
aegre, graviter, indigne, molests fero. 

When so used, these Verbs are considered as Verbs 

of Saying and Thinking, and the object is represented 

as a thought so that it resembles an abstract noun, as: 

salvum te advenisse gaudeo, / rejoice (to think) that you have 
arrived safe. 

With these Verbs, quod is used to give the ground 

of the emotion and to represent it simply as a fact, as: 

gaude quod spectant oculi te millc loquentem, rejoice that (be- 
cause) a thousand eyes are gazing at you while you are 
speaking. 



— 135 — 

1. With Verbs of praising, blaming, accusing, condemning, 
congratulating and thanking (gratulor, gratias ago, gratiam habeo), 
quod is the regular construction (see 215), as: 
tibi gratias ago quod me ab omni molestia liberas, 1 thank you that you free me 
from all trouble. 

Sometimes ciim with the Indicative is used, as: 
gratulor tibi cum tantum vales apud Dolabellam, I wish you joy now that you 
have so much influence with Dolabella. 

262. We have seen above (259. b.) that jubeo, 
veto, sino may be turned into the Passive, forming 
the Nominative with the Infinitive. This is also the 
case with Passive Verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, 
&c, which prefer the personal construction, the Accu- 
sative of the Active Voice becoming the Nominative of 
the Passive. Such Verbs are: 

the Passives of dicunt, putant, judicant, existlmant; 

the Passives of tradunt, ferunt, &c, which occur in the third Person 

only: tradltur, traduntilr; fertur, feruntiir; 
videri, to seem, appear, thus : 
Ace. w. Inf. tradunt HomSrum caecum fuisse, they say that Homer 

was blind, 
Norn. w. Inf. HomSrus caecus fuisse tradltur, Homer is said to 

have been blind. 
Terentii fabulae propter elegantlam sermonis putabantur a C. 

Laelio scribi, Terence's plays on account of the elegance of the 

language were thought to be written by C. Laelius, 
Si Yejos migrabimus amisisse patrlam videbimur, if we remove 

to Veii, we shall seem to have lost our country. 

263. When the leading Verb is a form compounded 

with esse, the impersonal construction is preferred, as: 

traditum est Homer um caecum fuisse, there is a tradition that 
Homer was blind. 

1. In Passive Yerbs of saying the impersonal construction 

(Accusative with Infinitive) is regular with the Gerundive, or when they 

are accompanied by a Dative or an Adverb, as : 

ubi tyrannus est, ibi non vitiosam, sed dicendum es*t plane nullam esse rempu- 

blicam, where there is a tyrant, it must be said, not that the commonwealth is 

evil } but that it does not exist at all, 



— 136 — 

conantibus Gallis in oppida convenlre, adesse Romanos nuntiatur, to the Gauls 

while trying to assemble in the towns, word was brought that the Romans 

wer^e approaching, 
hoc vere dicitur, magistratum esse legem loquentem, legem autem mutum ma- 

gistratum, this is truly said that a magistrate is a speaking law, but a law a 

mute magistrate. 

2. The personal construction is regularly used with videor ; but 
videtur, it seems or seems good, is used impersonally, and may 
take either the simple Infinitive or the Accusative with the Infinitive, 
or tit with the Subjunctive, as: 

visum est senatui legatos mittere ) 

visum est senatui legatos mitti V lt seemed 9 ood to the senate ( the senaie 

visum est senatui ut legati mitterentur j resolved) to send ambassadors. 

With a personal Dative iriihi videor means, I flatter myself, fancy, 
think, and is followed by the Infinitive, as: 
recte mihi fecisse videor, I think that I did right. 
si videtur, used parenthetically, corresponds to the English if you 
please. 

3. The Passive construction is used with many Verbs which are 
not properly Verbs of saying, showing, &c, such as: scribor, audior, 
invenior, reperior, intellegor, argdor, as: 

dii beati esse intelleguntur, the gods are understood to be happy, 
Rosciu3 arguitur patrem occidisse, Boscius is charged with having slain his 
father. 

4. The personal construction with videtur, dicitur, is followed by 
the impersonal construction in successive clauses of the oratio obli- 
qua, as: 

mihi non videbatur quisquam esse beatus posse, cum in malis esset; in malis 
autem sapientem esse posse, it appeared to me that no one can be happy while 
in misfortune, but that a wise man may be in misfortune. 

264. The Personal Pronouns which are in general 
used only for the sake of emphasis or distinction, must 
be always expressed in the Accusative with Infinitive. 
For the Pronouns of the third Person se is used with 
reference to the Subject of the Principal Clause, and 
the Demonstratives eum, earn, eos, eas, when refer- 
ring to another noun, as: 
nemo tarn senex est, qui se annum non putet posse vivere, no one 

is so old but thinks he can live another year, 
Ennius deos esse censet, seel eos non curare opinatur, quid agat 
homlnum genus, Ennius believes that there are gods, but he 
does not think they care ivhat mankind are doing* 



— 137 — 

1. With Verbs of hoping, promising, threatening, and the like, 
the Latin differs from the English in requiring the Subject always to 
be expressed, and the Infinitive to be in the Future, as: 
dolor se fortitudinem debilitaturum minatur, pain threatens to wear down for- 
titude. 

Observe that in the Future of the Accusative and Infinitive with 
the Participle in urus, the Infinitive esse is more commonly omitted. 

265. When ambiguity would arise from the Accu- 
sative with the Infinitive being followed by a depend- 
ent Accusative, the Passive construction is substi- 
tuted for the Active. Thus the sentence: The Romans 
believed that Pompey had vanquished Caesar, can only 
be rendered by giving it a Passive turn: Romani 
putabant Caesarem a Pompejo victum esse. 

1. The Double Accusative is oraculous speech, as: 

ajo te, Aeacida, Romanos vincere posse, I affirm that thou, son of Aeacus, cayist 
conquer the Romans, — or I affirm that the Eomans can conquer thee, son of 
Aeacus. 

266. When two Subjects with the same Predicate 
are compared by means of quam, idem qui, tantus 
quantiis, or an Adjective or Adverb of likeness with 
at que, the second Subject is likewise in the Accusa- 
tive, as: 

Platonem ferunt idem sensisse de immortalitate animorum quod 
Pythagoram, they say that Plato held the same opinion of the 
immortality of the souls as Pythagoras. 

267. When the Conclusion of an Unreal Conditional 
[221. III.) is made to depend on a Verb of Saying or 
Thinking, requiring the Accusative and Infinitive, the 
Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive of direct discourse 
is represented as follows: 

The Imperfect Subjunctive Active is changed into 
the Future Infinitive in -urum esse, or, with /Siipineless 



— 138 — 

Verbs, into futurum esse (not for§) ut, with the 
Imperfect Subjunctive Active, thus: 

hoc si diceres, errares existiino te, si hoc diceres, erra- 

ttirum esse, 
si hoc faceres, facti te paeniteret existimo, si hoc facSres, futu- 

ruin esse ut facti te paeniteret. 

The Imperfect Subjunctive Passive is changed into 
futurum esse (not fore) ut, with the Imperfect Sub- 
junctive Passive (more rarely into the Future Infinitive 
Passive), thus: 

si hoc faceres, multarSris existimo, si hoc faceres, futu- 

rum esse ut multargris, 

(More rarely: existlmo te multatum in, si hoc faeSres). 

The Pluperfect Subjunctive Active is changed into 
the Infinitive in -urum fuisse, or into futurum fuisse 
ut, with the Imperfect Subjunctive, necessarily so when 
the Verb forms no Supine or Future Participle, thus: 

si hoc dixisses, erravisses existlmo te erraturum fuisse, si 

hoc dixisses, 

si hoc fecisses, facti te paenitu- existlmo, si hoc fecisses, futu- 
isset rum fuisse ut facti te paeni- 

teret. 

The same periphrasis is used to represent the Plu- 
perfect Subjunctive Passive, thus: 

si hoc fecisses, multatus esses si hoc fecisses, existlmo futu- 
rum fuisse ut multargris. 

nisi eo ipso tempore nuntii de Caesaris victoria essent allati, exis- 
timabant plerlque futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur, had 
not news of Caesar's victory been brought at that very time, 
most persons thought the city would have been lost, 

apparebat si diutius vixisset, Hamilcare duce Poenos arma Italiae 
illaturos fuisse, it was evident that if he had lived longer, the 
Carthaginians would have waged war upon Italy under Ha- 
railcards conduct 



— 139 — 

1. With posse, to be able, and velle, to will, on account of their 
future sense, the regular Infinitives instead of the Periphrastic forms 
are used: possem being represented by posse; potui and potu- 
issem by potuisse, &c, as: 

Pompejum pie rlque exist Tmant si acrius insequi voluisset bellum, eo die potuisse 
finlre, most people think that if Pompey had determined to follow up more 
energetically, he could have finished the war on that day. 

Interrogative Sentences. 

268. Interrogative Sentences are divided into Di- 
rect and Indirect. A Direct (Independent) Question 
takes its Verb in the Indicative or in the Subjunctive 
(Dubitative Subjunctive, 186] Conclusion of a Hypo- 
thetical sentence 221. II. III.). An Indirect Question 
which depends on any expression implying doubt or 
uncertainty, takes its Verb always in the Subjunctive. 

1. Observe that an Indirect Question occurs only when an interrog- 
ative clause is made the Subject or Object of some Verb or equivalent 
phrase. Thus the words 

ubi fuisti ? where have you been? 
are a Direct Question, with the Yerb in the Indicative; in the sentence: 

die mihi ubi fueris, tell me where you have been, 
the same words are an Indirect Question, and the Dependent Yerb is 
in the Subjunctive. Examples are: 
doce me quo modo ea effugere possim, teach me how lean avoid these things, 
in omni injustitia permultum interest utrum perturbatione allqua animi an con- 
sulto fiat injuria, in every instance of violence it makes a great difference 
whether the wrong is done in passion or deliberately, 
considerabimus quid fecerit, quid faciat, quid facturus sit, ice will consider what 
he has done, what he is doing, what he will do. 

2. Indirect Questions are carefully to be distinguished from Relative 
Sentences in the Subjunctive, also from Direct Questions in the Sub- 
junctive (Dubitative Subjunctive), as: quid faciam ? what shall I do. 9 
quid facerem ? ivhat was I to do? 

269. Questions are introduced in Latin by Interrog- 
ative Pronouns, Adverbs or Particles. Direct questions 
sometimes have no interrogative word and are made 
interrogative simply by the tone of voice in which they 
are uttered. 



— 14:0 



270. Interrogative Pronouns are partly Substan- 
tives, partly Adjectives. The commonest of Interroga- 
tive Pronouns and Adverbs are the following : 

Pronouns. 



Substantive. 



Adjective. 



quis? quid? 
quisnani ? quidnam ? 
qui? quae? quod? 
liter? (also Subst.) 
quails? 
quantus ? 
quotiis ? 
quotusquisque? (also 

Subst.) 
quot (Indeclin.) 



who? what? 

who? what pray? 

which? 

ivhich of the two? 

of what kind? 

how great? 

what? (in number or order) 

how few? 



ubi? where? 

unde? whence? 

quo? whither? 

qua? where? which way? 

quando? when? 

quotiens? how often? 

quomodo ? ) 

quemadmodum ? j 

cur? ) 

quarg? >why? what 

quam 6b rem? ) for? 



how many? 

Adverbs. 

ubinam? where pray? 

undenam? whence pray? 

quonam? whither pray? 

quanam? which way pray? 

quamdiii? ) , 

> how 



quousque 



p? 



long, 



how? 



quam? (only before Adjectives & 
Adverbs) how? how much? 

quantopere (only before Verbs) 
how greatly? how much? 

quidni? ) 

ciirnon?[ wh V not? 

1. The Interrogative quid, what? is used as a question by itself; so 
also quid vero ? quid igitur ? which are always followed by 
another question. With quid, quod, occurring in transitions, 
dicani is omitted: it may be rendered nay, nay even. In a com- 
plete question quid also means why? as: 

quid raetuam mortem ? ichy should I fear death? 

Likewise in such expressions as: quid multa ? where dicam is 
to be supplied. The phrases nescio quis, nescio quid, are Indefi- 
nites in meaning, equivalent to aliquis, aliquid, and have no 
influence upon the construction, as: 

nescio quis ex me quaesivit, somebody asked me. 

And in like manner without a Yerb: 

nescio quo casu, nescio quo moclo, nescio quo pacto, I don't know how. 



2. quot is used adjectively; its corresponding Substantive is 
quam multi. 

3. The form qui for quo modo, how, by which way, chiefly oc- 
curs with fieri and posse in direct questions, rarely in indirect 
questions, as: qui fit? how does it happen? 

4. quare, and quainobrem, why? are of rare occurrence 
in direct questions; in indirect questions they are common, and quani- 
obrem is almost exclusively so used. 

5. quidni, why not, with the Subjunctive is used in direct 
questions which expect no answer and express a strong affirmation, 
as: quidni hoc faciam? why should I not do this? (Certainly, I 
should). A question introduced by ear always expects an answer. 
— quin, why not? with the Present Indicative is used in lively 
questions with the force of an Imperative, as : quin conscendlmus 
equos? why not mount our horses? 

271. Questions requiring the answer yes or no 
are introduced by special Interrogative Particles. Such 
questions are either Simple, introduced by -ne, noii- 
ne, num, or Alternative (Disjunctive), introduced by 
utrum, (~ne) . . an. For the simple question intro- 
duced by an, see 277. 

272. In a Direct Simple Question -ne asks merely 
for information without indicating the expectation of 
the speaker; it cannot stand by itself, but is joined to 
any emphatic word, usually the Verb which then 
comes first in the sentence; it is not translated, as: 

meministlne me in senatu dicere ? don't you remember my saying in the senate? 
omnisne pecunia debita soluta est? is all the money owing paid? 

273. When a negative answer is expected, num is 

used, which stands at the beginning of the sentence 

and is likewise not translated, as: 

num tibi cum fauces urit sitis, aurea quaeris pocula? when thirst 

burns your throat, do you ask for golden cups? (No.) 
num lacrlmas victus dedit? did he, overcome, shed tears? 



— 142 — 

1. Remember that quis is used after mim (not aliquis, see 
142). For num quis, num quid, also ecquis, ecquid may 

be used, as: 
ecquam terram vidisti cultiorem Italia ? did you see any more cultivated land 
than Italy? 

The Neuters numquid and ecquid are also used simply as Inter- 
rogative Particles, as: 
ecquid attendis? do you pay attention? 

274. With non, not, -ne forms the special inter- 
rogative particle nonne (to be translated not)) it ex- 
pects the answer yes, as: 

nonne hunc in vincula duci, non ad mortem rapi, non summo sup- 
plicio mactari imperabis, will you not order him to be thrown 
into prison, to be hurried off to execution, to be put to death 
with the utmost severity? 

1. "When several questions expecting an affirmative answer follow 
in immediate succession, only the first takes nonne, the following, 
non. See the example above. 

2. In argumentation per exempla, the particle -ne added to the 
Verb has the force of nonne and implies an affirmative answer, 
as: videsne, videmusne, videtisne? instead of nonne vides? don't 
you see? 

3. The Interrogative Particle is omitted: 

a. In direct simple questions expressing surprise, astonishment, 
J dame, as: 

patere tua consilia non sentis? do you not see that your schemes are manifest? 

b. In exclamatory questions with tit and the Subjunctive, as: 

tu ut unquamte corrlgas? you— ever reform yourself? 

c. In exclamatory questions with the Accusative and Infinitive (see 

253. 1.), as: 

te nunc, mea Terentla, sic vexari? that you now, my dear Terentia, should be so 
afflicted ? 

275. Indirect Simple Questions have the same par- 
ticles as the direct; but num loses its peculiar force 
so that both num and -ne correspond to the English 
whether. 



— 143 — 

After Verbs of ashing, nonne is used with the 
force of whether not, as: 

id possetne fieri consuluit, he consulted, whether it could be done, 
quaero num tu senatui causam tuam permittas, I ask you whether 

you will permit your case to the senate? 
e Socrate quaesltum est Archelauni nonne beatum putaret, So- 
crates was asked whether he did not consider A rchelaus happy. 

1. After Verbs of trying (conari, expenri, tentare) and expecting 
(exspectare), si, if, is used for whether, as: 

tentata res est, si primo impetu capi Ardea posset, an attempt was made {to 
see) if Ardea could be taken in the first attack, 

276. Disjunctive Questions by which, of two or more 
things thought of as possible, the one actually true is 
sought to be known, have the following forms: 
First Clause. Second and Subsequent Clauses, 

utrum, whether an, or 

-ng, an, 

an, 
-ne (only in indirect questions). 

Accordingly, utrum or — ne, whether, stands in the 
first member; an, or, in the second; but the inter- 
rogative particle is often omitted in the first member 
when -ne may stand in the second; but this form 
occurs only in indirect questions. 

Direct Disjunctive Questions*, 

utrum nescis an pro nihilo id putas ? is it that you don't know, 

or do you think nothing of it? 
quaero servosne an liberos, I ask v-hether slaves or free? 
rides an ploras? do you laugh or cry? ■ 



Indirect Disjunctive Questions. 

quaero utrum verum an falsum sit } 

quaero verumne an falsum sit I I ask whether it be true 

quaero verum an falsum sit t or false 

quaero verum falsumne sit ) 



_ 144 — 

1. In Direct questions or not is annon; in Indirect, necne, as: 

isne est quern quaero annon? is that the man lam looking for, or not? 
sapientia beatos efficiat necne quaestio est, whether or not wisdom makes men 
happy is a question. 

2. When some part of the question only is disjunctive, not the ques- 
tion itself, the common distinctive particle aut or vel must be used, as: 

voluptas melioremne efficit aut laudabiliorem virura? does pleasure make a 
better or more praiseworthy man? 

277. Sometimes the first part of a disjunctive 

question is omitted or implied, and an alone asks a 

question, usually with indignation or surprise, and 

always referring to a preceding statement, as: 

invitus te offendi. An putas me delectari laedendis hominibus ? it 
was against my will that I offended you. Or do you think I 
find delight in offending others ? 

1. Notice that these questions with an imply a negative answer 
on the part of the speaker (Rhetorical Questions). Accordingly, they 
require the Indefinite Pronouns and Adverbs used in negative sen- 
tences, viz: quisquam, ullus, unquam, &c, as: an quisquam 
putat, or does anybody believe? 

2. The particle an, after a preceding question, may be rendered 
most likely but, and it then indicates that the answer cannot be 
doubtful, as: 

a rebus gerendis abstrahit senectus. Quibus ? an iis quae juventute geruntur et 
viribus? old age abstracts us from public business. From which? Most likely 
but from those which cannot be pursued without the energy of youth? 

Here we may suppose 'onmibusne' to be supplied before ( an 
iis': is it from all kinds of business or those &c. 

278. The particle an is also used in single indirect 

questions and signifies whether . . not, but, inclining to 

the affirmative. It occurs in such expressions as: 

haud scio (nescio) an, I do not know but; non dublto 

an, i" doubt, I doubt but = I almost think; also after: 

haeslto, delibero, dubium est, incertum est, thus: 

si per se virtus sine fortuna ponderanda sit, dublto an hunc primum 

omnium ponam, if virtue is to be estimated without reference 

to its success, I am not certain whether I should not prefer this 

man to all others (I doubt but I should put this man first of all). 



— 145 — 

1. The expressions hand scio an, nescio an, / almost think, 
are followed by the Negatives non, nullus, nem6, numquam, 
instead of ulliis, quisquam, unquam, as: 

haud scio an non verum sit, i" am inclined to think it may not be true, 

2. The expressions haud scio an, nescio an, incertum est 

an, may be used without a Yerb quite in the sense of perhaps, as: 

moriendum certe est, et id incertum an hoc ipso die, to be sure we must die and 
pe?*haps this very day. 

Question and Answer, 

279. The responsive yes is represented: 

a. By repeating the emphatic word, as: 
vidistlne eum? did you see him? vidi, yes, I did. 

b. By Ita, so; ita est, so it is; ita vero est, so it is 
indeed. 

c. By vero, truly (commonly with preceding Pro- 
noun, as: ego vero; ille vero); etiam, even so; sane (lit. 
soundly), of course; sane quidem, yes indeed. 

280. The responsive no is represented: 

a. By repeating the emphatic word with the nega- 
tive, as: 

solusne venisti? did you come alone? non solus, no, I did not. 

b. By mmime, by no means; minime vero, by no 
means indeed; nihil minus, nothing less so. 

c. By non ita, not so. 

1. The particle imnio, nay, is used to correct some part of the 
question, and either contradicts or heightens a previous statement; 
in the former case it is equivalent to nay, rather; in the latter to 
yesy indeed, as: 

causa tibi nonne videturbona? irarao (vero) optima, the cause does not seem to 

you a good one? Nay, it is an excellent one, 
ecquid placeant aedes me rogas ? immo, do I like the house you ask me? Yea 
indeed. 



— 146 — 

OratTo obliqua. 

281. A Statement which gives the exact words of 

the original speaker or writer, is called oratio recta 

or Direct Discourse; but if the statement is expressed 

as reported, recognized, or contemplated by some one, and 

made to depend upon some Verb of saying, &c. (dico, 

respondeo, nuntio, ajo), with which it is introduced, 

it is called Indirect Discourse, oratio obliqua. 

1. inquam, quoth I, is used only in direct quotations; §jo, I 
say, generally in indirect quotations, inquam is always parenthetic 
and follows one or more o( the words quoted. When a Nominative 
is added to inquit, it commonly follows its Yerb, as: 
uva, inqnit vulpes, nondum raatura est, the grape is not yet ripe, says the fox, 

282. When a speech is transferred from the ora- 
tio recta to the oratio obliqua, the following changes 
take place: 

I. Principal Sentences expressing an assertion or 
statement (Declarative Sentences) are put: 

in oratio recta in the Indicative, 
in oratio obliqua in the Accusative with the In- 
finitive. 

II. Principal Sentences expressing a command, de- 
mand or wish (Imperative Sentences) are put: 

in oratio recta in the Imperative or Hortatory 

Subjunctive, 
in oratio obliqua in the Subjunctive. 

III. Principal Sentences asking a question (Interroga- 
tive Sentences) are put: 

in oratio recta in the Indicative or Subjunctive, 
in oratio obliqua in the Subjunctive, partly in the 
Accusative and Infinitive. 



— 147 — 

IV. Dependent Sentences are put: 

in oratlo recta in the Indicative or Subjunctive, 
in oratio obllqua in the Subjunctive. 

V. The Pronouns which refer to the Subject of the 
Principal Sentence will be changed in oratio obllqua 
into the proper forms of the Reflexive sui, slbi, se, 
and its Possessive suus. 

Oratio recta. Oratio Obllqua. 

Alexander ad Parmenionem con- Alexander adParmenionem con- 
versus Ego, inquit, cum Da- versus dixit, sese, cum Da- 
rSus terram ureret, mei com- reus terram ureret, sui com- 
pos non eram. potem non luisse. 

Yos ite ad copias quibus quis- Illi irent ad copias, quibus 

que praeest. quisque praeesset. 

Nunc vero, quid metuam, cum Turn vero, quid metueret, 

ille acie decernere paret? cum ille acle decernere para- 
ret ? 

Ego jam adero, et quid fieri Sese jam affutiirum et quid 

velim exponam. fieri vellet (velit) expositurum. 

283. A few more detailed statements as to the 
Five General Rules of oratio obllqua need to be added 
here. 

I. When the Relative is to be resolved into a co- 
ordinating conjunction with a Demonstrative (qui = 
et Is or nam Is), the Relative Clause is really independ- 
ent and takes the Accusative and Infinitive like a 
Declarative Sentence, as: 

unumquemque nostrum censent philosophi mundi esse partem, ex 
quo illud natiira eonsequi, ut communem utilitatem nostrae an- 
teponamus, the philosophers say that each one of us is a part 
of the universe from which it naturally follows that we prefer 
the common welfare to our own. (ex quo = et ex eo, and that 
from this, &c.) 



— 148 — 

II. Sentences expressing a requirement take the 
Subjunctive (commonly in the Imperfect); ut can he 
used in the first sentence, but only in the first. The 
Negative is ne; negatives are added by neve, as: 

reddltur responsum, nonclum tempus pugnae esse; castris se tene- 
rent, there was returned for answer that it was not yet time to 
fight, that they must keep within the camp, 

. . . .irent acl coplas neve diutius morarentur, they should go to the 
army and not delay any longer. 

III. Direct Questions expecting an answer take the 

Subjunctive; Rhetorical Questions expecting no answer 

and being really statements, are put in the Accusative 

with the Infinitive. The former, in the second Person 

in oratlo recta, are transferred from the Present to 

the Imperfect Subjunctive, and from the Perfect to the 

Pluperfect Subjunctive in oratio obliqua; the latter are 

in the first or third Person in oratio recta. 

Ariovistus respondit se prius in Galliam venisse quam populum 
Komanum, quid sibi vellet, cur in possessiones suas venlret, 
Ariovistus repliea that he had come to Gaul before the Bo- 
man people; what did he (Caesar) mean by coming into his 
possessions (= quid tibi vis, cur venis), 

si veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet, num etiam recentium inju- 
riarum memoriam se deponere posse? if he was willing to for- 
get the old insult, could he lay aside the memory of recent 
wrongs? (= si. .volo, num. .possum?) 

Rhetorical Questions asked by the potential or dubi- 
tative Subjunctive must retain the Subjunctive, but 
change it from the Present of oratio recta to the Im- 
perfect of oratio obliqua, as: 

quis sibi persuaderet sine cert a re Ambiorlgem ad ejusmodi con- 
silium descendisse? who would persuade himself that Ambiorix 
had proceeded to a measure like that without having made a 
sure thing of it? (== quis sibi hoc persuadeat?) 



— 149 — 

IV. Dependent clauses expressing a thought of the 
reported Subject or Speaker take the Subjunctive; the 
Indicative is used in dependent clauses which are 
merely explanatory or contain a statement of the Re- 
porter, as: 

Stoici negant quidquam esse bonum nisi quod honestum sit, the 
Stoics assert that nothing is good but what is right, 

Caesaris exploratores referunt apud Suebos esse silvara infinlta 
magnitudme, quae appellator Bacenis, Caesar's scouts report 
that there is a forest of unlimited extent in the territory of the 
Suebi which is called Bacenis. 

V. The second Person of the oratlo recta is repre- 
sented by ille or Is in oratio obliqua. The Pronoun 
ipse in oratio recta is retained in oratio obliqua; it 
is also used as emphatic Pronoun of any person, as: 

Ariovistus respondit, si quid ipsi a Caesare opus esset, sese ad 
ilium venturum fuisse; si quid ille se velit, ilium ad se venire 
oportere, Ariovistus answered that if he had wanted anything 
of Caesar j he would have come to him; if he (Caesar) wanted 
anything of him, he ought to come to him (Ariovistus), 

Ariovistus respondit, si ipse populo Romano non praescriberet 
quemadmodum suo jure uteretur, non oportere sese a populo 
Romano in suo jure impediri, Ariovistus answered, if he did 
not prescribe to the Roman people how to exercise their right, 
he ought not to be hindered by the Roman people in the exer- 
cise of his right. 

1. The tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of Sequence (166). 
But sometimes the Present and Perfect may be used after a Historical 
Tense to impart greater liveliness or accuracy to the narra- 
tive, as: 

Caesar respondit si obsides sibi dentur, sese pacem esse facturum, Caesar re- 
plied that if hostages should be given him, he would make peace. 

2. The Demonstrative hie is changed into ille (is), and the Adverb 
nunc into turn and tunc, as: 

Diodorus respondit se paucis illis diebus illud argentnm misuse Lilybaeum, Dio- 
dorus answered that he had sent that silver plate to Lilybaeum. within a few 
days (= nasi paucis bis diebus). 



— 150 — 

Use of the Reflexive Pronoun* 

284. The Reflexive Pronoun sui, sibi, se* and its 
Possessive suus, is used in some part of the Predicate 
when reference is made to the Subject of the same 
sentence (Direct Reflexive), as: 

oppidani faclnus in se ac suos foedum consciscunt, the citizens de- 
cide on afoul crime against themselves and their friends. 

Participles, Infinitives, the Ablative Absolute, and the 

Accusative with the Infinitive have in a Latin sentence 

the office or value of a single part of speech and are 

regarded as such as: 

Marius percussore*u contra se missum vultus auctoritate deterruit, 

Marius terrified the assassin who had been sent against him 

by his commanding aspect. 

1. Dux ejusque {not sui) milites fugerunt, is abbreviated for: 
dux fugit et milites ejus fugerunt. 

2. The Possessive suus, in the sense of his own, peculiar, prober, 
may refer to another ease than that of the subject, as: 

Socratem cives sui interfeeerunt, Socrates 1 own countrymen put him to death. 
And in like manner, when sutis is brought into very close con- 
nection with another case than that of the subject, as: 
Caesar FabTum cnm sua legione (but: et legionem ejus) remittit in hiberna, 

Caesar sends Fabius with his legion back into winter quarters, 
puer columbam cepit iu nido suo (but: et nidum ejus), the boy caught the dove 
in its nest. 

3. The Genitives ejus, eorum, earum are used as Possessives of 
the third Person when no emphasis appears or when reference is 
made to a noun in another sentence, as: 

Deum agnoscis ex operibus ejus, you recognize God by his works, 
multi cives interfecti eorumque bona publicata sunt, many citizens were slain 
and their property confiscated. 

285. The Reflexive Pronouns are used in all Dependent 
Sentences (see 187) including under this head the Accu- 
sative and Infinitive commonly with reference to the 

Subject of the Principal Sentence, (Indirect Reflexive), as: 

Thrasybulus magna voce exciamat cur se fuglant, Thrasybulus 
cried out with a loud voice why they ran from him 9 



— 151 — 

an culquam homlni est usus, ut se cruclet? of what good is it to 

any man to torture himself? 
Hannibal imperavit puero, ut propere sibi nuntiaret, nura undique 

obsideretur, Hannibal ordered the servant to bring him word 

quickly whether he was shut in on all sides. 

286. The Reflexive Pronouns are also used in reference 
to the Subject of the Dependent Sentence, and sometimes 
they refer first to the Subject of the Principal Sentence 
(called the Logical Subject) and then to the Subject 
of the Dependent Sentence (Grammatical Subject), thus: 

Medeani praedicant in fuga fratris sui membra in iis locis, qua se 
parens persequeretur, dissipavisse, they relate that Medea, on 
her flight, strew her brother's limbs in those places where her 
father pursued her y 

Romani legatos miserunt, qui a Prusia rege peterent, ne inimicis- 
simum suum (logical subject) secum (gramm. subject) haberet siblque 
(logical subject) dederet, the Romans sent ambassadors to ask 
king Prusias not to keep their bitterest enemy at his court but 
to deliver him to them. 

287. Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, whether 
referring to a principal or dependent subject, ipse 
may be used to avoid ambiguity, as: 

Jugurtha legatos ad consiilem mittit, qui ipsi libensque vitam pe- 
terent, Jugurtha sent ambassadors to ask life for himself and 
his children (sibi might refer to legatos). 

The Reflexive may also refer to the logical, and not 
the grammatical subject of the principal sentence, 
when these are different, as : 
a Caesare valde liberaliter invltor, sibi ut sim legatus, / am very 
kindly invited by Caesar to be lieutenant to him (= Caesar in- 
vites me; Caesar logical Subject). 

1. Where the Demonstrative is used instead of the Keflexive, the 
point of view of the Reporter is assumed, as: 
Solon, quo tutlor vita ejus esset, furere se simulavit, Solon feigned madness that 

his life might be the safer, 
Paetus omnes libro9 quos frater suus reliquisset mihi donavit, Foetus presented 

to me all the books that his brother had left (quos frater ejus reliquerat, would 

be statement of the reporter). 



— 152 — 

Reciprocal Pronouns. 

288. The Reciprocal forms each other, one another 

are expressed in Latin by inter nos, inter vos, inter 

se, or by alter . . alter um (alteri); alms . . alium (alii). 

— alter . . alteram is properly used of two; and alius 

. . alium of more than two; as: 

pueri amant inter se, the boys love one another, 

fratres alter alteram adjuvant, the brothers help each other, 

milites alius alium increpabant, the soldiers scolded one another. 

1. Instead of inter se (or redundantly along with it) the noun 
may be repeated in an oblique case, as: 

cives civibus (inter se) parcere aequum est, it is fair that citizens should spare 
one another. 

Participles. 

289. The Participle expresses the action of the 
Verb in the form of an Adjective. Accordingly, it 
agrees with its Substantive in Gender, Number, and 
Case. On the other hand it governs the Case of its 
Verb and carries with it the idea of time, represent- 
ing either contemporaneous or prior action. 

290. There are two Participles in the Active Voice: 

I. The Present Participle denoting contemporaneous 
action, as : scribens, writing; 

II. The Future Participle denoting intention or being 
on the point of doing something, or an action as still 
to take place, as: scripturus, being about to write. 

291. There are two Participles in the Passive Voice: 
I. The Perfect Participle represents prior suffering 

or enduring of the action expressed by the Verb, 
as: scriptus, written. 



— 153 — 

II. The so-called Future Participle represents con- 
temporaneous necessity or propriety, as: scribenda 
epistula, a letter ivhich ought to be written. (Par- 
ticipmm necessitatis.) It is more properly called 
the Gerundive and is sometimes used with the 
force of a Present Participle Passive, as: 

superstitione tollenda non tollitur religio, by removing super- 
stition religion is not removed. 

292. Deponent Verbs have four Participles : 

I. The Present Participle, as : hortans, exhorting, 

II. The Perfect Participle, as: hortatus, having ex- 
horted, 

III. The Fut. Part. Act., as: hortaturus, being about 
to exhort, 

IV. The Put. Part. Pass., as : hortandus, to be ex- 
horted. 

293. The tenses of the Participle are Present, Past 
or Future, relatively to the time of the Verb on which 
they depend. Hence the Present Participle denoting 
continuance, may represent the Present, Imperfect or 
Future, as: 

Plato scribens mortiius est, Plato died while (he was) writing, 
nemo cunctam terram intiiens de providentia divina dubitabit, no 

one, when he looks at the whole earth will doubt of the divine 

providence. 

The Perfect Participle represents the action as com- 
pleted at the time denoted by the principal Verb, as : 

his rebus constitutes (== hae res postquara constitutae sunt) in 
urbem redii, after settling these affairs I returned to town, 

his rebus constitutis (= hae res cum constitQtae erunt) in urbem 
redibo, after settling these affaws I will return to town, 



— 154 — 

The Future Participles represent the intention or 
necessity as taking place at the time denoted by the 
principal Verb. 

1. Except in Deponent Verbs, the Latin has no Perfect Active Parti- 
ciple. The Perfect Participle of several Deponents is used in the 
sense of a Present; such are: arbitratus, commoratus, ratus, ausus, 
^avlsus, solltus, fisus (conflsus, diff Isus), usus, verltus. 

On the other hand, the Perfect Participle of a few Deponents may 
also be Passive, as: comitatus, accompanied; contestatus, accredited; 
meditatus, meditated; confessus, acknowledged; dimensus, meas- 
ured; ementltus, forged; expertus, tried; partltus, shared. 

2. The Perfect Participle with habeo (teneo), I hold, have, is almost 
the same as a Perfect Active, but lays peculiar stress on the continued 
effect of the Verb, as: mihi persuasum habeo, lam convinced, I re- 
gard as settled; statutum habeo, I have resolved, I have it made a 
rule. This construction is common with Perfect Participles denoting 
knowledge and determination, as: exploratum, perspectum, per- 
ceptum, constitfitum, deliberatum habeo, thus: 

fidem, quam habent spectatam et diu cogrritam, my fidelity which they have 
'proved and long known. 

294. The Participles are used attributively or in 

the manner of ordinary Adjectives, as: 

arbor fiorens, a blossoming tree scripta epistula, a written letter 
puer dormiens, a sleeping boy urbs obsessa, a besieged town. 

They are also often used as Nouns, but the Nomi- 
native Singular in this use is more rare, as: 

docens discentem, discens docentem adjuvare debet, the teacher 
must assist the learner, and the learner the teacher. 

The oblique cases of the Singular and the Plural 
are frequent. 

295. Participles are used in Latin where in En- 
glish a dependent clause would be used to express 
time, cause, condition, concession. They have two pe- 
culiar constructions being used; 



— 155 — 

I. Appositively, or with the construction of an Ad- 
jective (Participium conjunction); 

II. Absolutely, or with an adverbial construction 
(Ablativus absolutus or Ablativus consequentiae). 

290. The Participle, used appositively, is a substi- 
tute for a dependent clause of which it represents it- 
self the Predicate, and the Subject of which occurs 
in the principal sentence either as Subject or in an 

Oblique Case. Thus instead of: 
sequere viam, quae ad virtutein ducit, follow the path which leads 
to virtue, 

we say: sequere viam ad virtutem ducentem, by omit- 
ting the connective word qui, and turning the finite 
Verb ducit into the corresponding Participle which 
then agrees with its Noun in Gender, Number and Case. 

297. Participles used appositively, have very often 

the value of Relative Clauses, as: 
omnes allud ngontes , allud simulantes perfldi sunt, all who are, 
driving at one thing and jjreten ding another are treacherous. 

1. In many eases, the want of a Perfect Active Participle may 
be supplied. by a change of Voice, as: 

Alexander urbem a so condTtam (=qnam condiderat) AlexandiTam nominavit, 
Alexander called the city loldch he ha d founded Alexandria. 

The Perfect Active Participle may also be supplied by the Ablative 
Absolute, see 304. 2. 

2. Especially to be noted are the phrases: qui dicitur, qui voca- 
tur, or quern dicunt, quem vocant, so-called; quod supra diximus, 
above mentioned; qui inscribltur, entitled, which are never turned 
into Participle constructions, as: 

vestra, quae dicitur vita, mors est, your so-called life is death. 
So also a relative clause is commonly used to denote a definite, 
but not permanent, condition of a person, as: 
ii qui audiunt (audlent), the hearers, 
ii qui legunt (legent), the readws, 
ii qui adsuut (adSrant, adSrunt), t?ie persons present. 



— 156 — 

298. Participles used appositively may be equivalent 
to Dependent Clauses: 

a. Of Time, introduced by while, when, as, after, as: 
Plato scribens mortims est, Plato died while writing , 

b. Of Cause, Condition, Concession, introduced by 
since, because; if; though, although, as: 

cantus olorlnus recte fabulosus habetur numquam auditus, the 
sioan's song is justly regarded as fabulous, because it has never 
been heard, 
mendaci hommi ne verum quidem dicenti credlmus, we do not 

believe a liar even if he speaks the truth, 
ociilus se non videns , alia cernit, the eye though not seeing itself 
sees other things. 

1. The Participle with a negative, as non, nihil, is often best 
rendered by without and a participial noun, as: 
multi homines vituperant libros non intellectos , many inert find fault with books 
without understanding them. 

299. The Future Participle in urus, used apposi- 
tively, expresses not only an action that is intended or 
about to take place, but is also used after Verbs of 
motion (ire, mittere, &c.) to point out end or purpose, 
corresponding to the English Infinitive with to = in 
order to, for the purpose of, as: 

Scipto in Africam trajScit Carthagmem deleturus , Scipio crossed 
over into Africa to destroy Carthage. 

300. The Participle used appositively, often sup- 
plies the place of a co-ordinate clause, and may then 
be best rendered by a finite Verb with and or but, as: 

Manilas Galium caesum torque spoliavit , Manlius slew the Gaul 
and stripped him of his neckchain. 

sol. Passive Participles in appositive construction 
are often used in Latin where the English idiom re- 
quires a participial noun, the Perfect being employed 



— 157 — 

to represent an action as completed, and the Future 
when it is conceived as still incomplete or ideal (309), as: 

Romae regnatum est ab condita urbe ad liberatam annos ducentos 
quadraginta quattiior, at Borne the regal -power continued from 
the building of the city to its delivery 244 years, 

Brutus in liberanda patrla est interfectus, Brutus was slain in 
the effort to free his country, 

1. Verbs of Perception (videre, conspicere, audlre) and Represen- 
tation (facere, fingere, inducere) take the Accusative with the Present 
Participle, when the object is to be represented as actually seen, 
heard, <fcc. (see 193. 3, construction of facio; 255. 2.), as: 

Catonem vidi in bibiiotliecasedentem, I saw Cato sitting in the library, 
Xenophon facit Socratem disputantem, Xenophon represents Socrates disputing. 

As there is no Present Participle Passive, the Infinitive must be used 
in the Passive, as: 

Plato a Deo aedificari mundum facit, Plato makes out that the univei*se is built 
by God 

Ablative Absolute. 

302. A Noun or Pronoun with a Participle is used 
in the Ablative Case absolutely to express some ac- 
companying circumstance or condition of the action, 
(Ablativus absolutus or Ablativus consequentiae). 

The Ablative Absolute is equivalent in force to 
a dependent clause of which the Substantive or 
Pronoun is Subject and the accompanying Participle 
is Predicate. The Subject is always a different person 
or thing from any in the principal clause. 

303. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by 
the English Nominative Absolute which is a close equiv- 
alent. But, as a rule, the same change of form is 
required as in translating Participles in general 
(see 298), 



— 158 — 

1. The Present Participle is oftenest to be rendered by a clause 
with wlien y while, as, and the Perfect Passive Participle by the Perfect 
Active Participle in English, or by a clause with after, token, because. 
Sometimes it is best to make use of an Abstract Noun with a Prepo- 
sition — in, during, after, by, from, through, thus: 

Numa Pompillo regnante (= cum Numa PompilTus regnaret), 

Numa Pompilius reigning. When Numa Pompilius was 

reigning. In the reign of Numa Pompilius. 
Caesare interfecto (= cum Caesar interfectus esset), Caesar being, 

having been murdered. When Caesar had been murdered. 

After the murder cj Caesar. 

at illi (Britjmni) interrrisso ppntio, imprndentibns nostris ntqne oecnpatis in 
munitione castrorum, subltObe ex silvisejeceiunt, ir.iiietfiqne m eos facto , qui 
erant in statione pro castris collocati, acrlter pugnaverunt, but t/iey having 
paused a space, while our men were unaware and busie d in fortifying Hie 
camp, suddenly threw themselves out of the icoods, then nmking an atlcickupon 
those who were on guard in front of the camp, fought fiercely. 

2. The want of a Perfect Active Participle in Latin is frequently 
supplied by the Ablative Absolute with a Passive Participle, thus: 

Caesar, urbe capta, rediiMfre city (being) taken, after the city was taken, Caesar 
returned — having taken the city, after he had taken the city, Caesar returned 
— afte?" the taking of the city Caesar returned. 

3. As a rule, the Ablative Absolute can stand only when its noun 
denotes a different person or thing from any in the principal clause. 
Accordingly: 

Manlius, having slain the Gaul, Stripped him of his neckchain, 
cannot be rendered by the Ablative Absolute: Manlius caeso Gallo eum 
torque spoliavit; but only by the Participle \k Apposition: Manllus 
caesum Galium torque spoliavit. Yet a few examples occur of a 
deviation from this rule, as: 
Caesar principibus Trevirorum ad se convocatis, hos singillatim CingetorTgi con- 
ciliavit, Caesar having summoned the chiefs of the Treviri, reconciled them 
severally to Cingetorix. 

4 As the Perfect Participles of Deponents correspond to Perfect 
Active Participles in English, no necessity exists for the use of the Ab- 
lative Absolute with them, as: 
Caesar nrilTtes eohortatus signum pugnae dedit, Caesar having encouraged the 
soldiej-s gave the signal of battle. 

304. The Ablative Absolute is common only with 

Present and Perfect Participles. Instances of its use 

with Future Participles are rare, as: 

rex apum nonnlsi migratiiro examine foras procGdit, the Mng-bee 

does riot go abroad, except when a swarm is about to emigrate. 



— 159 — 

1. Another Ablative should not be placed in apposition with an 
Ablative Absolute. Thus we may say: 

puero inortuo, the boy having died; but not: 
Gaio puero morttio, the boy Gams having died. 

This should be expressed by: cum Gaius puer mortiius esset. In 
like manner: cum Cicero consul creatus esset; not, Cicerone consule 
creato. 

2. The Participles audito, it having been heard; comperto, it 
having been found out, cognito, it having become known, and 
the like are often used in the Ablative Absolute without a Substantive, 
which is supplied by a clause considered as a neuter Substantive in 
the Ablative, as: 

Hannibal cognito sibi insidias parari, fnga salutem quaeslvit, Hannibal wlxen 
the fact that plots we>~e preparing for him was known, sought safety by flight 

This construction is confined to the following Participles: audito, 
comperto, cognito, credlto, edicto, explorato, intellecto, nuntiato, 
pacto, permisso. 

3. Sometimes iis is to be supplied from a descriptive relative 
clause which foilows: 

Hannibal Iberum copias trajecit, praemissis qui AJpTum transitus specularentur, 
Hannibal threw his troops awoss the Lbro, having sent ahead men icho 
should explore the passes of the Alps, 

805. In the construction of the Ablative Absolute, 

instead of the Participle, a predicative Substantive or 

Adjective can be employed. The nouns so used either 

express in themselves the action of a Yerb, as: 

natiira duce (= natura ducente), under the guidance of nature, 

or the Verb esse is to be sullied, as: 

Cicerone consule (= cum Cicero consul esset), in the consulsliip 

of Cicero, 
patre invito (= cum pater invltus est, esset), while father is, or 

was unwilling, against father's will. , 

1. Examples of these Substantives are: adjutor, auctor, dux, judex, 
praeceptor, testis, consul, praetor, rex, impcrator, puer, pueriilus, 
senex. 

virtute duce, comfte fortuna, be virtue our leader, fortune our companion, 
quod Deo teste promiseris id tenendum esi,what you have promised calling God 

to witness must be kept, 
jnari tranquillo navem gnbernare facte est, when the sea is calm, it is easy to 
steer a ship. 



— 160 — 

Gerund and Gerundive. 
806. As the Infinitive is used as a Verbal Noun in 
the Nominative and Accusative Cases, so the Gerund, 
corresponding to the English Participial Noun in ing, 
is used in the remaining Cases, thus: 



Nom. 


scribere est utile , 


writing is useful 


Gen. 


ars scribendi 


the art of writing 


Dat. 


scribendo adfui 


I was present at the writing 


Ace. 


scribere disco 


I learn to write 




ad scribendum utilis 


useful for writing 


Abl. 


scribendo discimus 


we learn by writing. 



With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the Infini- 
tive is employed. The Gerund governs the same Case 
as its Verb, but is governed itself like a Substantive 
(by Substantives, Adjectives, Verbs, or Prepositions) 
and modified by Adverbs, thus: 

ars scribendi epistulam the art of writing a letter 

cupidus te audiendi desirous of hearing you 

injurlas ferendo by bearing wrongs 

ad beate vivendum for living happily 

parendo legibus by obeying the laws. 

807. When the Gerund would have an object in 
the Accusative, the Gerundive is generally used in its 
stead in the following manner : 

The Accusative Object is put in the same Case as 
the Gerund; 

The Gerund is then changed into the Gerundive and 
made to agree with the Object Noun in Gender, Num- 
ber and Case, thus: 

Gerund. Gerundive. 

Gen. scribendi epistulam scribendae epistulae 

Dat. scribendo epistulam scribendae epistulae 

Ace. ad scribendum epistulam ad scribendam epistulam 
Abl, scribenclo epistulam scrjbenda epistfila. 



— 1G1 — 

308. The Gerundive is by the best authors not 
substituted for the Gerund: 

a. When the Object of the Gerund is a Neuter 

Pronoun or Adjective, because ambiguity would arise 

from the Gender not being distinguishable, as: 

ars vera et falsa dijudicandi, the art of discerning between truth 
and falsehood. 

b. For the sake of euphony to avoid the repetition 

of the Genitive-endings orum, arum, as: 

studium amicos vestros videndi, a desire of seeing your friends 
(for: amicorum vestrorum videndorum). 

c. When the idea of the Verb is emphatic, especially 
in contrasts, as: 

injurias ferendo majorem laudem quam ulciscendo mereberis, you 
ivill deserve greater praise by bearing injuries than by aveng- 
ing them. 

309. The Gerundive and the Perfect Participle Pas- 
sive may supply the place of a verbal noun, and are 
often translated alike; but the one denotes the action 
as still to take place or prospective, the other as com- 
pleted. Thus: auctor Caesaris interficiendi, leaves it 
undecided whether or not Caesar was murdered, while 
auctor Caesaris interfecti regards the murder as &fact. 

Caesare interficiendo Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem resti- 

tuere conati sunt, by the murder of Caesar Brutus and Cassius 

endeavored to restore their country' } s freedom, 
Caesare interfecto Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem non resti- 

tuerunt, by the murder of Caesar Brutus* and Cassius did not 

restore their country 1 s freedom. 

310. The Gerund and the Gerundive (when used as 
equivalent of the former according to 309) have 
some peculiar constructions, to which it is necessary 
to give special attention. 



— 162 — 

The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is used 

after Substantives in the constructions of the Subjective 

or Objective Genitive, as: 

ars vivendi, the art of living, 

ratio discendi, the method of learning, 

spes placandi Dei, the hope of appeasing God, 

studlum loquendi, love of talking, 

also as Appositive Genitive (see 27. l.), as: 
nomen carendi, the word "carere" (go without), 

and with causa and gratia, on account of, for the sake 
of , for the purpose of, to express design, thus: 

memoriae exercendae gra t!a,/or the sake of exercising the memory, 

sapientia ars vivendi putanda est, wisdom is to be considered the 
art of living, 

quoniam diximus, quae sit loquendi regula, since we have ex- 
plained what the rule of speaking is, 

postremo Catillna dissimulandi causa aut sui expurgandi causa in 
senatum venit, finally, Catiline either for the purpose of dis- 
guising his plans or of clearing himself came into the senate. 

311. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive 

is used after Adjectives denoting Desire, Knowledge, 

Skill, Recollection and their Oppo sites (see 39.), as: 

fuit rei militaris peritus, neque minus civitatis regendae, he was 
skilled in warfare nor less in governing the state. 

1. With the Genitive of Personal Pronouns, mei, tui, sui, iiostri, 
vestri, the Gerundive in 1 is used, and no regard is had to Number or 
Gender, as: 

sui conservandi causa, for the purpose of preserving themselves, 
vestri adhortandi causa, for the purpose of exhorting you. 

Sometimes the Gerund with the Accusative is found, as: 
cupTdus te audiendi, desirous of listening to you. 

2. The phrases: tempus est, it is time; consilium est (cepi), it is 
my plan; mos mihi est, it is my custom, take the Infinitive or ut 
with the Subjunctive when they stand in the Predicate, as: 

tempus abire tibi esU it is time for you to go away, 

mihi mos est plura audlre quam loqui, it is my custom to hear more than to 
speak. 



— 163 — 

But when the Substantives tempus, consilium, mos are the 
Subject, the Genitive of the Gerund or Gerundive is used in answer to the 
question to or for which, as: 
tempus cogitandi breve est, the time for considering is short.. 

3. The phrases: dare facultatem, coplara, locum, to afford an op- 
portunity; signuni dare, to give a signal; causa, ratio est, there is 
reason; auctor sum (alicui), I counsel, may take ad with the Accusa- 
tive instead of the Genitive, as: 

oppidum magnum ad ducendum bellum dabat facultatem, a large town gate 
opportunity to protract the war. 

4. Sometimes the Genitive of the Gerundive is used with esse, 
to express design or purpose, as: 

studla cupiditatesque hondrum evertendae reipublieae solent esse, greed and 
thirst for honors generally tend to the overthrow of the commonwealth. 

312. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is 
rather sparingly used by classic writers with Adjec- 
tives which govern the Dative (sec OS.). Commonly 
it is replaced by ad with the Accusative (see 313.) or 
by a Final clause with ut or qui; as: 

genus armorum aptum tegendis corporlbus, a sort of armor suited 
to the defence of the body. 

The Dative is also used after certain Verbs to de- 
note a purpose, such as: studere, operam dare, labo- 
rem impertire, praeesse; diem dicere, and in the 
phrases: solvendo non esse, to be insolvent; oneri fe- 
rendo esse, to be equal to bearirg the burden; scri- 
bendo adesse, to be present at the ivriting, as: 

rellqua tempora demetiendis fructibus et percipiendis accommo- 
data sunt, the other seasons are fitted to reap and gather in the 
harvest, 

tu praeesse agro colendo flagitlum putas? do you think it a shame 
to take charge of tillage? 

The Dative is also used after nouns meaning offi- 
cers, offices, elections, as: 

decemviri legibus scribendis, the ten commissioners for drawing 
up a code of laws, 



— 164 — 

triumvir reipublicae constituendae, a triumvir appointed to 

regulate public affairs, 
tresviri coloniae deducendae, agris dividendis, assignandis, three 

commissioners for leading out a colony and distributing the 

land, 
comitia consulibus rogandis, elections for nominating consuls. 

313. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive 
is regularly used after the Preposition ad. denoting 
purpose (with conferre also after in), and very seldom 
after ob, thus: 

vivis non ad deponendam, sed ad confirmandam audaciam, you 
live, not to put off, but to confirm your daring, 

flagitiosum est ob rem judicandam pecunlam accipere, it is shame- 
ful to take money for the passing of a judgment 

1. The use of inter, during, with the Gerund only (not with the 
Gerundive) is confined to later prose, as: inter ludendum, while 
playing. 

2. Notice also: facilis ad intellegendum, easy to understand, and 
ad with Verbs of hindering and retarding, as: 

Romanos palus ad insequendum tardabat, a swamp hindered the Romans in 
following up. 

3. After interest inter, there is a difference between, the Infin- 
itive is used instead of the Gerund, as: 

multum interest inter carere et egere, there is a great difference between xoant 
and need. 

314. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive 
is used: 

I. As the Ablative of Means, 

II. After the Prepositions ab, de, ex, In, more rarely 
after pro. 

exercendo millte quotidie hostem opperiebatur, drilling the sol- 
diers daily he waited for the enemy, 

Brutus in liberanda patria interfectus est, Brutus was slain in 
liberating his country, 

ex discendo capimus voluptatem, we receive pleasure from 
learning. 



— 165 

1. Occasionally the Ablative of the Gerundive is found as Ablative 
Absolute supplying the place of a Present Participle of the Passive, as: 

contfo plausum Ciceronis nomine recitando dedit, the assembly gave an applause 
iclien Cicero* s name was read. 

The Ablative of the Gerund after Comparatives is rare, as: 

nullum officTum referenda gratia magis necessarium est, no duty is more impor- 
tant than repaying favors. 

2. The Preposition sine, without, never takes the Gerund or 
Gerundive. The English without with a Verbal Substantive is ex- 
pressed in Latin in various ways: 

a. By the Preposition sine with a Substantive, as: 

puerum dimisi sin^ lnudatione , I dismissed the boy without praising him. 

b. By a Participle with a negative (non, nihil, &c), either in 
Appositive construction or in Ablative Absolute, as: 

miserum est nihil proficientem angi, it is sadio be troubled without accomplishing 

anything, 
nature dedit usuram vitae tanquam pecuniae nulla praestituta die , nature gave 

the enjoyment of life as if it were money, without prefixing a day. 

c. By Negative Adjectives, as: ignarus, inscius, insclens, without 
one's knowledge; imprudens, without knowing, off one's guard; 
re incognita, without having examined the affair; re infecta, with- 
out accomplishing one's object; re indicta, without a hearing, as: 

nihil per collegam meum me insciente factum est, nothing was done by my 
colleague without my knowledge. 

d. By lit non, qui non, quin, with Subjunctive, after negative 
sentences (see 203.), as: 

nullum intermlsi diem quin altquid ad te litterarum darem, I have not allowed a 
day to pass without dropping you something of a letter. 

e. By nisi (unless), after negative sentences, as: 

Caesar exercttum nunquam per insidiosa itinera dnxit, nisi persppcula tns 
locorum situs, Caesar never led his army by insidious roads without havin g 
examined the localities. 

f. By cum non (nihil, &c.) with Subjunctive, as:^ 

abiisti cum nihil mihi dixisses , you went away without saying a word to me. 

g. By a co-ordinate sentence with neque or et non, as: 

fiSri potest ut recte quis sentTat neque id quod sentit polite eloquatur (or et id 
quod sentit, polite eloqui non possit ), may be that some one thinks correctly 
without being able to state elegantly what he thinks. 



— 166 — 

3. SYNOPSIS of the Gerund and Gerundive Constructions: 

Genitive. A. Substantives. 

TkrasybCiius consilium cepit patriae liberandae (patrlam liberare). 

Thrasybulus consilium cepit suos liberandi (sui liberandi). 

Thrasybulus summo patriae liberandae studio ductus est. 

Thrasybiilus summo patriae liberandae studio (ardore) incensus 
(inflammatus) est. 

Thrasybiilus patriae liberandae causa maxima pericftla adlit. 

Thrasybulus patriae liberandae auetor fuit (ad patrlam liberan- 
dam princeps extltit). 

B. Adjectives. 
Thrasybulus patriae liberandae cupidissimus (studiosisslmus) fuit. 

Dative. 
Thrasybulus patriae liberandae non defuit. 
Thrasybulus patriae liberandae operam dedit (navavit, imperti- 
vit, impendit). 

Accusative. 

Thrasybulus unus omnium ad patrlam liberandam maxlme ido- 
neus erat. 

Thrasybiilus ad (in) patrlam liberandam omnes labores contulit. 
Thrasybulus in patrlam liberandam omni studio incubuit. 

Ablative. A. Of Means. 
Thrasybulus patria liberanda optime mereri voluit. 

B. After Prepositions. 

Thrasybulus ex patria liberanda gloriam se capturum aeternam 
sperabat. 

Thrasybulus ex patria liberata gloriam cepit aeternam. 

Thrasybulus in patria liberanda omnem operam et studium collo- 
cavit. 

Thrasybulus in patria liberanda strenue versatus est (strenue se 
gessit, fortem se praestltit). 

Thrasybiilus de patria liberanda dies noctesque cogitabat. 

315. The Gerundive, in its use for the Gerund after 
Substantives, Adjectives, Verbs and Prepositions, 



— 167 — 

(sec 310—314.) denotes a continued or incomplete 
action; in its participial use it denotes necessity or 
propriety, and, when joined with vix, hardly, or a 
negative possibility. (Passive Periphrastic Conjuga- 
tion), as: 

puer diligens laudandus est, a diligent boy ought to he praised, 
stultum est ea timere, quae vitanda non sunt, it is foolish to fear 
those things which cannot be avoided. 

1. The Neuter of the Gerundive with est, erat, &c. is used imper- 
sonally with Intransitive Verbs, if what is said holds good of people 
in general, as: 

vivendum est, we or you must lice, 
moriendum est, we or you must die, 
obtemperandum est leglbus, we must obey the laics, 
utendum est occasione, we must embrace an opportunity. 

The impersonal form may also be used with Transitive Terbs 
when they are not followed by their object. The personify/ whom, 
is added in the Dative (see 72.), thus: 

milii scribendum est, I must or should write 
tit>i scribendum est, thou must or shouldst write 
ei scribendum est, he must or should write 
nobis scribendum est, we must or should write 
vobis scribendum est, you must or should write 
eis scribendum est, they must or should write. 

2. Instead of the Dative, the Ablative with a, &b is employed 
when the Verb itself governs the Dative or for the sake of emphasis, 
thus: 

civTbus a vobis consulendum est, the interest of the citizens must be consulted 
by you. 

3. The Verbs utor, fr&or, fungor, potior, vescor, are 

treated like Verbs governing the Accusative, and admit of the Gerund- 
ive construction, but only in the Oblique Cases,, as: 

divitlae expetuntur ad perfruendas voluptates, riches are sought for the enjoy- 

ment of pleasure, 
spes potiundorum castrorum, the hope of getting possession of the camp. 

But with est, erat, &c. the Impersonal form is regularly em- 
ployed, as: 

buo cuique judicYo utendum est, every one must be guided by his own judg- 
ment. 



=* 168 =» 

316. The Gerundive is used as Predicate Accusative 

after Verbs signifying to give, deliver, agree for, have, 
receive, undertake, to point out what is to be done with 

the Object of such Verbs, as: 

illud signum ita collocandum consules locavSrunt, the consuls con- 
tracted to have that statue so placed, 

redemptor qui columnam illam conduxerat faciendam, the con- 
tractor who had undertaken to make that column, 

Conon muros dirutos a Lysandro reficiendos curavit, Conon had, 
the walls rebuilt which had been destroyed by Lysander. 

1. The commonest of these Yerbs are: curare, to take care, have; 
dare, to give; tradere, to deliver; mandare, to order; mittere, to 
send; proponere, to propose, intend; imponere, to assign; relin- 
quere, to leave; accipere, to receive; suscipere, to undertake; con- 
cedere, permittere, to permit; locare, to let, lease; conducere, to 
contract for. Of course the Passive construction has the Nominative 
Predicate, as: 

films Philippi ad patrem reducendus legatis datus est, the son of 
Philip was given to the envoys to be taken back to his father. 

2. With these Yerbs, purpose may also be expressed by the 
Accusative of the Gerund with ad, as: 

ad imitandura mihi proposttum est exemplar illud, that model has been set be- 
fore me for imitation. 

Supine. 

317. The Supine is a Verbal Noun of the Fourth De- 
clension, having only the Accusative and Ablative Sin- 
gular, as: amatum, amatu, to love. The former Supine 
in um is used after Verbs of motion, as: ire, venire, 
proficisci, mittere allquem, etc., to express the purpose 
of the motion, as : cubitum ire, to go to bed. It has 
Active meaning and governs the Case of its Verb, as : 

Divitiacus Romam venit auxilium postulatum, Divitiacus came to 

Borne to ask aid, 
quid est? imusne sessum? etsi monitum venlmus te, non flagita- 

turn, how now, shall ive be seated? though we have come to rd- 

mindy not to entreat you. 



— 169 — 

1. Mark the phrases: 

filiam nuptum coilocare, dare, to give one's daughter in marriage 

allquem sessum recipSre, to offer a seat to some one. 

The Supine in urn is used especially after ire, as: perdicum ire, to 

go to ruin) rap turn ire, to go to take away by force] ultum ire, to go 

to avenge; and the Passive Infinitive iri and the Supine form the Future 

Infinitive Passive, as: 

fuere cives qui rempubllcam perdltum irent, there were citizens who went about 

to ruin the republic, 
si Pompejus scisset se trucidatum iri, if Pompey had known that he was going 
to be murdered. 

2. The Former Supine, as an expression of purpose, is not very 
common, its place being supplied in various ways. Thus the sen- 
tence: 

The Carthaginians sent ambassadors to sue for peace, 
may be rendered: 

Supine. Carthaginienses legatos miserunt pacem petltxim. 

Gerundive with r C. legatos miserunt acL pacem petendam. 

^d, causa I C. legatos miserunt pacis petendae c ansa, 
"tit w. Subjunct. C. legatos miserunt, "ixt pacem peterent. 
qxix w. Subjunct C. legatos miserunt, qxii pacem peterent. 
Pres. Part. C. legatos miserunt pacem petentes (more rarely: 

petitfLros). 

318. The latter Supine in u is used with the Inde- 
clinables fas, nelas, rarely with opus, and: with a few 
Adjectives denoting ease or difficulty, pleasure or dis- 
pleasure, right or wrong, as : honestus, turpis, jueun- 
dus, facilis, difficTlis, incredibilis, mirabilis, optl- 
mus, utilis. The use of the latter Supine is confined 
to ^ few Verbs: dictu, to tell; factu, to do; audltu, to 
hear; visu, to see; cognitu, to know; memoratu, to re- 
late; inventu, to find out. The Supine in u never 
takes an Object, as: 

nefas est dictu misgram fuisse talem senectutem, it is wrong to 

say that such an old age was unhappy, 
Orgetorix perfacile factu esse illis probat conata perficere, Orge- 

torix proved to them that to accomplish the undertaking was 

very easy (to do). 



— 170 — 

1. The Supine in u is very rare and its place is supplied by other 
constructions. With facilis, difficilis, jucundus, the construction of 
ad with the Gerund is more common, as: 

res facilis ad intellegendum, a thing easy to be understood, 
verba ad audiendum jucunda, words agreeable to hear. 

On the other hand, the Supine in u is regularly employed in the 
expressions: 
difficile dictu, difficile facju est, it is difficult to tell, it is difficult to do. 

Especially to be noted is the use of the Infinitive after difficile 
est factu, dependent upon facile, as: 

judicium horum hominum difficile factu est non probare, it would be hard work 
not to approve the judgment of these men, 

2. The sentence: The thing is easy to be understood^ maybe 
rendered: 

res est f acllia ad eognoscendum (cognttu), res facile cognoscltur, 
facile est rem cognoscere, rei cognitlo facilis est. 

Use of Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 

319. When two sentences are so related to each 
other as to form one thought, each, however, being 
in a measure independent of the other, they are con- 
nected by way of Co-ordination, as : 

coneidunt venti fugiuntque nubes, the winds subside and the clouds 
disperse. 

Accordingly, Co-ordinating Conjunctions are those 

that join sentences of equal order or rank. 

1. Many of these Conjunctions which are originally connectives 
of sentences only, have come to be connectives of words or phrases 
which are co-ordinate in a single sentence. 

320. I. The following are Copulative Conjunctions: 

et, -que, ac (atque), and 

nee (neque), and not 

etiam, quoque, also. 
1. The Conjunction -que must be appended to theirs* word of the 
sentence or phrase which is co-ordinate; only in the case of a mono- 
syllabic Preposition with a noun, it may be appended to the noun, as: in 
templisque, ad ceterosque (never adque, aque). — &c does not stand 
before a vowel or h; atque, either before vowels or consonants. 



— 171 ~ 

2. et is simply and, the most common and general copulative 
and connects independent words and clauses without any additional 
meaning; -que combines things that belong closely to one another, 
as the parts of a whole, or the whole with its parts, as: Alexandria 
Aegyptusque; ac (atque) adds a more important to a less impor- 
tant member. Accordingly: 

dies et noctes means days and nights (simply), 
dies noctesque 4< days and nights (as a whole), 
dies atque noctes " days and also nights; 

and -que is used in such phrases, as: 

terra manque, ferro ignique, se snaque, 

domi militiaeque, divlna humanaque, 

ultro citroque, senatus populusque Romanus. 

neque, and not, rarely connects Adjectives or Adverbs, and Substan- 
tives only when non precedes, as: 

multi neque indocti homines (better et non), 
non cives neque socii. 

Sentences connected by neque must have at least different 
Predicates: the Subject may remain the same, as: 
Caesar substitit neque hostes laces sivit, Caesar halted and did not attack the 
enemy. 

In Antitheses, and not, is non, as: 

haec morum vitia sunt, non senectiitis, these are defects of character, and not of 
old age. 

3. etiam (lit. and farther) adds a new circumstance, either more 
important or less important, and is properly used to connect sen- 
tences, where also atque etiam may be used. When referring to 
a single word, etiam usually precedes that word and corresponds 
to the English even, as: 

nobis res familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest, we lack means even for neces- 
saries of life. 

On the other hand, quoque, and so, also, which refers only to a 
single word and follows that word, implies a sameness in the 
whole, as: 

otia corpus alunt, animus quoque pascltur illis, rest strengthens the body, the 
mind, too, is thus supported. 

4 The copulative conjunction is often omitted (Asyndeton): 
a. When two single words as comprehending the whole idea 
are opposed to each other, thus: 
velim nolim, whether I would or not, 
maxima minima, the greatest as well as the least, 
prima postrema, from the first to the last. 



— 172 — 

b. Between the names of two colleagues when the personal 
names (praenomina) are added, as: 

Cn. Porapejo, M. Crasso consullbus, in the consulship of Cn. Pompejus and M. 
Crassus. 

c. When two actions are immediately connected, as: 

adsunt, queruntur SicQli universi, here are alt the Sicilians together complaining. 

d. Before alii, cet&ri, multi, at the end of an enumer- 
ation, as: 

honores, divitlae, cetera, honors, riches and the rest 

5. The copulative et is used after multus, much, many, fol- 
lowed by another Adjective where in English and is usually omit- 
ted, as: 

multae et magnae arbores, many large trees, 
multa et; praeclara facinSra, many renowned deeds. 

6. Three Subjects or Objects standing in the same relations 
either take et throughout: Polysyndeton, i. e. joined in various 

ways, 

or omit it throughout: Asyndeton, i. e. unconnected, 

or take -que only after the last member, thus: 

(et) summa fide et constantla et justitla ) .,,,, . , - ... . 

y ' „. t . . ,. 1W ' I with the greatest faith, constancy 

summa fide constantia j ustitia v d t 

summa fide constantla justitiaque 1 ^ 

Tour words or terms in the same construction should be joined in 
'pairs, as: 

patres composlto vultu lacrlmas gaudlum, querellas adulationem miscebant, the 
fathers with a composed countenance mingled tears and joy, complaints and 
flattering words. 

The omission of the copulative is common with three Verbs, when 
they denote a Whole, or in order to mark the rapid sucession of 
the actions, as: 

poetae audiuntur, leguntur, ediscuntur et inhaerescunt penltus in mentlbus, 
poets are read, heard, learned by heart and thus firmly impressed upon our 
mind, 

veni, vidi, vici, I came, I saw, I overcame. 

7. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness, such as: 
simllis, dissimilis, par, dispar, contrarlus, alius, 

similiter, parlter, aeque, perinde, proinde, 
allter, contra, secus, 

take ac or atque in the sense of as or than, thus: 
virtus eSdem est in homlne ac deo, virtue is the same in man as in god, 
potest allud mihi ac tibi videri, I may have another view than you have* 



— 173 — 

After contra and sectis, also quam is used, and, in later prose, 
aeque is treated in the same manner. When a negative particle is 
joined with alius, aliter, or when the clause with alius has a 
negative meaning, nisi or quam is used, as: 

philosophla quid est alTud (= nihil est aliud) nisi donum deorum? philosophy 

what else is it but the gift of the gods ? 
virtus nihil aliud est quam natura in se perf ecta, virtue is nothing else but nature 

perfect in herself. 

Frequently alius, instead of taking ac, is repeated, as: 
aliud agltur, aliud simulatur, one thing is done, another pretended. 
alius, with another Case of the same word or with the Adverbs 
aliter, alias, alio, alibi, aliunde, is used of reciprocal or con- 
trasied actions to express shortly a double statement, as: 
alius aliud cupit, one covets one thing, another another, 

aliud alii natura iter ostendit, nature shows one path to one man, another path 
to another man. 

8. After Idem either ac or the Relative Pronoun is used, to ex- 
press the same as, thus: 

servi iisdem morlbus erant quibus domtnus, the servants had the same character 

as the master, 
est animus erga te idem ac fuit, my feelings toward you are the same as they 

were. 

9. After talis, such; tanttis, so great; tot, totidem, so 
many; totiens, so often; tarn, tantopere, as much, the cor- 
responding as is expressed by the Correlatives: quails, quantus, 
quot, quotiens, quam, quantdpere, 

qualem inveni, talem rellqui, such as I found him I left him, 

nihil tarn populare quam bonitas, nothing is so winning as kindness. 

10. atque etiam joins to a preceding word or sentence an- 
other of greater importance, = and even; atque adeo, at the 
same time corrects the former statement, = or rather; ac non 
sometimes with potiiis connects a negative clause which explains 
or corrects what precedes = and not rather. 

321. In the second member of a compound sen- 
tence, and not is expressed by neque instead of et 
non. Other expressions like it are: 

and no one neque quisquam for et nemo nor any one 

and no neque ullus " et nullus nor any 

and nothing neque quidquam u et nihil nor any thing 

and never neque unquam M et numquam nor ever 



— 174 — 

Instead of et with the Negatives nemo, &c, neque 
is used with the corresponding affirmative words. — 
et non, and not, is used when the negation is confined 
to a single word, as: 
horae qui clem cedunt et dies et menses, et anni ; nee praeteritum 
tempus umquam revertitur, hours indeed pass, and days and 
months and years, and time once gone does not ever return, 
et militavi non sine gloria, and I have been a soldier not without 
glory., 

1. At the beginning of a sentence neque is used for non with 
the conjunctions: enim, vero, tamen, Igltur, thus: 

neque enim, for not neque vero (not: neque autem), out not 

neque tamen, yet not neque igitur, thwefore not. 

But when the negative belongs to a single word or when re- 
peated in several clauses, non must be used. 

2. et is sometimes used for etiam, especially with Pronouns, as: 
et ego, et hoc, et illud, thus: 

audiatur et altera pars, let also the other side be heard. 
ne. .quidem is nor. .either or emphatically not. .even; ne" pre- 
cedes, and quidem follows the emphatic word; and not even is ac 
ne. .quidem or et ne quidem (not: nee quidem). 

322. The following are Disjunctive Conjunctions: 
aut, vel, -ve, sive (seu), or. 

aut denotes absolute exclusion or substitution; vel 

(lit. you may choose) gives a choice, often with etiam, 

even; potms, rather, to indicate a preference for the 

latter, thus: 

terra in universum aut silvis horrida aut paludibus foeda, the land 
as a whole, is either rough with forests or foul with swamps, 

hoc tu mihi vel vi vel clam vel precario fac tradas, mea nihil inter- 
est, take care to procure it forme, either by force, or by stealth, 
or by entreaty, it matters not to me how, 

hie populus indomitus vel potms immanis, this untamable or 
rather savage people. 

-ve, or, which is always affixed to another word is 

only a weaker form of vel; it leaves the choice between 

two or more things, but is only used to connect words. 



— 175 — 

sive (seu), or (lit. if you choose) indicates merely an 

alternative of words, as : 
cur timeam dubitemve locum defendere? why should I fear or 

hesitate to maintain my position? 
discessus vel potius turpissima fuga, the decampment or rather 

the most shameful flight, 
urbem matri seu novercae reliquit, he left the city to his mother 

or to his step-mother. 

1. sive commonly retains the meaning of si, and is then the 
same as vel si The single vel is commonly used to correct a pre- 
ceding statement, and aut connects two alternative sentences so 
that one excludes the other, as: 

Epicurus homo minime malus vel potius vir optimus, Epicurus, a person by 

no means bad, or rather a man of excellent character, 
omnia bene sunt oratori dicenda. aut eloquentiae nomen relinquendum est, an 

orator should say every thing well, or else he must give up the name of 

eloquence. 

323. The Conjunctions aut and -yg serve to con- 
tinue the negation in negative sentences where in 

English nor is used, as: 
numquam peccasti aut contra leges fecisti, you never sinned nor 
did you act against the laws. 

They are used also in negative questions, as: 

quid est majus aut difficilius quam severitatem cum misericordla 
conjungere ? what is greater and more difficult than to unite 
severity and compassion ? 

1. It is only when both ideas are to be taken conjointly as a 
single one that a copulative is used instead of aut and ve. Thus 
we may say: 

num leges nostras moresve novit ? does he know our laws and customs ? 
or uniting the two ideas into one: 
num leges nostras moresque novit? does he know our public affairs ? 
For the use of aut in alternative questions see 276. 2. 

2. When used adverbially, vel means even, indeed, surely, cer- 
tainly, and with Superlatives the very, the utmost, denoting the 
highest possible degree, as: 

puen ludorum causa vel famem et sitim perfe*runt, boys for the sake of their 

plays endure even hunger and thirst, 
Cicero veloptxmus Komanorum orator, Cicero, decidedly the best of the Bom an 

orators. 



— 176 — 

324. The following are Adversative Conjunctions: 

sed, autem, verum, vero, &t, but, 
atqui, but for all that, 
tamen, nevertheless, 
ceterura, for the rest 

1. The weakest of them all in adversative power is autem; it 
stands after one or more words of its clause, and introduces a thought 
which is different from the preceding. It serves as a particle of 
transition and explanation and is only used to connect sen- 
tences, as: 

Gyges a nullo videbatur, ipse autem omnia videbat, Gyges was seen by no one; 
but, on the other hand, he himself saw all things. 

autem is often used in the Minor Premise of a Syllogism, thus: 

quod est bonum, onme laudabile est; quod autem laudabile est, omne est ho- 
nestum; bonum igitur quod est, honestum est, every thing that is good is 
praiseworthy; but every thing that is praiseworthy is virtuous; therefore, 
what is good is virtuous. 

2. sed is emphatic; after affirmative sentences it marks opposi- 
tion in passing from one topic to the other answering to the English 
but yet; after negative sentences it denotes contradiction answering 
to but on the contrary; 

homo proponit, sed Deus disponit, man proposeth, but God disposeth, 
non opus est verbis, sed fustibus, there is no need of words, but of k?iocks, 
otii fructus est non contentio animi sed relaxatio, the result of leisure is not 
a straining but a relaxation of the mind. 

At the beginning of a sentence sed denotes transition to a new 
thought or resumption of an old one, as: 
sed tempus jam est bine ablre, but it is now time to departfrom here, 
sed baec alia quaestio est, nos ad propositum revertamur, but this is another 
question, we must return to our subject 

3. St introduces a lively objection (= but for all that, still) and 
is commonly used alter affirmative sentences, as: 

fecit idem Themistocles — : at idem Pericles non fecit, Themistocles did the 
same, but for all that Pericles did not do the same. 

At the beginning of a sentence at denotes an objection raised by 
the author himself, or a striking refutation, thus: 

"at multis malis affectus?" Quis negat? but he has suffered much* Who de- 
nies it ? 

quid porro quaerendum est ? Factumne sit ? — At constat. A quo ? At patet. 
What is there further to be inquired into ? Whether it was done ? — But it is a 
fact. By whom ? But it is evident. 



— 177 — 

Sometimes &t is used in a conditional clause with the force of 
at certe, &t t&men, but at least, as: 
oro te lit si non propinquitatis, at aetatis meae rationem habeas, I beseech you to 
take some regard if not for my relationship, but at least for my age. 

4 vero, of truth, but assuredly, stands second in its clause and 
forms the transition to something more important, as: 
philosophia vero, quid aliud est nisi donum deorum ? but what else is philosophy 

than the gift of the gods ? 
cum vero magistris traditi sumus, varus imbuTmur erroribus, but when we are 

handed over to teachws, we are filled with various errors, 
illud vero plane ferendum non est, but that (which lam about to mention) is not 

at all to be suffered. 

5. verfitm, lit. it is true, always takes the first place in the sen- 
tence, as: 

verum praetenta omittamus, but let us lay aside past things, 
enimvero, truly, in truth, does not denote opposition; but the 
compound verum enimvero denotes the most emphatic opposition 
= but indeed. 

6. atqui, but for all that, nevertheless, is always put in the first 
place, and admits what precedes, but opposes something else to it 
to prove the contrary, as: 

O rem difficilem, inquis, et inexplicabilem. Atqui explicanda est, a hard case 
you say, and an inexplicable one. And nevertheless, it ought to be explained. 

In the minor premise of a syllogism atqui, but now, is often 
used instead of autem (see 324. 1.). 

7. ts&men, yet, nevertheless, is the usual correlative of a con- 
cessive sentence ; generally it comes first unless a particular word 
is to be made emphatic, as: 

naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret, you may drive out nature with a 
pitchfork, for all that she will ever be returning. 

At the beginning of a sentence, tamen means and yet, notwith- 
standing; it is often combined with at or sed (at tamen, sed 
tamen) but never with autem (vero), thus: 
Domitius nulla quidem arte sed Latlne tamen dicebat, Domitius spoke with no 
art, it is true, but for all that in good Latin. 

325. The Causal Conjunctions are: 

n&m, enim, namque, Stenim, for. 
1. n&m is always put at the beginning, enim always follows 
the first word of the sentence; namquS and etenim are commonly 
put in the^r^ place, ndm and more rarely enim, are also used 
in the sense of namely or to wit, to give m esplayuitiQU of something 
going before, 



V — 178 — 

celebratote illos dies, nam multi saepe honores diis immortallbus justi habiti sunt, 
sed prof ecto justiores numquam, you shall solemnize those days, for many just 
honors have been paid to the immortal gods, but never indeed any more just, 

pisces ova relinquunt, facile enim ilia aqua sustinentur )t /is7i leave their eggs, for 
they are easily kept alive by the water, 

etenim quattuor reperio causas cur senectus misera videatur, for I find there 
are four reasons why old age seems wretched. 

2. nimirum, scilicet, videlicet also answer to the English 
namely or to wit: in the sense of undoubtedly, surely; nempe, 
surely, often assumes a sarcastic meaning. 

326. The Illative Conjunctions are: 

itaque, Igitiir, ergo, therefore, 
ideo, idcirco, on that account, 
proinde, accordingly. 

1. itaque, and for that reason, is put at the beginning of sentences 
and is used of facts; ergo, therefore, denotes necessary consequence, 
and in its logical sense, shows what follows from what has been stated; 
it is put at the beginning of the sentence or after an emphatic 
word ; lgitur, therefore, is weaker than ergo, and is used in passing 
from one established point to another, or to resume an argument after 
an interruption; it follows one or more words in its clause, thus: 

nemo ausus est liber Phocionem sepellre; itaque a servis sepultus est, no free 

man dared to bury Phocion, and so he was buried by slaves, 
mihi non satisfacit; sed quot homines, tot sententiae; falli igitur possumus, it 

does not satisfy me; but many men, many minds; I may, therefore, be 

mistaken, 
negat haec filiam me esse suam; non ergo haec mater mea est, she says that 

I am not her daughter, therefore she is not my mother. 

2. idcirco, ideo, propterea, for that reason, are used chiefly 
to point out a special cause, which is often introduced by another 
causal conjunction, as: 

sed quia natiira mutari non potest, idcirco verae amicitiae sempiternae sunt, but 
since .nature cannot be changed, therefore real friendships are everlasting. 

3. proinde, accordingly, is only employed in exhortations, as: 
proinde fac magno ammo sis, accordingly be of good cheer! 

Corresponsive Conjunctions. 

327. Many Copulative and Disjunctive Conjunctions 
are used in pairs so that one refers or answers to the 
other. They are called Corresponsive Conjunctions, and 
the sentences introduced by them Disjunctive Sentences, 



— 179 — 

I. The following are Copulative Correspondents: 

Affirmative: et . . et, both . . and 

cum. .turn, both.. and especially 

qua . . qua, both ..and (rarely) 

non solum . . sed etiam 1 M . _ ' , 

non mod6. . verttm etiSm f not on ^ • but also 
Negative : neque . . neque } 

nee . . nee >- neither . . nor 

neque.. nee ) 
Affirmative & et . . neque, on the one hand . . and on the other hand not 
Negative: neque. .et, on the one hand not. .and on the other. 

1. qua.. qua connects only single words; et .. neque and 
neque\ .et only sentences. 

2. non mod5 (non solum) may take another Negative: non 
m6dd non. .sed etiam (sed ne. .quidem). But when the two 
negative clauses have a Yerb in common, the latter non is generally 
omitted, the negative of the second clause (ne. .quidem, not even) 
referring also to the first. 

II. The following are Disjunctive Correspondents: 

aut..aut, either.. or 

vel . . vel, either . . or ( wh ether . . or) 

sive* . . sive, ivhether . . or 

1. aut..aut, connects two alternatives which are essentially 
different so that one excludes the other; vel. .vel denotes that the 
opposition is immaterial in respect to the result; sive. .sive is the 
same as vel si.. vel si, and denotes indifference, like vel.. vel. 
If nouns are opposed to each other by sive. .siv$, an uncertainty 
is expressed as to how a thing is to be called, thus: 
aut die, aut accTpe calcem, speak err be licked, 

Miltiades dixit ponte rescisso regem vel hostmm ferro, vel inopia paucis diebus 
interitumm esse, Miltiades said that if the bridge were cut, the king toould 
perish in a few days whether by the sword of the enemy, or for want of pro- 
visions, 
sive tu medicum adhibueris, sive non adhibue'ris, non convalesces, whether 

you employ a physician or do not employ one, you will not get well, 
Cretum leges, quas sive Jupiter sive Minos sanxit, the laws of the Cretans which 
Jupiter or Minos established (I do not know whether I am to say Jupiter or 
Minos), 



— 180 — 



POETICAL FORMS. 

Prosody. 

328. Prosody means Accent, and since Latin accent is regu- 
lated by quantity, Prosody, in the classic sense, has reference to the 
length of syllables, measured by the length of time taken up in pro- 
nouncing them. By modern Grammarians, Prosody is used in a 
wider sense to include both quantity and versification. 

Quantity. 

329. As a general rule, each simple vowel is either long (-), or 
short (vj), and each syllable is considered as either long or short, ac- 
cording as it contains either a long or a short vowel — (Longs and 
Shorts by Nature). A long syllable is generally reckoned in length 
equal to two short ones. 

330. All diphthongs, and vowels formed by contraction, are long : 
aurum, cogo(co-ago), malo (magis volo), nil (nihil), junior (juvenlor). 

Likewise e and i when corresponding to Greek en 

Aeneas, Alexandria, Thalia, Anon. 

331. A vowel before another vowel is short, no account being 
taken of h, as: plus, deus, traho. Even a vowel naturally long or 
a diphthong becomes short before another vowel, as: deorsum, 
praeopto. 

Exceptions: 

e in ei of the Fifth Declension is long when a vowel precedes, as: 
diei; butfidei. 

i in the Genitive-form Tus is long; it is, however, sometimes made 
short in verse, but never in alius (for alilus). 

In fio, i is long, except when followed by er, as: tio, fiSbam; 
but fieri. 

In the Vocative of proper names in ~§jfis ? -Cyus, a and e are 

long; Gai, Pompei, 



— 181 — 



In words from the Greek, vowels are often long before a vowel, 
because long in the original, as: aer, museum, eos, Agesilaus, 
Amphlon. 

332. A syllable with a short vowel is considered as long when 
the short vowel is followed by two or more consonants or a double 
consonant either in the same or in the following syllable, as: est, 
essem, restare, dux. The consonants may be divided between two 
words, as sub siderS. A short syllable made long by this rule is said 
to be long by Position. 

333. But if the syllable ends in a short vowel, and the next 
syllable in the same word begins with a mute (see 6.) followed by r 
or 1, the syllable before the two consonants is common (anceps) — 
that is, it may be either long or short (^) in verse, as in tenSbrae; 
in prose it is invariably short. 

334. Every vowel sound followed by j is long; only compounds 
of jugum, yoke, retain the short vowel before j, as: bijiigus, 
two-horse. . 

335. Forms from the same stem, whether Inflections, Deriva- 
tives, or Compounds retain the original quantity of the radical 
syllable, even when the vowel is changed, as: 

Smor, amicus, inlmicus, inimicitia 
s&pio, s&por, sapiens, insipiens. 



tions: pax, pacis 


from 


paciscor 


fides 


rex, regis 


(i 


rego 


fidelis 


sedes 


a 


sedeo 


perfldus 


v5x, voois 


a 


voco 


perfidia 


dux, dUcis 


a 


dQco 


but: 


ndta \ 






confido 


nfltio >- 


it 


notus 


diffido 


notare ; 






lidus 


tidium 


a 


odi 


infidus 
fiducia 



- from fido 



Middle Syllables. 

336. Perfects and Supines of two syllables have the first syllable 
long even when that of the present is short, as: venl, vidl, vicl. 
Exceptions: 7 Perfects: bibi, dedi, fidi 

steti, stiti, tuli, scidi. 
10 Supines: datum, ratum, satum 
cltum, Itum, statum 
Ktum, quitum, sltum, rtitum, 



— 182 — 

337. Reduplicated Perfects shorten both syllables, but the second 
may be made long by position, as: tango, tetlgi -— f alio, fefelli. The 
only exception is caedo, cecidi in distinction from cado, cecidi. 

338. Perfects in til have their stem vowel short, as: 

veto-vgtui; placeo-pl&cui; cdlo-colui. 

Exceptions: debeo, = dehit>gO; floreo fromflos; pareo, andpono 
but posui. 

339b Supines in itfim have i long when from Perfects in IvI 
(ii), as: cupitum, petilum, auditum. recenseo has recensitum from 
recensiii in the Perfect. 

340. Verbs in 10 (I5r) of the Third Conjugation have a short 
stem vowel: f&clo, ctipio, jacio, patior, &c. &c. 

341. The verb endings imus, itis have only in the Present of 
the Fourth Conjugation a long penult; also in simus, sitis; posslmus, 
possitis; velimus, velitis; nolJmus, nolitis; malimus, malitis: faxl- 
mus, faxitis. 

342. In rimGs and ritis of the Future Perfect, and Perfect Sub- 
junctive,^ i of the penult is common, i. e., it may be long in verse, 
amaverimus, amaveritis. 

343 9 The terminations abus, obiis, SbQs in plural cases, have 
a long penult, Ibus and ubus a short one. 

filiabus, duobus, diebus — ducibus, acubus. 

344. Derivative Adjectives in alls, arts, anus, Ivfls, osiis 

have the penult long: naturalis, vulgaris, humanus, natlvus, odi- 
osus; 

those in icus and ldus have it short: bellicus, cupldus. 
Exceptions: amicus, anticus, apricus, posticus, pudicus. 

345. Verbal Adjectives in ilio have the penult short, as docilis, 
facihs. But Derivatives from nouns have it long, as hostilis, puerllis. 

Exceptions: humilis from humus; parilis from par. 

346. Adjectives in InQs have the penult long, as: 

divinus, genuinus, peregrinus, vicinus. 

But if such Adjectives denote time or material, the penult is 
short, as: adamantinus, crastinus, diutinus. 

Exceptions; matutinus, vespertinus, repentinus, 



— 183 — 

Final Syllables. 
347. In words of more than one syllable, final a, e, and y are 
short, i, o, and u are long: 

1. a is short: terr&, tect&, capita. 
Exceptions: 

Ablative of the First Declension: terra. 

Vocative of Greek woi*ds in as: Aenea. 

Imperative of First Conjugation: araa. 

Most uninfected words as triginta, antea, contra; but: Ita, quia. 

2. e is short: rete, ipse, antS. 

Exceptions: 

Ablative of Fifth Declension, die. 

Imperative of Second Conjugation, mone. 

Most Adverbs from Adjectives of the Second Declension, as: recte, 
docte. But notice: bene, male, saepe, temere, supern§, in- 
fern§. impune and necesse are from old forms impunis and 
necessis. 

Greek words in e (?) : Niobe, Tempe. 

3. i is long: domini, viginti, amarL 
Exceptions: 

nisi, quasi. 

Dative and Vocative of Greek words, DaphnidI, Alex! 

i is common in: mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi. 

Notice the Compounds: of ubi: ubinam, ubivis, ubique — of ibi: 
alibi, ibidem — of ut, uti: utinam, utlque. 

4. o is long: bono, amato. 
Exceptions: 

Nouns of the Third Declension and verbal forms, as: led, v£t5. 

ggo, duo, modo, dummodo, tantummodo, quando, quanddquidem. 

5. u is always long: cornu, fructu, audltu. 

348. All Final Syllables that end in a single consonant other 
than s are short: &d, amat, consul, caput. 
Exceptions: 
Compounds of par, dispar, impar.— The Adverbs illlc, iliac, istuc. 

Many Greek noxxns, as: aer, aether, crater; also alec, lien. 



— 184 — 

349. Final as, es, os are long; final is, us, ys are short. 

1. as is long: Messi&s, silvas, vocas. 
Exceptions: 

Greek noans in as, aclis, as Areas, Arc&dis. 
Greek accusative plur. : heroas, Arcadas. 
anas, anatis. 

2. es is long: leges, dies, doces. 
Exceptions: 

Norn. Sing. Third Declension, when the Genitive has Stls, ltls, 
Idis with short penult, as miles, seges, obses; but abies, aries, 
paries. 

Compounds of es, be; as: ades 

penes (Preposition). 

Greek words in es (eg) Thraces, Arcades. 

3. os is long: deos, nepos. 

Exceptions: compos, impos — Greek words in os: Delos. 

4. is is short: canis, legis. 
Exceptions: 

Plural Oasea of all Declensions: mensis, servis, nobis, omnis, 
partis (Accus. pi.). 

The Nominative of such substantives as have in the Genitive itis, 
inis, entis, as Salamis, Samnis, Simois, -entis. 

Second Pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. Active, Fourth Conjugation audis; 
likewise velis, nolis, malis, possis and the Compounds of sis. 

pulvis and sanguis. 

5. us is short: gladitis, vulnfis, fructiis, amamus. 
Exceptions: 

Gen. Sing. Norn, and Aco. Plur. Fourth Declension, fructiis. 

Nominative of the Third Declension when the Genitive has a long 

u: virtus, palus, tellus. 
Greek words with u long (ov) : tripus. 

6. ys (in words of Greek origin) is short: chlamys, Halys. 

Monosyllables. 

350. All words of one syllable that end in a vowel, are long: 
a, da, me, de, hi, pro, tu. 

The attached particles -que, -ve, -ng, -ce } -te ? -pt§ are short, 
Qa thQ Pretix rg see below $$&, 



— 135 — 

351. Substantives and Adjectives of one syllable are long, when 
they end in a consonant even if the stem-syllable be short, as: os, 
mos, ver, sol, fur, plus; pes (pedis), bos (bovis), par (parls). 

Exceptions: vii\ lac, os (ossis), mel 
ccr, vas (vadis), fel. 
hie, this one, is sometimes short. 

352. All other words of one syllable that end in a consonant, 
are short: per, ter, cis, in, fac. 

Exceptions: en, non, quin — eras, cur, sin 
the Adverbs, hie, hue, hac, sic. 
die and due have the quantity of their verbs ; es, be, is short. 

Quantity in Compounds. 

353. Compounds generally retain the quantity of their compo- 
nent parts, as: diico, deduco, conduco; eo, abeo, obeo, In£o; dlco, 
contradico. 

354. pro is short in Greek words, as propheta; but long in 
Latin (880) though there are many exceptions, especially before f ; 
as: 

procella profestiis profundo 

profanus profiteor pronepos 

profari proficiscor propago 

profecto profugio prdtervus. 

355. Of the inseparable Prefixes, di, se, and ve are long, re 
is short: diduco, seduco, reduco. 

Exceptions: dirimo, disertiis 

religio, refert, reliquiae. 

356. In a few words, the quantity of the second part is 
changed. Such are: pejero, fromjuro; cognitus from notus. 

A remarkable change of quantity appears in the Compounds of 
-diciis, from dico: fatidicus, veridicus, maledicus, and in: innuba, 
pronuba, from ntibo. 

FIGURES or PROSODY. 
, 357. Elision is the omission or rather partial suppression 
of a final vowel or a final ni when the following word begins with a 
vowel or h, as: 

deserto in litore to be read desert* in litore 

certae occumbere morti " cert' occumbere morti 

supremum audire laborem " suprem* audire laborem. 



— 186 — 

358. The practice of elision is followed in poetry to avoid the 
hiatus (gaping), or the meeting of two vowels in separate syllables. 
But before and after Interjections the hiatus is allowed, as: 

fit | de" Lati|a, o | et de | gentS Sa|blna. 

359. Elided syllables should fee sounded but lightly. After a 
vowel or in final, the word est drops its e and is joined with the 
preceding syllable; as: 

multa est, read multa'st; multum est, read multum'st. 

360. Synaeresis, or the contraction of two vowels which are 
commonly pronounced separately, is regular in the following words: 
delnde, proinde, deest, deesse, antehac (= anthac) and in all forms 
of the verb anteire (= antlre). 

361. In like manner i and u before vowels are sometimes used 
as consonants with the sounds of y and w, as: fluvlorum say iiuvyo- 

rum; ablete = abyete; genua = genwa. 

362. One syllable is sometimes resolved into two by D i a e r e s i s, 
as: si iu. ae = sil vaej in su 6 tus = in sue tus. 

363. Syncope, a cutting short is the taking away of one or 
more letters from the middle of a word, as: saeclum for saeciilum; 
prendere for prehendere. 

364. Apocope, a cutting off, is the cutting off a letter or 
letters from the end of a word, as: viden, for videsne; ain lor aisne. 

365. Systole is the shortening of a long syllable, as: dede- 
runt for dederunt; Diastole the lengthening of a short syllable, 
as Priamldes for Priamides. 

366. Epenthesis is the insertion of a letter or a syllable 
in the middle of a word, as in the old forms siet, posslet for sit, 
posslt. 

367. T m e s i s is the separation of compound words into their 
parts, as: 

quam rem cunque /or, quamcunque rem 
per mihi gratum " mihi pergratum 
super unus eram " unus supereram. 



187 



\j \j 



_ \j 



Essentials of Versification. 

368. A verse, or line of poetry consists of a series of measures 
which are called Feet. 

The feet most frequently employed in Latin verse are the fol- 
lowing: 

Of two syllables. 
Pyrrhichius, Pyrrhic 
SpondSus, Spondee 
Iambus, Iambus 
(Trochaeus, Trochee ) 
iChoreus, Choree ) 

Of three syllables. 

Tribrachys, Tribrach 

Molossus, Molossus 

D a c t y 1 u s, Dactyl 

Anapaestus, Anapaest 

Amphibrachys, Amphibrach 
jAmphimacrus, Amphimacer } 
(Creticus, Gretic ) 

Bacchius, Bacchius 

Antibacchlus, Antibacchius 

Of Feet of four syllables the following are recognized: 

Proceleusmatlcus, Proceleusmatic cSlSriter 



KJ \J \J 



_ U U 



U 



pater 
virtus 

amans 

mater 



aderit 

mortales 

tempora 

sapiens 

adesse 

fScerant 

amor! 
peccata 



u u w u 

_ \J _ u 

U _ U _ 

u w 

\J w 

_ W KJ _ 

U U 



Dispondeus, Double Spondee IntSrrumptint 

Ditrochaeus, Double Trochee Infidells 

Dii ambus, Double Iambus renuntians 

Ionicus a minor e, Lesser Ionic metuentes 

Ionicus a ma j ore, Greater Ionic sententia 

Choriambus, Choriambus ciirriculo 

Antispastus, Antispast vereciindus. 



369. The Unit of measure is the short syllable (-); this is 
called a mora (time). A long syllable (-) is regularly equal to two 
morae. Accordingly in some verses, two short syllables may be used 
instead of a long, or a long instead of two short. 

370. Rhythm is the alternate elevation and depression of the 
voice at certain intervals of time. That part of the foot which is 
distinguished from the rest by a greater stress of voice is called 
Arsis, the other part Thesis. The stress of voice laid upon the 
arsis is called ictus (beat) j it is marked thus L 



— 188 -- 

371. The natural arsis is invariably on the long syllable or 
syllables of a foot; hence the Trochee and Dactyl have the ictus on 
the first syllable, the Iambus and Anapaest on the last, and the Cretic 
on the first and last. Only those feet which consist of both long and 
short syllables can have Arsis and Thesis, or Khythm, and are, there- 
fore, called Rhythmical Feet. Those consisting entirely of long or 
entirely of short syllables are only used as substitutes for rhythmical 
feet, and take the ictus of the foot for which they stand; hence, a 
Spondee when used for the Dactyl takes the ictus of the Dactyl, viz: 
on the first syllable; but wiien used for the Anapaest, it takes the 
Anapaestic rhythm, viz: the ictus on the last syllable. 

372. Rhythmical Feet are simple when they have only one 
arsis, and compound when they have more than one. If the arsis 
follows, the rhythm is called ascending, if it precedes, descending. 

373. A Verso is simple when it has one dominant measure 
which determines the rhythm of the whole verse; and compound, 
when different rhythms are combined in the same verse. The latter 
are only found in lyric poetry. 

374. A verse takes its name from the predominant measure as 
Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, Anapaestic, and from the number of 
feet that compose it, as, Hexameter, Pentameter, Tetra- 
meter, Trimeter, Dimeter, Monometer, 

375. In Dactyls and all compound rhythmical feet (see above 
372) a measure is a single foot; accordingly, a verse having five 
dactyls is called a pentameter; one having six dactyls, hexa- 
meter. 

376. Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic verses are measured 
not by single feeU but by pairs (d i p o d i a, dipody). In these rhythms 
a monometer contains two feet, a dimeter four, a trimeter 
six, a tetrameter eight. 

377. Averse is termed Acatalectic [not halting short) when 
its last foot is complete; a verse lacking a syllable at the end i3 
called Catalectic; it is' catalectic in syllabam, or in bisylla- 
b um, according to the number of syllables in the last foot. 

378. The last syllable of a verse may be long or short indif- 
ferently, and is, therefore, called syllaba anceps, because the time 
renting is made up by pause, 



— 189 — 

379. Most simple verses have certain breaks or pauses to rest 
the voice, and to prevent monotony. The break occasioned by the 
ending of a word in the middle of a foot, is called Caesura marked 
thus \. The verse 

Donee f eris f felix f multos f numerabis f amicos 
has five Caesurae. Again, the coincidence of the end of a word 
with the end of a foot is called Diaeresis marked thus ||. 

L U U | L KJKJ I L [j 1 \J KJ \ 1 u v[y 

Tempora || si fuerint |j nubila || solus eris. 
Every verse must have, about its middle, one principal caesura 
or d i a e r e s i s. 

380. Caesura is prevailing in Iambic and Dactylic verses, 
while the Anapaestic Dimeter, Trochaic Tetrameter, Dactylic Pen- 
tameter and the Choriambic verse have a fixed diaeresis in the 
middle of the verse. 

381. A caesura occurring after the arsis of a foot is called 
masculine; a caesura occurring after the thesis is called femi- 
nine: 

Una salus f victis f nullam f sperare f salutem. 
masc. masc. masc. fern. 

A caesura may be found in any foot of the verse except the first. 

382. In Iambic and Dactylic metres, the Caesurae are named 
according to the number of half-feet before them, thus: 

1. t r i t h e m i m e r e s (-§-) at the end of the 3d half foot 

2. penthemimeres (f) " 5th " 

3. hephthemi meres (|) " 7th " 

4. ennehemimeres (f) " 9th " 
They are all represented in the following hexameter: 

Ille latus f niveum f molli f fultus f hyacyntho. 

1 2 3 4 

383. To read verse rhythmically is an accomplishment which 
must be taught orally. Observing the rules of quantity and versifi- 
cation, take care not to dwell on the rhythm of the verse to the 
neglect of accent and connection of the words. The ordinary mode 
of scanning, as: 

L KJ Kj\ LUj\ L KJD \ L KJ KJ I I. W KJ | L _ 

Donece risfe lixmul tosnume rabisa micoa 
is worse than useless. 



~ 190 - 

DACTYLIC HEXAMETEE. 
384. The Dactylic Hexameter (Heroic Verse) or simply He- 
xameter consists regularly of six dactyls and is catalectic in bisylla- 
bum. Spondees may be substituted for the dactyl in the first four 
feet. Rarely a spondee is found in the fifth place, and when it is, the 
verse is called Spondaic. Accordingly its formula is: 

L ud I L u v | L o 



L \JO I L \~KJ I L KJU 



385. Of the great number of possible caesurae in the Hexa- 
meter the following are the most usual: 

The principal caesura is the Penthemimeral, or masculine caesura 
of the third foot, as: 

L \j kj | L \j \j\L \jd\ L kjd\ L kj v/|Z_ 
Arma virumque cano, f Trojae qui primus ab oris. 

The next is the feminine caesura of the third foot, also called 

fiera Tpirov rpoxalov, as: 

O passi graviora, f dabit deus his quoque finem. 

Then comes the Hephthemimeral in the arsis of the fourth foot, 
usually accompanied by the trithemimeres after the second arsis, as: 



L \j \j 



u 



Stat sonipes f ac frena ferox f spumantia mandit. 

386. The last word of a Hexameter should be either a dis- 
syllable, or a trisyllable; monosyllables at the end denote em- 
phasis, as: 

L \j u|_i Ou| L \J3\L CO | Lkj \j\ L — 

Parturiunt montes f nascetur ridiculus mus, 

387. In the first part of the verse variety in the use of dactyls 
and spondees has an agreeable effect. A light and rapid movement 
is produced by the frequent recurrence of dactyls, a slow and heavy 
one by that of spondees. The following examples have been chosen 
with especial reference to this point: 

L u u| Z u u I — u U I— u u I Z uu I Z \J 

Quadrupedante f putrem \ sonitu \ quatit ungula cainpum. 

lUD | 1 CO|Z UD\1 u3|Zuu|Z . 

(Cyclopes) Illi inter f sese f magna f vi brachia tollunt. 



— 191 

ELEGIAC PENTAMETER 
388. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two parts separated 
by Diaeresis. Each part consists of two dactyls and the arsis of a 
third; the first part admits spondees, the second does not: 



/ ... ,i ii / 



j> u \j 



| L w u|y 



Tempora si fuerint nubila solus eris. 
It derives its name from the number of dactyls. (2£ + 1\ = 5.) 

389. The Elegiac Pentameter is seldom, if ever, used except 
in the Elegiac Distich, which consists of the Hexameter followed by 
the Pentameter: 

L kj kj\L ud\L ud\ L \j \j\1 kj u| _ \d 
Donee eris felix, multos numerabis amicos; 

L \j \j\L \j \j\L || iuujlu \j\*± 
Tempora si fuerint nubila, solus eris. 

390. No monosyllables can stand at the end of either part of 
the Pentameter, except when preceded by another one, as: 

Magna tamen spes est in bonitate Dei. 

391. Neither syllaba anceps nor hiatus is allowed at 
the diaeresis. Almost every Pentameter ends in a dissyllable, 
and elision is avoided. 

IAMBIC TRIMETER 

392. The most common form of Iambic verse is the Senarian, 
or Iambic Trimeter; it is of frequent occurrence in lyric poetry, 
and is also the ordinary verse of dramatic dialogue. Since the final 
syllable must be anceps, the formula of the verse is as follows: 

ui. u_ | \j L yj —\ uZuy 

393. In the Iambic Trimeter a Spondee or its equivalent 
(Anapaest or Dactyl with Iambic ictus _Au) may be regularly sub- 
stituted in the odd places (1st, 3d, 5th foot), also a Tribrach {y \j <j) 
anywhere except in the last place. 

394. The principal caesura of the Iambic Trimeter is either the 
penthemimeral which falls on the middle of the 3d foot, or the 
hephihemimeral which falls on the middle of the fourth foot. 

COMPOUND VERSES. 

395. A verse is compound if different measures are combined 
in the same to produce a more artificial movement especially 



_ 192 — 

characteristic of lyric poetry. If a dactylic rhythm passes into 
trochees, the movements are intermediate between those of prose 
and poetry. Hence the name Logaoedic verse (from Aoyog, prose, 
and aoidrj, song). Sometimes an introductory foot of two syllables 
which is called Basis and commonly marked thus X, is put before 
the dactylic or logaoedic series. The Verses constructed upon the 
Logaoedic form (especially those used by Horace) are the following: 

1. Adonic (a dactyl; a trochee): 

L uu| L o 
Terruit urbem. 

2. Aristophanic (a dactyl; two trochees): 

L uu[ L u | 1 o 
Lydia die per omnes. 

3. Pherecratean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee): 

Z. X _ \Lkj kj\L O 

Yix durare carinae. 

4. Gly conic (basis; a dactyl; trochaic dipody catalectic): 

Z. X _ | L vj o| L u|y 
Eomae principis tirbium. 

5. Lesser Sapphic (double basis; a dactyl; two trochees): 

Integor vitae scelerisque purus. 

6. Greater Sapphic (double basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic; 

a dactyl; two trochees): 

/ x r* i / .. .. I / n / . . .,1 ' .,!/ 



— \j 



\1\\1 u u|l u|I P 



Te Deos oro, Sybarin cur properas amando. 

7. Lesser Asclepiadean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic; a 

dactyl; a trochaic dipody catalectic): 

Z. X _|1 kjv\1\\1vkj\1kj\v 

Maecenas atavis £dite regibtis. 

8. Greater Asclepiadean (basis; a dactyl; a trochee catalectic; a 

dactyl; a trochee catalectic; a dactyl; trochaic dipody ca- 
talectic): 

L X _ | L u uj L U lu \j\1 \L u m ( I u | y 

Nullam Vare sacra vite prius severis arborem. 

In the Or eater Sapphic and 6o£/i #ie Asclepiadeans, the dactyl 

with the catalectic trochee appears a simple Ohoriambus :_ u u_; 

hence these metres have obtained the general name of Choriambic* 



— 193 — 
9. Lesser Alcaic (two dactyls; two trochees): 



L yjKjll 



Virginibus puerisque canto. 

10. Greater Alcaic (anacrusis; double basis; a dactyl; trochaic 

dipody catalectic): 

o: Z. X w Z. X - || L v^^I o|y 

Justum £t tenacem propositi viriim. 
One or more syllables placed before the proper beginning of 
the measure are called an anacrusis; it is separated by a colons 

11. Archilochian (dactylic tetrameter; three trochees): 

1 yjKj\lyj kj\L 1 ud\L \jJ\\1u.\1 u|Zu 

Solvitur acris hiems f grata vice veris 6t Favoni. 

METKES of HOKACE. 

396. Verses are combined in two different ways. Either the 
same verse is repeated throughout; such are the Heroic Hexameter 
and the Iambic Trimeter, Or the same verse or different verses 
recurring in a certain order are combined in a Stanza or Strophe. 
A strophe of two lines is called a Distich; of three, a Tristich; of 
four a Tetrastich. 

397. Horace uses the Hexameter in his Epistles and Satires. 
The Odes include nineteen varieties of strophe, viz. : 

1. Alcaic Strophe, consisting of: 



iu:L X 



Two Greater Alcaics 1" ' -^ - v ~ ,! - v w '" W| ' J- 925. 10 
lo|J&l x _IIvO|Iv|fcj 

One Trochaic Dimeter with anacrusis o : Lu lo \ lu lu 

One Lesser Alcaic Lkj\j\1uv\Iu\1\J 925.* 

Justum et tenacem propositi virum 

Non civiwra ardor prava jubSntium 

Non vultus instantis tyranni 

Mente quatit solida neque Auster. 

2. Sapphic Strophe (minor), consisting of: 

( Z*u Z. X _ | L f u u | L yj | 1 o ) 
Three lesser Sapphics < Z. x ^ Z. x _ 1 1 f u O j L \j \ 1 a f 925. & 

( l x ^L x ^ \l\yjyj\lxj |Io ) 

One Adonic Lw \ lo 925. 1 

Jam satis terris nivis atque dirae 
Grandinis misit pater 6t rubente 
D6xtera sacras jaculatus arces 
Terruit urbem. 



— 194 — 

3. Sapphic Strophe (major), consisting of: 

One Aristophanic 1 u u j L u | L o 925. 2 

One Greater Sapphic I?i, Z. x _ \±yj\j\±\\lv\j\lv\lo 925.6 
Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich. 

Lydia die per omnes 
T6 deos oro, Sybarin cur properas amando. 

4. Asclepiadean Strophe I. (minor), consisting of: 

Lesser Asclepiadeans \ - - I L u u I L II - " V I - ^ I " ) noK „ 
t L _ |!c/u|i||!uu|JLw|y ) 

repeated in tetrastichs: . 

Maecenas, atavis 6dite regibiis 

O et praesidium £t dulce decus meiim. 

5. Asclepiadean Strophe II., consisting of: 

One Glyconio k . r \ L u \j \ L u { y 9g& 4 

One Lesser Asclepiadean A x _ |iuu|JL||iuo|iu|y »£& ? 
alternating, and so forming tetrastichs. 
Navis, quae tibi creditum 
D£bes Yergilium, finibus Atticis 
Keddas incolumem, precor, 
Et serves animae dimidiiim meae. 

6. Asclepiadean Strophe III., consisting of: 

rX 



C L~_|luu|I||I-uv|IuJV8) 
•< Z. x _|Iuw|i||luu|Iu|y > 



Three Lesser Asclepiadeans •< 1. _ \1\j\j\1\\±vkj\±v\v> 925. 1 

( Z. x «|Zuu|Z||Zuu|lu|y) 
One Glyconio Z. x _ | L u u 1 1 u | ^ &*m 

Quis desiderio sit pudor aut modus 
Tam cari capitis? — Praecipe lugubr^s 
Cantus, Melpomene, cui liquidain pat6r 
Yocem cum cythara dedit. 
7. Asclepiadean Strophe IV., consisting of: 

( ,X I ' \J ul ' II ' \J U 1 ' kj\ <-» ) 

Two Lesser Asclepiadeans < "V" ' in- 1 - 1 - t, 9251 

t i X - 1 1 v/u|l||lu uji Ufa 1 

One Phereoratean Z. x _ \ I u u 1 1 o 925.3 

One Glyconic 1 X _ j 1 w u j i u. 1 11 925. * 

O fons Bandusiae splendidior vitro 
Dulci digne mero, non sine floribiis 

Cras donaberis haedo 

Cui frons turgida cornibus* 



— 195 — 

8. Asclepiadean Strophe V., consisting of the 

I Z*L | L yj u|l|| L u \j\L\l u u]I yj\\J 
Greater Asclepiadean \ !*J\1 v v|l|JLvy.|l|l w|l w|y 

repeated in fours i /X_ |^ u v|I||i v ^|1||J!. ^ u|Z u|y 

\l x _llvvj.£|luv|JL|iyw|Zv|u 

Tii ne quaesieris, scire nefas qu6m mihi, qu£m tibi 
Finem di dederint, Leiiconoe, nee Babylonios i 

Tentaris numeros. At melius, quidquid erit pati! 
Seti plur^s hiem£s, seu tribuit Juppiter liltimam. 

9. Alcmanian Strophe, consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter L ud \ Lud | Ifcu | Iud | 1 v u |.Z o 
Dactylic Tetrameter Iud \ Iud \ ±v u | JLo 

Quo nos cunque fer£t melior fortiina parente, 
Ibimus 6 socii comitesque. 

10. Archilochian Strophe I., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter 1uj\1ud\1\ud\1uj\1\j\j\JLo 
Dactylic Trimeter Iuu|Zuu|y 

Diffug£re niv£s, redeiint jam gramina campis 
Arboribusque comae. 

11. Archilochian Strophe II., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter Lkjo\1ud\1^ud\1uj\1\j\j\1o 
Iambic Dimeter olu-|o!uy 

Dactylic Trimeter luu|luw|y 

Horrida tempestas caelum contraxit et imbres 

Nivesque deducunt Jovem: 

Nunc mare, mine siluae. 

The second and third lines of this strophe are often written as 
one verse. 

12. Archilochian Strophe III., consisting of: * 
Iambic Trimeter oIv_|o||Iv-|vjiwS£ * 
Dactylic Trimeter 1 u v \ L \j \j | ^ !: 
Iambic Dimeter o JL \s ■ . | o L w M 

Pecti, nihil me sicut antea juvat 
Scribere versiculos 
Am6re perculsum gravi. 

The second and third lines of this strophe are often written as 
one verse. 



— 196 — 

13. Archilochian Strophe IV., conpisting of: 

Archilochian £ ,qp j 1- to 1 1 f to J i v y J i */ 1 i O j I o 925. n 
Iambic Trimeter u L \J _ j u f 1 u 1 | ulo 

Solvitur acris hiems grata vice veris et Favoni 
Trabuntque siccas macbinae carinas. 

Two pairs are combined to form a tetrastich. 

14. Iambic Trimeter alone (see 922). j 

15. Iambic Strophe, consisting of: 

- Iambic Trimeter olu_|of!u.|uZuy 
Iambio Dimeter o!u_|oluy 

Beatus ille qui procul negotiis 

Ut prisca gens mortalium. 

16. Pythiambic Strophe I., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter 1ud\1ud\H(<jo\±ud\1vv\1o 
Iambic Dimeter y!u^| oluy 

N6x erat, £t caelo fulgebat luna ser£no 
Inter minora sidera. 

17. Pythiambic Strophe II., consisting of: 

Dactylic Hexameter Luo\ lyJo\l^vo\Luj\±Kjv\!o 
Iambic Trimeter oZw_|ot-^-l Ci - u ^ 

Altera jam teritur bellis civilibus aetas, 
Suis et ipsa Koma viribus ruit. 

18. Trochaic Strophe, consisting of: 

Trochaic Dimeter Zu^u|luy 

Iambio Trimeter oZw_loflu_|uJLo 

N6n ebur neque aureum 
Mea renidet in domo lacunar. 

19. Lesser Ionics (see 898). 

v L - I v u 1 _ II 



TwoDipodies j WU T 

' V KJ _ 



I U \J L _ 



Two Tripodies **«•■*- !•«•« l >- I " « i - I 



Miserarum est neqite amori 
Dare ludum neque dulci 
Mala vino lavere aut exanimari 
Metuentes patruae verbera linguae. 



— 197 — 



398. 



INDEX to the METKES of HORACE. 



The references are to the numbers in the preceding paragraph. 

Lib. I. 






1. Maecenas atavis: 4. 


20. Yile potabis: % 


2. Jam satis terris: 2. 


21. Dianam tenerae: 7. 


3. Sic te diva: 5. 


22. Integer vitae: 2. 


4. Solvitur acris hiems: 13 


23. Yitas hinnuleo: 7. 


5. Quis multa: 7. 


24. Quis desiderio: 6. 


6. Scriberis Vario: 6o 


25. Parcius junctas: 2. 


7. Laudabunt alii: 9. 


26. Musis amicus: 1. 


8. Lydia die: 3. 


27. Natis in usum: 1. 


9. Yides ut alta: 1. 


28. Te maris: 9. 


10. Mercuri facunde nepos: 2. 


29. Icci beatis: 1. 


11. Tu ne quaesieris: 8. 


30. Yenus: 2. 


12. Quem virum: 2. 


31. Quid dedicatum: 1. 


13. Cum tu Lydia: 5. 


32. Poscimur: 2. 


14. navis: 7. 


33. Albi ne doleas: 6. 


15. Pastor cum traheret: 6L 


34. Parcus deorum: 1. 


16. matre pulchra: 1. 


35. diva: 1. 


17. Yelox amoenum: 1. 


36. Et ture: 5. 


18. Nullam Yare: 8. 


37. Nunc est bibendum: L 


19. Mater saeva: 5. 


38, Persicos odi: 2, 




Lib. II. 


1. Motum ex Metello: 1. 


11. Quidbellicosus: 1. 


2. Nullus argento: 2. 


12. Nolis longa: 6. 


3. Aequam memento: L 


13. Ille et nefasto: 1. 


4. Ne sit ancillae: 2. 


14. Eheu fugaces: 1. 


5. Nondum subacta: 1. 


15. Jam pauca: 1. 


6. Septimi Gades: 2. 


16. Otium divos: 2. 


7. saepe mecum: 1. 


17. Cur me querelis: 1. 


8. Ulla si juris: 2. 


18. Non ebur: 18. 


9. Non semper imbres: 1. 


19. Bacchum in remotis: 1 


10. Rectius vives: 2. 


20. Non usitata: 1. 




Lib. HI. 


1. Odi profanum: 1. 


7. Quid fles: 7. 


2. Angustam amice: 1. 


8. Martiis caelebs: 2. 


3. Justum et tenacem: 1. 


9. Donee gratus: 5. 


4. Descende caelo: 1. 


10. Extremum Tanain: 6. 


5. Caelo tonantem : 1. 


11. Mercuri nam te: 2. 


6. Delicta majorum: 1. 


12. Miserarum est: 19. 



198 



13. fons Bandusiae: 7. 

14. Herculis ritu: 2. 

15. Uxor pauperis: 5. 

16. Inclusam Danaen: 6. 

17. Aeli vetusto: 1. 

18. Faune nympharum: 2. 

19. Quantum distet: 5. 

20. Non vides: 2. 

21. nata mecum: 1. , 



1. Intermissa Yenus: 5. 

2. Pindarum quisquis: 2. 

3. Quern tu Melpomene: 

4. Qualem ministrum: 1. 

5. Divis orte bonus: 6. 

6. Dive quern proles: 2. 

7. DiffugSre nives: 10. 

8. Donarem pateras: 4. 



1. Ibis liburnis: 15. 

2. Beatus ille: 15. 

3. Parentis olim: 15. 

4. Lupis et agnis: 15. 

5. At O deorum: 15. 

6. Quid immerentes: 15. 

7. Quo quo scelesti: 15. 

8. Rogare longo: 15. 

9. Quando repostum: 15. 



22. Montium custos: 2. 

23. Caelo supinas: 1. 

24. Intactis opulentior: 5. 

25. Quo me Bacche: 5. 

26. Yixi puellis: 1. 

27. Impios parrae: 2. 

28. Festo quid: 5. 

29. Tyrrhena regum: 1. 

30. Exegi monumentum: 4. 



Lib. IV. 

9. Ne forte credas: 1. 

10. crudelis adhue: 8. 

11. Est mini nonum: 2. 

12. Jam veris comites: 6» 

13. Audivere Lyce: 7. 

14. Qua cura patrum: 1. 

15. Phoebus volentem: 1. 
Carmen Saeculare: 2. 

Epodes. 

10. Mala soluta: 15. 

11. Pecti nihil: 12. 

12. Quid tibi, vis: 9. 

13. Horrida tempestas: 1L 

14. Mollis inertia: 16. 

15. Nox erat: 16. 

16. Altera jam: 17. 

17. Jam jam efficaci: 14. 



— 199 



MISCELLANEOUS. 

THE KOMAN CALENDAR 

399. The Roman Year, by the reformed Calendar of Julius 
Caesar, had 365 days, divided as at present into 12 months: 

Januarius, 31 days. Maius, 31 days. September, 30 days. 

Februarius, 28 " Junius, 30 " October, 31 " 

Martius, 31 " Quintilis, 31 " November, 30 " 

Aprilis, 30 " Sextilis, 31 " December. 31 " 

Every fourth year the 24th of February (VI. Kal. Mart.) was 
counted twice giving 29 days to that month. The Intercalary 
day — 25th of February — was called bis sextus. 

In early times the year began in March; hence the names, 
Quintilis, Sextilis, September, etc. Quintilis and Sextilis were after- 
wards changed to Julius and Augustus, in honor of the first two 
Caesars. 

400. The first day of the month was called K a 1 e n d a e 
(Calends) ; on the fifteenth day of March, May, July, and October, 
but the thirteenth of the other mouths, were the Id us (Ides); on 
the seventh day of March, May, July, and October, but the fifth of 
the other months were the N o nae (Nones). To these the names 
of the months were added as Adjectives, as: Kalendae Januariae = 
Jan. 1; Nonae Februarlae = Febr. 5; Idus Martiae = March 15. 

401. From these three points the days of the month were 
reckoned backward in the following manner: The day before each 
of them was expressed by p r i d i e with the Accusative, as; 

pridle Kalendas Januarias = Dec 31. 
pridle Nonas Januarias = Jan. 4. 
pridle Idus Januarias = Jan. 12. 

In counting further backward the point of departure was, by Ro- 
man custom, counted in the reckoning so that ante diem tertium 
Kal. Jan. means two days before the Calends of January; ante 
diem quartum Kal. Jan., three days before the Calends of January, 
and so on. This combination is treated as one indeclinable word, 
so that it can be used with prepositions, as: ex ante diem III. Nonas 
Junias usque ad pridle Kal. Septembres, from June 3 to August 31. 



'— 200 — 

402. In stating the day of a month, two different constructions 
are used. The original construction is die tertio ante Kalendas 
Martias, February 27.; but die and ante are regularly omitted, 
thus: tertio Kalendas Martias, or in figures: III. Kal. Mart. The 
other form is: ante diem tertium Kalendas Martias, or in figures: 
a. d. in. Kal. Mart. 



403. 


( 


3ALENDAI 


I FOB THE 


YEAR 




Days of 
our months. 


January. 




February. 


1. 


Kalendis Jan. 




Kalendis Feb. 


2. 


rv. Nonas Jan. 




iv. Nonas Feb. 


3. 


in. 


u a 




in. 


a tt 


4 


prid. 


ii tt 




prid. 


ii it 


5. 


Nonis Jan. 




Nonis Feb. 


6. 


VIII. . 


Idus Jan. 




VIII. ] 


Cdus Feb. 


7. 


VII. 


tt tt 




VII. 


ti tt 


8. 


VI. 


tt tt 




VI. 


it u 


9. 


v. 


a u 




v. 


tt a 


10. 


IV. 


« it 




IV. 


tl *< 


11. 


in. 


a it 




in. 


a tt 


12. 


prid. 


u u 




prid. 


a it 


13. 


Idibus Jan. 




Idibus Feb. 


14 


XIX. 


Kalendas Feb. 


xvi. Kalendas Mart. 


15. 


XVIII 


a 


it 


XV. 


a u 


16. 


XVII. 


ti 


tt 


xrv. 


tt tt 


17. 


XVI. 


tt 


it 


XIII. 


tt u 


18. 


XV. 


tt 


tt 


XII. 


tt tt 


19. 


XIV. 


it 


ti 


XI. 


tt tt 


20. 


XIII. 


u 


tt 


X. 


a it 


21. 


XII. 


it 


tt 


IX. 


tt a 


22. 


XI. 


tt 


It 


VIII. 


a it 


23. 


X. 


tt 


tt 


VII. 


tt a 


24 


IX. 


a 


it 


VI. 


a ii 


25. 


VIII. 


tt 


[" 


V. 


(i tt 


26. 


VII. 


tt 


It 


rv. 


tt tt 


27. 


VI. 


it 


ti 


in. 


ti tt 


28. 


V. 


tt 


tt 


prid. 


tt u 


29. 


IV. 


tt 


tt 


[prid 


KaL Mart, in leap- 


30. 


III. 


tt 


it 


year, the vi. Kal. (24th) 


31. 


prid. 


it 


it 


being counted twice.] 




(So Aug., Dec.) 









— 201 — 



Days of 
our months. 




March. 






April. 


1. 


Kalendis Mart. 




Kalendis Apr. 


2. 


VL N 


onas Mart. 




iv. Nonas Apr. 


3. 


V. 


a 


a 




m. 


a 


ii 


4 


IV. 


a 


tt 




prid. 


it 


IC 


5. 


III. 


it 


tt 




Nonis Apr. 


6. 


prid. 


a 


tt 




VIII. 


Idus 


Apr. 


7. 


Nonis Mart. 




VII. 


ii 


a 


8. 


VIII. 


Idus 


Mart 


• 


VI. 


ii 


a 


9. 


VII. 


u 


tt 




v. 


ii 


tt 


10. 


VI. 


a 


u 




IV. 


tt 


tt 


11. 


v. 


a 


tt 




III. 


tt 


tt 


12. 


IV. 


n 


tt 




prid. 


a 


it 


13. 


in. 


a 


ii 




Idibus Apr. 


14 


prid. 


a 


ii 




XVIII. 


Kalendas Maiaa 


15. 


Idibus Mart. 




XVII. 




a a 


16. 


xvn. 


Kalendas Aprilis. 


XVI. 




tt it 


17. 


XVI. 


it 




ii 


XV. 




tt it 


18. 


XV. 


u 




ii 


XIV. 




it it 


19. 


xrv. 


u 




ii 


XIII. 




Ct it 


20. 


XIII. 


a 




ii 


XII. 




tt u 


21. 


XII. 


u 




IC 


XI. 




it it 


22. 


XI. 


it 




ii 


X. 




tt ic 


23, 


X. 


tt 




ii 


IX. 




ii tt 


24 


IX. 


if 




a 


VIII. 




tt it 


25. 


VIII. 


it 




ii 


VII. 




II IC 


26. 


VII. 


tt 




ii 


VI. 




tt tt 


27. 


VL 


it 




ii 


V. 




it IC 


28. 


V. 


it 




ii 


IV. 




IC IC 


29. 


IV. 


tt 




IC 


III. 




IC tt 


30. 


III. 


tt 




cc 


prid. 




tt tt 


31. 


prid. 


tt 




ii 


(So June, Sept., Nov.) 



(So May, July, Oct.) 
4:04:. To turn Roman dates into English: 
For Calends: Add two to the days of the preceding month, and 
subtract the given number. 

For Ides and Nones: Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides 
of the month in question, and subtract the given number. 
Examples: a. d. VIII. Kal. Febr. (31 + 2 — 8) = Jan. 25. 
a. d. IY. Non. Mart. ( 7 + 1 — 4) = March 4. 
a. d. IY. Id. Sept. (13 + 1 — 4) = Sept. 10. 



— 202 — 

4:05. The Year was designated by the names of the Consuls 
for that year: but was also reckoned from the building of the 
City (ab urbe condlta, anno urbis conditae) which, according to 
Yarro, corresponds with the 753d year B. C. In order to reduce 
such dates to those of the Christian era, if the given number be less 
than 754, subtract it from the latter, and the remainder will be the 
year B. C. as: a. u. c. 691 (the year of Cicero's consulship) = B. C. 
63; if greater than 753, subtract 753 from it, and the remainder will 
be the year after Christ (A. D.), as: a. u. c. 767 (the year of Augustus* 
death) = 14 A. D. 

4:06. The Week of seven days (hebd5mas) was not in use among 
the Romans under the republic, but was introduced under the em- 
perors. The days of the week were named from the planets: 

dies Solis, Sunday dies Jovis, Thursday 

dies Lunae, Monday dies YenSris, Friday 

dies Martis, Tuesday dies Saturni, Saturday. 
dies Mercurii, Wednesday 

ROMAN MONEY, WEIGHTS, and MEASURES. 

407 The Coins of the Romans were in early times of copper. 
The as, being originally the unit of currency, was nominally a pound 
weight, but was reduced by degrees to one twenty-fourth of its 
original weight and value. In the third century silver coins were in- 
troduced; the denarius = 10 asses, and the sestertius = 2\ asses 
(sestertius = semis-tertius, half third, represented by IIS or HS 
= duo et semis, 2£). 

408. The Sestertius was the ordinary coin of the Romans, 
by which the largest sums were reckoned. Gold was introduced later, 
the aureus being equal to 100 sesterces. The value of these 
coins is seen in the following: 

1 as nearly 2 cents. 

2\ asses = 1 sestertius or nummus (HS) " 4 " 
10 asses = 4 sestertii = 1 denarius " 16 u 

1000 sestertii = 1 sestertium $40.00 

409. The Sestertium was a sum of money, not a coin. 
Though probably the genitive plural of sestertius, the word is 
inflected regularly as a neuter noun, thus: tria sestertia *= $120.00. 
When joined with the multiplicative adverbs it denotes a sum of a 
hundred thousand^ centena milia being omitted, thus: decies sester- 
tium, a million = $40,000. 



— 203 — 

410. The Roman Measures of Length are the following: 
12 unclae, inches = 1 pes, Roman foot (11.6 Engl, inches) 
1 cubitus, cubit = lifeet 
1 gradus, step = 2\feet 
1 passus, pace = 5 feet 
mille passuum, 1000 paces = l mile (4850 Engl. feet). 

4:11. The basis of Square Measure was the jugerum, an 
area of 240 Roman feet long and 120 broad, a little less than f of 
an English acre. 

412. The Measures of Weight are: 

12 uociae (ounces) = one pound (libra, about f lb. avoirdupois). 
Fractional parts (weight or coin) are: 

1. (tV), uncia; 5. (tV), quincunx; 9. (f), dodrans; 

2. (i), sextans; 6. (i), semissis; 10. (f), dextans; 

3. (i), quadrans; 7. (ft), septunx; 11. (H-), deunx; 

4. (£), trlens; 8. (f), bessis; 12. As. 
The Talent was a Greek weight = 60 librae. 

413. The Measures of Capacity are: 

12 cyathi = 1 sextarlus (nearly a pint). 
16 sextarii — 1 modlus (peck). 

6 sextarii = 1 conglus (3 quarts, liquid measure). 

8 congii = 1 amphora (6 gallons). 

414, ABBREVIATIONS. 

A., absolvo. . N. L., non liquet. 

A. Chr., ante Christum. Non., Nonae. 

A. D., ante diem. P. C, patres conscripti. 

A. U. C, anno urbis condltae. P. M., pontifex maximus. 

C, condemno. P. R., populus Romanus. 
Cos., consul. Coss., consules. Pr., praetor. 

D. D., dono dedit. Proc, proconsul. 

D. D. D., dat, dicat, dedlcat. Q. B. F. F. Q. S., quod bonum felix 

Des., designates, faustumque sit. 

F., filius. Quir., Quirites. 

H. S., sestertius. Resp., respubllca. 

Ictus, jurisconsultus. S., senatus. 

Id., idus. S. C, senatus consultum. 

Imp., imperator. S. D. P., salutem dicit plurlmam. 

J. O. M., Jovi optlmo maximo. S. P. Q. R., Senatus Populusque 

K. f Kal., Kalendae. Romanus. 

Leg., legatus, leglo. Tr. pi., tribunus plebis. 



~ 204 — 

415. PRINCIPAL LATIN AUTHORS. 

T. Maccius Plautus b.c.254-184 

Comedies. 
Q. Ennius 239-169 

Annals, Satires, &c. (Fragments). 
M. Porcius Cato 236-149 

Husbandry, Antiquities, &c. 
M. Pacuvtus . . 220-130 

Tragedies (Fragments). 
P. Terehtius Afer (Terence) 195-159 

Comedies. 
C. Lucilius . . . . 149-103 

Satires (Fragments). 
L. Attius (or Accius) 170-75 

Tragedies (Fragments). 
M. Terentius Yarro 116-28 

Husbandry, Aniiquities } &c. 
M. Tullius Cicero 106-43 

Orations, Letters, Dialogues. 
C. Julius Caesar < . 100-44 

Commentaries. 
To Lucretius Carus 99-55 

Poem "De Kerum Natura". 
C. Valerius Catullus 87-47 

Miscellaneous Poems. 
C. Sallustius Crispus (Sallust) 86-35 

Histories. 
Cornelius Nepos 90- 

Lives of Famous Commanders. 
P. Vergilius Maro (Virgil) 70-19 

Eclogues, Georgis, Aeneid. 
Q. Horatms Flaccus (Horace) 65-8 

Satires, Odes, Ejpistles. 
Albius Tibullus 54-18 

Elegies. 

Sex. Aurelius Propertius 49-15 

Elegies. 

T. Livius Patavmus (Livy) b.c.59-a.d.17 

Boman History. --** 



>?- 205 — 

P. Ovidius Naso (Ovid) , . . . b.c.43-a.d.16 

Metamorphoses, Fasti, &c % 
C. Vellelus Patercfilus b.c.19-a.d.31 

Roman History. 
M. Valerius Maxlmus A.D.-31 

Anecdotes, &c. 
Pomponiue Mela -50 

Husbandry & Geography. 

A. Perslus Flaecus . . . . . ... . . . . . 34-62 

Satires. 
L. Annaeus SenSca -65 

Philos. Letters, &c; Tragedies. 
M. Annaeus Lucanus 38-65 

Historical Poem "Pharsalia". 

Q. Curtiua Rufus ? 

History of Alexander. 

C. Plinius Secundus (PliNy) 23-79 

Nat. Hist, &c. 

C. Valerius Flaccus . . . . . . . . -88 

Heroic Poem "Argonautica". 

P. Papinius Statius . . ." 45-96 

Heroic Poems "Thebais", &c. 

C. Silius Italieus 25-100 

Heroic Poem "Punica". 

D. Junius Juvenilis (Juvenal) 42-121 

Satires. 

L. Annaeus Floras -120 

Historical Abridgment. 

M. Valerius Martialis (Martial) . 43-104 

Epigrams. 
M. Fablus Quintilianus 40-118 

Rhetoric. 
C. Cornelius Tacitus ..... 57-118 

Annals, History, &c. 

C. Plinius Caecilius Secundus (Pliny Junior) .... 62-113 
Letters. 

C. Suetonius Tranquillus 70-150 

TJie Twelve Ccesars. 



— 206 — 

Apuleius A. D. 110- 

Philos. Writings, "Metamorphoses". 
A. Gellius . -180 

Miscellanies, "Noctes Atticae". 
*Q. Septimius Florens Tertullianus 160-220 

Apologist 
*M. Minucius Felix -250 

Apologetic Dialogue, "Octavius". 
*Firmianus Lactantius . 250-325 

Theology. 

D. Magnus Ausonius . -380 

Miscellaneous Poems. 
Ammianus Marcellinus . • - • -395 

Roman History. m r „ 
Claudius Claudianus -408 

Poems, Panegyrics, &c. 
*Aurelius Prudentius Clemens 348-410 

Christian Poems. 
*Aurelius Augustinus 354-430 

Confessions, Discourses, &c. 
AnicTus Manlius Boethlus . . . . ' 470-520 

Philosophical Dialogues. 

* Christian writers. 



— 207 



INDEX of SUBJECTS. 



The references are to paragraphs. 



A. 



a, a"b, abs, 93; to denote Distance, 
102. 2; with Verbs of Separation, 86; 
to denote remote progenitors, 76. 1; 
with names of towns, 96. 2; with Ge- 
rund, 314; to denote the Living Agent, 
76 

a"balienare, w. Abl., 86. 3 

Abbreviations, 414 

abesse, w. Abl. or Ace, 102; non 
multum abest quin, 204 

aohino, w. Ace, 105. 4 

aohorrere, w. Abl., 86. 3 

abire, w. Abl., 86 

Ablative, 74—90; with Prepositions, 93; 
with cle, to express the crime, 43. 1; 
with ex, instead of Partitive Genitive, 
38; with Compounds of ex, 53; of 
Accompaniment 79. 2; of Cause, 75 — 
78; of Charge and Punishment, 43. 2; 
of Comparison, 84; with Relative 
Pronoun, 84. 1; to denote Distance, 
102; with a, to denote the Living 
Agent, 76; of Limitation, 80; of Man- 
ner, 81; of Measure, 83; of Means and 
Instrument, 79; to denote Place, 98; 
of Plenty and Want, 87; of Price, 85; 
of Quality, 30. 1. 3; of Separation, 86; 
to denote time when, 103; time how 
long before, 105; time within which, 
106; with Verbs of Valuing, 79, 4 

Ablative Absolute, 302—305; with 
Substantives and Adjective?, 305; when 
not admissible, 303. 3; with Deponents, 
303. 4, with Fut. Participle, 304; with 
Gerundive, 314. 1; regarded as single 
part of speech, 284 

absced^re, w. Abl. 86 

absolvere, w. Gen. 43 



aostinere, w. Abl. 86 

Abstract Nouns for Concretes, 111; Gen- 
der of their Predicate, 13 

abundare, w. Abl. 87 

a oiiti, w. Abl. 90 

ae, atqru.e, 320. 2 

ac non, 320. 10 

Acatalectic Verses, 377 

accedSre, with ad, 69. 2 

acoedit, with quod, or irt, 191; 
212.1 

acceptus, w. Dat, 65. 1 

accidLSre ad pedes, 69. 2 

aecid.it; with lit, 191 

accipere, w. Ace. & Inf., 255; with 
Gerundive, 316 

accord, of one's own, ipse, 135 

accusare, w. Gen., 43 

Accusative, 49—62; w. Prepos., 92; of 
Direct Object, 49; with Intransitives, 
51; with Compounds, 52; with Imper- 
sonals, 45, 54; with Verbs of Asking 
and Demanding, 60—62; with Verbs 
of Feeling and Taste, 50; Two Accusa- 
tives, with Verbs of Naming, 58; with 
Verbs of Teaching, 59; Accusative with 
Verbs of Reminding, 41; of Limitation 
instead of Abl., 30.2; of Space, 101; 
of Time how long, 104; how long be- 
fore, 105. 1; how long since with Ordi- 
nals, 107;, of Neuter Pronoun, with 
Verbs, 41. 1; Adverbial, 56, 57; to de- 
note Distance, 102; with in. after 
Verbs of Rest, 100; in Exclamations, 
55 

Accusative with Infinitive, 251—267; 
as Subject after «st with Subst. or 
Adject., 252; as Object after Verbs of 
Perceiving and Declaring, 255; after 



208 — 



Verbs of Emotion, 261; after Verbs of 
Will and Desire, 259; in Oratto obll- 
qua, 282; regarded as single part of 
speech, 284; in Exclamations, 252. 1; 
with interest, 47; with duc6- 
re, existimare, credere, 
58, 6; its three Infinitives, 256; in Un- 
real Conditions, 267; Active changed 
into Passive,265; how to translate,250 
Accusing, Verbs of, w. Gen., 43; with 

quod, 261. 1 
acervus, with Part. Gen., 78, 32 
acquiescSre, its construction, 78 
Acquitting, Verbs of, w. Gen., 43 
Active turned into Passive in Ace. & Inf., 

265 
ad, with Ace., 92; to denote place to 
which; with names of towns, 96. 2; 
with Gerund, 313; 316. 2; w. Gerund 
of Verbs of Hindering and Retarding, 
313. 2; with interest, 47. 1; in 
Compounds w. Ace, 53; with Dat., 
69; repeated, 69. 1 
adde, with quod, 212 
add^re, w. Dat, 69; w. two Ace., 

58. c. 
addxioere, with ut, 193 
acid, uctus misericordia, 77. 2 
ade\>, w. ut consecutivum, 190 
adeo non ut, so little that, 191. 1 
adesse, w. Dat., 69; w. ad, 69. 2 
adnioere, w. Dat., 69; w. ad, 

69. 1 
adipisci, with ut, 193 
adire, w. Ace, 53 
Adjectives, their special uses, 118—127; 
in Apposition, 21; of the Antecedent in 
the relative clause, 138; as Attribute, 
22; as Predicate, 4; 8; used as Sub- 
stantives 118 — 120; which have become 
Substantives, 119. 1; replaced by Sub- 
stantives, 112; instead of a Genitive, 
121; as Surnames, 123; with quam- 
vis, 229. 2; with Gen., 59; with Dat., 
65; in Abl. Absolute, 305 
adjungSre, with Dat., 69 
adjutor, in Abl. Absolute, 305 
adjuvare, wifh Ace., 64. 6 
admirari, its Pass., 73. 1; with 
Ace. & Inf., 261 



admiration! esse, 73. 1 
admonere, w. Gen., 41; with ixt 

or Ace. & Inf., 193. 3 
admovere, with Dat. or in, 69. 2 
adoriri, with Object Infin., 250 
adscisoere, with two Ace., 58 
adspergSre, see aspergere 
adspioere, with Pres. Partic., 

255.2 
adsumere, with two Ace., 58 
ad venire, with in. & Ace., 100 
adventu, Abl. of time, 103. 2 
Adverbial Relations, expressed by the 

Abl., 74 
Adverbial Phrases, in the Ace., 57 
Adverbs of Places how to be distinguish- 
ed, 129. 3; with Part. Gen., 36, 37; 
with Substantives, 116; with Dat., 65 
adversari, with Dat., 64 
Adversative Conjunctions, 324 
ad versus, with Ace., 92 
aeger, with Abl., 75, 77 
aegre ferre with Ace. & Inf., 261 
aequalis, with Gen., 65. 1 
aequare, with Ace., 64. 6 
aeque with ac, atque, 320. 7 
aequi boni faoere, Part. Gen., 

38.8 
aequum est, in the Indie, instead 
of the Subjunctive, 179; with Ace. & 
Inf., 254 
aequus, its construction, 65. 3 
aestimare, with Abl., 85; with 

Gen. of Value, 42 
aetate, Abl. of time, 103. 2 
affatim, with Part. Gen., 36 
afterre, with Dat., 69 
aff icere, with Abl., 79. 3 
affinis, with Gen., 39; used as Sub- 
stantive, 65. 1 
aff luere, with Abl., 87 
Age, expressed by Concrete Substantives, 

110 
agSre annum, to express Tioto old, 

109 
aggrSdi, its construction, 53 
Agreement of Predicate and Subject, 6 — 
16; of Attribute and Substantive, 17 — 
19; of Apposition and Substantive, 19* 
20; of Pronouns, 23—25 



209 



aJo 9 its use, 281. 1 

Alcaic Verses, 395. 9. 10; Alcaic Stanza, 
397.1 

Alcmanian Stanza, 397. 9 

all- in alxqais rejected, 142 

alias with Fut Perf. (videro), 156. 1 

allenare, with Abl., 86. 3 

alienas, with Abl., 39 

aliquanto, Abl. of Measure, 83; 
wiih Comparatives, 125. 2 

aliquantum, used adverbially, 
56; with Part. Gen., 35 

aliqnid., used adverbially, 58; with 
Part. Gen., 35 

alxqais, 142; after si, nisi, &c, 
142.2 

alias, aliter ac, quam, nisi, 320. 
7; alias, repeated, 320. 7; with 
another case of the same word, 320. 7; 
alias.. allum. 288; alii, asyn- 
detic without et, 3<,0. 4 

alter, with Part. Gen., 34; alter al- 
teram, 288; altero tanto, Abl. 
of Measure, 83 

amans, w. Gen. 40 

Ambiguity in Ace. & Inf. 265 

amicus, amicissimus, w. 
Dat., as Subst, 65. 1; with erga, 
65.3 

amovere, w. Abl., 86 

ampllus, w. Abl. of Comparison, 
84. 2 

an, in Disjunctive Questions, 277; in 
single indirect questions, 278 

Anacrusis, 395. 10 

and not, in Antithesis, 320. 1 

animadvertSre, w. Ace. & Inf., 
255; w. Pres. Partic, 255. 2 

animo, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1; mihi 
est in ammo, w. Object Inf., 250. 2: 
animi, Part. Gen., 39. 3; animum in- 
ducere, w. Object Inf., 250. 2; ani- 
mus used as periphrasis, 114. 2 

annon, 276. 1 

Answer, Form of, 279. 280 

ante, 92; in Compounds w. Dat., 69; 
to denote time how long before, 105; 
w. Abl. of Measure, 83; ante diem, 401 

Antecedent of Relatives T 23; 132. 1; in- 
corporated in the relative clause, 137; 



its Adjective or Apposition in the re- 
lative clause; Antecedent action ex- 
pressed by Perf. and Pluperf., 165 
antecedSre, its construction, 53 
anteeellere, its construction, 53; 

w. Abl. of Measure, 83 
anteire, its construction, 53 
anteponere, w. Dat., 69 
antgquam, 208—210 
anxius, w. Abl., 77 
apertum est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
Apocope, 364 
Apodosis, 220 

apparere, w. two Nominatives, 10 
apparet, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
appellare, w. two Ace, 58 
appellari, w. two Nom., 10 
appelli, w. ad, 100. 1 
appetens, w. Gen., 40 
Apposition, its agreement, 18. 19; of a 
Proper Name, 123; denoting rank, age 
or trade, 20; in names of towns,l9. 1; 
98. 3—5; introduced by ut, tarn- 
quam, 20. 1; in Abl. Absolute, 
304.1 
Appositive Genitive, 27. 1 
appropinquare, its construc- 
tion, 69. 2 
aptas, w. Dat, 65. 1; w. ad, 65. 3; 

qui w. Subj., 236 
apud, 92 

aroitrari, w. Acc.&Inf., 255 
arbitratus, with force of Pres. 

Part., 293. 1 
arcere, w. Abl., 86 
arcessSre, w. Gen., 43 
Archilochian Verse, 397. 10—13 
argaere,w.Gen.,43; argui,w. Nom, 

& Inf., 263. 3 
argumento esse, 73. a 
Aristophanic Verse, 395. 2 
Arsis, 370 

As, Unit of Value, 407 
Asclepiadean Verse, 395. 7. 8.; Stanzas, 

397. 4-8 
Asking, Verbs of, 60-62; with nonne, 275 
aspergere, its construction, 70 
assequi, with at, 193 
Assertive Sentences, 1; in OratTo Obllqua 
282 



210 



Asseverations, 183. 2; introduced by ita 

lit, 231. 3 
assnetacSre, assuefieri, assues- 

cere, w. Obj. Inf., 250 
assuetus, assuefactus, w. Abl., 69.4 
Asyndeton, 320. 4. 5 
at, 324. 3; in Conditional Sentences, 

224; at certe, 224 
atqne, 320. 1; after Adjectives of 

Likeness and Tlnlikeness^ 320. 7 
atqiie adeo, 320. 10; atque etiam, 

320. 3. 10;,atque is, 132. 2 
atq.nl, 324. 6 

attamen, 324. 7; in Conditional Sen- 
tences, 224 
attend^re, its construction, 69. 4 
Attribute. 17—22 
Attraction of Mood, 238 
anctor, in Abl. Absol., 305 
auctor sum, w. Gerund, 311. 3 
audere, w. Object Inf., 250 
audire, w. Ace. & Inf., 255; w. Pres. 

Partic, 301. 1; audiri, w.Nom.&Inf., 

263.3 
audi to, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 
andltu, 318 
auditus, w. Dat., 72 
Aureus, the Roman coin, 408 
ausus, with force of Pres. Part, 

293. 1 
ant, 322; to continue a negation, 323; 

in disjunctive questions, 276. 2; aut. . 

ant, 372, II. 
autem, 324. 1 
Authors, Latin, 415 
Auxiliary Verbs with Object Inf., 50 
auxilio, w. Gen. of the person con- 
sidered as means, 79; auxilio venire, 

73. c 
avere, with Object Inf., 250 
avid. ns, w. Gen., 39 

IB. 

Basis, in verse, 395 

"belli, in connection with domi, 97. 2; 

in bello, 101. 3 
Tieiie, male facere, w. quod., 212 
bene emere, vendere, 85. 2 
benedicSre, w. Dat., 64. 1 
benevolus, w, erga, 65. 3 



benignus, w. erga, 65. 3 

Bewaring, Verbs of, w. ne, 194 
Blaming, Verbs of, w. quod., 261. 1 
Buying and Selling y Verbs of, w. Abl., 
85 

C 

Caesura, 379 
calamitati esse, 73. a 

Calendar, 399—406 

Calends, 400 

canere, w. Abl., 79. 5 

capax, w. Gen., 39.2 

eapite & capitis damnare, 43. 2 

Cardinals used for Ordinals, 103. 3 

carere, w. Abl., 87 

cams, w. Dat, 65. 1 

Cases, their Construction, 26 — 90; Case 

of the Predicate, 9; of Attribute and 

Apposition, 19. 22; of the Relative, 38 
casu, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 
Catalectic Verse, 377 
causa, w. Gen., 29; 77. 3 
Causal Conjunctions, 211—219, 825 
cave, with Subjunct. in prohibitions, 

244._3 
cavere, with Dat. or Ace, 68; with 

ne,194 
cedere, with Abl., 86 
celare, with two Ace, 59; with de, 

59. 4 
censere, with Ace. & Inf., 255; 

with nt, 255. 1 
cern^re, with Pres. Part., 255. 2; 

cerneres, Potential Subjunct., 182 
eertiorem facere aliquem, 58. 2 
ceteri, asyndetic (without et), 

320.4 
Characteristic expressed by Relative 

Clause, 236 
Charge or Punishment in Gen. or Abl., 

43 
circa, 92 
circum, 92; in Compounds with 

Ace, 52 
circumdare, its construction, 70 
circnmfluere, with Abl., 87 
circumire,circumvenire, 

with Ace, 51 
cis. 92 
Citations from books, without in, 98. 2 



211 



eitra, 92; with Abl. of Measure, £3 
Clause, as Subject of a Sentence, 8. 1 
coarguere, with Gen., 43 
coepisse, with Object Inf., 25C; 

in the Passive, 250. 1 
cogSre, with in and Ace, 100 
cogitare, with Object Inf., 250: 

with Ace. & Inf., 255 
oognitu, 318 
eognitus, with Dat, 72; cog 

nito, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 
cognomen, with Dat., 71. 3 
cognoscere, with two Ace, 58. 1; 

with Ace. & Inf., 255 
colre, its construction, 53; with in 

and Ace, 100 
eolens, with Gen., 40 
Collective Nouns, their Predicate, 11; 

agreeing according to sense, 23. 2 
collocare, to let, with Abl., 85; 

with in and Abl., 99 
Combined Persons in the Predicate, 16; 

of Relatives, 24. 2 
comis, with erga or in, 65. 3 
comitatus, with passive meaning, 

293. 1 
comitiis, 103. 2 
Commanding and Urging, Verbs of, 

with nt, 193 
Commands, 1; in Oratio Obllqua, 282 
committSre, with nt, 193 
Common Attribute of two or more Sub- 

stant, 22 
Common Gender in the Predicate, 9. 2 
Common Quantity, 333 
commonere, commonefa- 

cere, with Gen., 41 
commoratus, with force of Pres 

Part., 293. 1 
commStus, with Abl., 77. 2 
commovere, with ut, 193 
communicare, with cum, 

69.1 
communis, with Gen., 65. 7; with 

Dat., 65. 1 
comparare, its construction, 69. 

1; determinative Pronoun omitted, 

133. 1 
Comparative, its uses, 124 — 127; with 

Abl., 84; with only tico objects, 127; 



in Relative Clause, 138. 1; with quo, 

201; denoting considerable degree, 

124; modified by multo, 125. 2; 

followed by quam qui, quam 

lit, 236. 1; with opinione, ex- 

spectatione, spe, sollto, 

84. 3; with Abl. of Gerundive, 314. 1; 

with Part. Gen., 33 
Comparative Conjunctions, 230, 231 
Comparative Sentences, 230, 231; take 
Comparative Value in the Gen., 85. 

quisquam, ullus, 143. 1 
Comparison expressed by Abl., 84; of 

two quaiiiies, 125 
comperire, with Ace & Inf., 255 
comperto, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 
complere, with Abl. or Gen., 87 
componere, its construction, 

69.1 
compos, with Gen., 39 
Compound Verbs, with Dat., 53, 69; 

with Ace, 52; of ad., con, in, 69. 

1; of ante, prae, 53 
Compound Verses, 395 
Compounds, their Quantity, 353 
con in Compounds with Dat., 69 
conari. with si, 275. 1 
concedSre, with ut, 193; with 

Ace. & Inf., 193. 3; with Gerundive, 

316 
Concessive Conjunctions, 225—229 
Concessive Subjunctive, 185 
Concrete Substantives for Abstracts, 110 
concupisc^re, with Object Inf. 

250 
concurrgre, with in & Ace, 100 
condemnare, with Gen., 43 
Condemning, Verbs of, with Gen., 43; 

with quod, 231. 1 
condicione, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1 
Conditional Conjunctions, 218, 219 
Conditional Sentences, 220—224; take 

quisquam, ullus, 143 
Conditional Wishes, with num., 219 
conducSre, with Abl., 85; with 

Gerundive, 316; conducit, with Ace. 

& Inf., 254 
conferre, its construction, 69. 1; 

determinative Pronoun omitted, 133. 1; 

conferre in, with Gerund, 313 



212 — 



oonfessus, with pass, meaning, 
293. 1 

confidSre, with Dat, 64; with 
AM., 78 

confisus, with force of Pres. Part., 
293. 1 

congr6di, its construction, 69 

congregari, with in & Ace, 
100 

Congratulating, Verbs of, with quodL, 
261.1 

congruSre, its construction, 69. 1 

Conjugation, Periphrastic, 157; in the 
Indie, 173 

Conjunctions, Coordinating^ 319—327; 
Copulative, 320, 321; Disjunctive, 
322, 323; Adversative, 324; Causal, 
325, 211-216; Illative, 326; Final, 187; 
Consecutive, 187; Temporal, 205—209; 
Conditional, 218, 219; Concessive, 223 
—229; Comparative, 230, 231 

Conjunctive Clauses, 165 

conjung^re, its construction, 
69.1 

concju<5ri, its construction, 50. a 

conscius, w. Gen., 39 

Consecutive Conjunctions, 188—204 

consentanSum est, w. Ace. & 
Inf., 254 

consentire, its construction, 69. 1 

cons^qui, withut, 193 

considgre, w. Abl., 99 

consillo, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1 

consilixiim capere or inire, w. Ob- 
ject Inf., 250. 2; consilium est, w. Inf. 
or lit, 311. 2 

eonsist^re, w. in. and Abl., 99 

consors, w. Gen., 39 

conspicere, w. Pres. Part., 255. 2; 
301. 1 

constare, w. Abl., 85 

constat, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 

constitufire, its construction, 
260; w. Abl., 99; w. Inf., 193. 1; w. 
Object Inf., 250 

constitutus, w. Dat., 72 

Construction of Cases, 26 — 90 

consuescere, consuevisse, w. Ob- 
ject Inf., 250 

cpnsuetu4o est, w t ut, 191 



consul, in Abl. Absol., 305 
eonsul&re, its construction, 68; 

with ut, 193 
consultus, w. Gen., 39. 1 
Contemporary action expressed by Pres. 

and Imperf., 165. 1 
contendere, to contrast, its con- 
struction, 69. 1; w. ut or Inf., 193 
contentus, w. Abl., 78 
contestatus, w. pass, meaning, 

293. 1 
contineri, w. Abl., 78 
contingit, w. ut, 191 
contra, 92; w. ac or quam, 

320. 7; contra etiam, after tantum ab- 

est, 191. 1 
contrahSre, w. in and Ace., 

100 
contrarius, with ac, atque, 

320. 7 
convenire, its construction, 53; 

w. in & Ace., 100 
convenit, Indie., with force of the 

Subj., 178; denoting future action, 

162. 1; w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
Convicting, Verbs of, w. Gen., 43 
convinc^re, w. Gen., 43 

Co-ORDINATING Conjunctions, 319—327 

copia, w. Part. Gen., 32 
Copula, its agreement, 7; 9. 3 
Copulative Conjunctions, 320, 321; 

Correspondents, 327. 1. 
Copulative Verbs, 10 
coram, 93 
cordi esse, 73. 1 
corpus, used as periphrasis, U4. 2 
Correlatives, 320. 9 
Corresponsive Conjunctions, 327 
erassus, replaced by crassitvi- 

uo, 101. 1 
creare, w. two Ace., 58 
creari,?. two Norn., 10 
oredSre, w. Ace. & Inf., 58. 6; 255 
crecLeres, Potential Subj., 182 
credibile est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
credito, Abl. Absol., 309. 2 
creditur, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
crescSre = augere, w. Abl., 75 
Crime, expressed by Gen., 43; Abl. w. 

tf.e, 43. 1 



213 - 



crudells, w. Prep., 65. 3 
cu.l>Itu.:m. ire, 317 

cum (Conjunction) temporal, 206; 
historical, 205; of simultaneous occur- 
rences, 206. 2; of identical actions, 
206. 3; of iterative action, 161; inver- 
sum (w. Indie.) 206. 1; concessive, 
225. 227; causal, 217; w. Ind. after 
Verbs of Praising, 261. 1; followed by 
quis, 142. 1; cum non, to express with- 
out, 314. 2 

cum (Preposition) 93; in Compounds 
w. the Ace., 53; to denote Accom- 
paniment, 79. 2; w. Abl. of Manner, 
82 

cumulai%, w. Abl., 87 

cunctari, w. Object Inf., 250 

cuncto, cuncta, in the Abl. of 
Place without in, 98 

-cunque, appended to Pronouns, 
with Indie., 180 

cup^re, w. Inf., 193. 1; w. Object 
Inf., 250; w. Ace. & Inf., 259 

cupidus, w. Gen., 39 

cur, its use, 270. 4 

curae esse, 73. 1 

curare, w. ut, 193; non curare, with 
Object Inf., 250; curare, with Gerun- 
dive, 193. 2; 316 

I>. 

Dactylic Hexameter, 384—387 

damnare, w. Gen., 43 

dare, w. two Ace., 58; w. two Dat., 
73. 6; w. Gerundive, 316; datur mihi i 
nomen, 71. 3; dare facultatem, copiam 
w. Gerund., 311. 3 

Dates of years, 103. 3 

Dative, 63—73; w. Intransitives, 64; w. 
Compounds, 69; w. Verbs of twofold 
construction, 70; of Purpose, 73; w. 
Adjectives, 65; of Advantage and Dis- 
advantage, 66; of Possession, 71; w. 
Gerund and Gerundive, 72; w. Pas- 
sives, 72; Dative of Gerund, 315. 1; 
Ethical, 67; in Exclamations, 55. 2 

de, 93; instead of Partit. Gen., 38; w. 
accusare, 43. 1; w. Verbs of Separa- 
tion, 86; w. Verbs of Reminding, 44.1; 
w. Abl, of Gerund., 314 



d.et>ere, w. Object Inf., 250; debSo, 
with force of Subjunct, 178 

deced^re, w. Abl., 86 

decernSre, w. Object Inf., 250; 
w. Inf., 193. 1; w. xvt, xie or Ace. & 
Inf., w. the Gerundive, 260 

decet, w. Ace, 54; w. Subject., 54.1; 
w. Subject Inf., 248; Indie, with force 
of Subjunct., 178 

declarare, w. two Ace., 58 

Declarative Sentences in Oratio Obllqua, 
282.1 

Declaring, Verbs of, with Ace & Inf., 
255 

d.ec5ri esse, 73 

dedecet, with Ace, 54; with Sub- 
ject Infinitive, 248 

dedecori esse, 73 

deesse, with Dat., 69 

defendLere, with Abl., 86. 2 

deflcere, with Ace, 64. 6 

defigere, with Abl., 99 

defungi, with Abl., 90 

Degree of importance, with interest, 47 

dejicere, with Abl., 86 

delectari, with Abl., 77 

delectat, with Subject Inf., 248 

delit>erare, with an, 278 

d.elioeratiis, with Dat., 72 

deligere, with two Ace, 58 

deligi, with two Norn., 10 

Demonstrative Pronouns, their uses, 
129—131; for Reflexive in Oratio Obll- 
qua, 287. 1 

demovere, with Abl., 86 

depellere, with Abl., 86; 86. 1 

Dependent Clauses, 164; in Oratio Obll- 
qua, 282. IV; 283. IV 

Deponent Verbs, with Abl., 90; their 
Participles, 292 

designare, with two Ace, 58 

desinere, with Object Inf., 250. 1; 
desitus sum, 250. 1 

desist ere, with Abl., 86; with Ob- 
ject Inf., 250 

non desunt qui, with Subj., 236 

Determinative Pronouns, 132 — 136; 
omitted or replaced, 133. i 

deterrere, with Abl., 86; with ne, 
194; with q.u.ozairius, 202 



214 — 



detrimento esse, 73 

detur'bare, with Abl., 86 

deverti, with ad & Ace, 100. 1 

Diaeresis, 362; 379 

Diastole,. 365 

dicSre, with two Ace, 58; with Ace. 
&Inf., 255; with ut, 193. 4; after 
qixod, 211. 1 

diei, with two Norn., 10; with Nona. & 
Inf., 262 

dicionis suae facere, Partit. Gen,, 
38.8 

dioitixr, ,its construction in Oratio 
Obllqua, 263. 4 

die to audientem esse, with Dat., 64 

diotu, Sup., 318 

dictum, modified by Adverb, 116 

diem dicere, with Dat. Ger., 312; in 
dies, 94 

Difference of Measure, in Abl., 83 

ditTerre, with Abl., 86. 3 

diffioilis, with Dat., 65; difficile 
est, with the force of the Subjunct, 
179. 1; with Ace & Inf., 254; with Su- 
pine, 318 

diffldere, with Dat., 64; 78 

difflsus, with force of Pres. Part., 
293.1 

dignari, with Abl., 89 

diggxrtzs, with Abl., 89; with qxii & 
Snbj., 236 

dillgens, with Gen., 40 

dimensus, with pass, meaning, 
293.1 

dimidium, with Partit. Gen., 35 

Dipodia, 376 

Direct Discourse, 281 

Direct Object, 49 

Direct Questions, 268; in Oratio Obll- 
qua, 268 

Direct Beflexive, 284 

dis, in Compounds with Abl., 86. 3 

discere, with Object Inf., 250; in- 
stead of doceri, 59. 1 

discernere, with Abl., 86. 3 

discessu, Abl. of Time, 103. 2 

discrepare, with Abl., 86. 3 

Disjunctive Conjunctions, 322 — 323 

Disjunctive Correspondents, 327. II 

Disjunctive Questions, 276; 277 



dispar, with Dat., 65; with Gen., 65. 

5; with ac, atqxxe, 320. 7 
displioere, with Dat., 64 
displicet, with Ace. & Inf., 254; 

displicet mini, with Snbj. Inf., 248 
dissentire, with Abl., 86. 3 
dissidere, with Abl., 86. 3 
dissimilis, with Dat., 65; with Gen. 

or Dat, 65. 4; with ac, atx^ixe, 

320.7 
Distance how far? 102 
Distance of time, 105 
distare, with Abl., 86. 3; with Abl. 

or Ace, 102 
Distich, 396; Elegiac Distich, 389 
Distinction of Tenses, 147—156; in Par- 
ticiples, 293 
distinguere, 'with Abl., 86. 3 
dives, with Gen., 39. 2 
docere, with two Ace, 59; with 

de, 59. 3; with Object Inf., 250 
doctus, used absolutely, 59 
documento esse, 73. a 
Doing, Verbs of, with qiiod, 212 
dolere, with Ace, 50. a; with Abl., 

77 
dolo, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 
domus, construed like name of town, 

97; domi belllque, 97. 2; domi militiae- 

que, 97. 2 
donare, twofold construction, 70 
donee, with Indie, 207 
dono dare, 73. c 
Doubt, Verbs of, with qtiin, 204 
diibitare, with Object Inf., 250; 

its various constructions, 204. 2; 

non dubito quin, 204; dubito an, 

278 
Dubiiative Subjunctive, 186 
dixl^iixin. est an, 278; non dubium 

est quin, 204 
dixoere, with two Ace, 58; with 

Gen. of Value, 42; with Abl., 99; 

with Ace & Inf., 255 
duel, 58. 5 

dulcis, with Dat., 66. I 
dum, with Pres., 159; with Indie, 

207; to denote sure expectation, 207. 

1; with Subjunct., 219; dtim ne, 

219.1 



215 



<lu.xnin.5dLo, with Subjunct, 219 
dux, in Abi. Absol., 305 
dux ejusque milites, 284. 1 

E. 

e, see ex 

ecce, in Exclamations, with Norn., 

55. 3 
ecquis, ecquid, 273. I 
edicere, with ut, 193 
edicto, Abl. Absol., 304 2. 
edocere, w. two Aec, 59 
Effecting, Verbs, of 193 
eflic€re, w. two Ace, 58; w. ut, 

or Ace. & Inf., 193. 3 
efficiens, w. Gen., 40 
egere, w. Abl., 87; w. Gen., 87. 1 
egr6di, w. ex or Abl., 53; 88 
ejus, eorum, earum, as Pos- 

sessives, 284. 3; ejus modi qui, Avith 

Subj., 236; ejusmodi ut, 190. 2 
Meeting, Verbs of, w. two Ace, 58. 4 
Elegiac Pentameter, 388—391 
eligere, w. two Ace, 58 
Elision, 357 

ementituSjW. pass. meaning,293.1 
em. ere, w. Abl., 85 
emolumento esse, 73. a 
Emotion, Verbs of, w. quod, or Ace 

& Inf., 215 
en, in Exclamations, w. Norn., 58. 3 
Endeavoring and Striving, Verbs of, 

with ut, 193 
enim and nam, 325. 1 
enimvero, 324. 5 
eo, w. ut, 190; w. Partit. Gen., 37. 1; 

to denote place, at which, 100. 1; eo 

w. ut, 192. 1 
eo animo, eo consilio, ea con- 

dicione w. xit, 192. 1 
Epenthesis, 366 

Equivalents of the Supine, 317. 2; 318.1.2 
erga, 92 

ergo, w. Gen., 29; 330. 1 
erudlre, w. Abl., 79. 3 
esse, Copulative Verb, 10; w. Gen. of 

Gerundive, 311. 4; in Ace & Inf., 259; 

w. Subject. Gen., to denote property, 

44; omitted in Put Infin., 264. 1; w. 

Dat. of purpose, 73. a; w. Dat. of pos- 



session, 70; w. an Adverb, 10. 1; w. 
Gen. of Value, 42; w. Abl. of price, 
85; w. Gen. & Abl. of quality, 30 

est, it is the case, w. ut, 191; est mihi 
nomen, 71. 3; est qui, w. Subjunct. 
238; est quod, 236. 2; 214 

et, 320. 2; after muitus, 320. 5; etis, 
et is non, 132. 2; et id, with 
Predie, 132. 3; et non, 321; to ex- 
press icithout, 314. 2; for etiain, 321. 2 

Ethical Dative, 67 

etiam, 320. 3; with Comparatives, 
125. 3; after tantum abest, 191. 1; re- 
sponsive, 279 

etiamsi, 225; 228 

etsi, 225; 228; 229. 1 

evad^re, Copul. Verb, 10; w. Abl., 
88 

evenit, w. ut, 191 

(e), ex, 93, w. Abl. instead of Partit. 
Gen., 38; to denote place from which, 
95; w. Abl. of Gerund., 314; in Com- 
pounds, 53; w. domus, 97. 1; w. labo- 
rare, 76. 1; to denote parentage, 76. 1; 
w. Verbs of Separation, 86 

Examples introduced by ut, sicut, 
231.2 

excedSre, its construction, 53; ex- 
cedere modum, 53; w. Abl., 86 

excellere, its construction, 53 

Exceptional Sequence of Tenses, 168; 
176 

Exclamations, 55; in Ace & Inf., 253. 1 

Exclamatory Questions, 274. 3 

excludere, w. Abl., 88 

exire, its construction, 53 

Existence, General expressions of, w. 
Subjunct, 238 

existimare, w. two Ace, 58; with 
Ace & Inf., 58. 6; 255 

expgdit, w. Ace & Inf., 254 

expellere, w. Abl., 88 

experiri, w. si, 275. 1 

expers, w. Gen., 39 

explorato, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 

expertus, w. pass, meaning, 293. 1 

expetere, w. Object Inf., 250 

explere, w. Abl., 87 

exsistere. Copulative Verb, 10 

exsolv6re, w, Abl., 86; 86. 2 



216 



exspectare, w. si, 275. 1 
exspectatione, Abl. of Compa- 
rison, 84. 3 
Extent, of Space, 101 
extra, 92; with Compounds of ex, 

53 
ezxitra modum prodire, 53 
extremum est, w. ixt, 191 
extremus, to denote apart, 122 

3E\ 
fac, its construction, 193. 3; tit: omit- 
ted, 193. 5; w. Subjunct. for Imperat., 
242. 2; w. ne and Subjunct. for Pro- 
hibitive, 244. 3 
facere, w. two Ace, 58; facere with 
ex, 58. 3; w. Dat., 67. 1; w. Abl. 80. 4 
w. Gen. of Value, 42; w. ut, Ace. & 
Inf., 193, 193. 3; w. Pres. Part., 301. 1; 
w. qxiodL, 212; facere non possum 
quin, 204; facere certiorem, 58. 2 
facile est, w. Ace. &Inf., 254 
faoilis, w. Dat, 65. 1; w. Sup., 318; 

w. ad and Gerund., 313. 2 
facinus est, w. Ace. &Inf., 254 
factix, regularly employed w. diffl- 

ellis, 318 
factum, w. Adverbs, 116 
fallit me, 54; nisi me fallit, 54. 1 
fama est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
familiaris, w. Gen., 65. 2 
fas est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254; fas, w. Sup. 

318 
fastitf-iosixs, w. Gen., 39 
fastidxre, w. Ace, 50 
favere, w. Dat., 64 
Fearing, Verbs of, w. ixt or ne, 195 
feeixnaLizs, w. Gen., 39. 2 
Feeling, Verbs of, w. Ace, 50. a; with, 

Ace & Inf., 261; w. qxiod., 215 
Feet, Metrical, 368 
Feigned Example in Condit. Sentence, 

221.2 
ferax, w. Gen., 39. 2 
ferre aegre, graviter, 261 
fertur, ferunt, 262 
festinare, w. Object Inf., 250 
fioelis, w. erga, 65. 3 
fiaere, w. Dat., 64; w. Abl., 78 
fides, in Exclamations, 55, 3 



fieri, Copulative Verb with two Norn., 
10; with Gen. to denote property, 44; 
as pass, of reddo, 53. 2; with Abl., 
80. 4; fieri non potest, quin, 204; fieri 
non potest ut, 204. 1 

ligere, with Abl., 99] 

Figures of Prosody, 357 — 367 

tlllam. nuptum dare, 317. 1 

Final Clauses, 188; 192; 193 

Final Syllables, their quantity, 347—349 

iingere, with Pres. Part., 301. 1 

Finite Verb in Sequence offenses, 173 

flnitlnvus, used as Substantive, 
65.1 

first part, last part, etc., how to express, 
122 

fit, with \xt, 191 

f lagitare, with two Ace, 60; with 
ut, 193 

flere, with Ace, 50. a 

floeci, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 

florere, its construction, 53 

fore ut, for Fut. Inf., 255. 4 

Forgetting, Verbs of, with Gen., 41 

the former, .the latter, 131 

Former Supine, 317 

forte, with Conditional Particles, 
223.4 

fraudare, with Abl., 87 

fraude, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 

frequens, in Appos., 21 

fretxxs, with Abl., 78 

frixi, with Abl., 90; fruendus, 315. 3 

fugiens, with Gen., 40 

fu.glt, with Ace, 54 

fungi, with Abl., 90; in Gerundive 
construction, 315. 3 

Future, 155; in compound sentences, 
162; instead of Imper., 245; Fut. Perf., 
158; denoting certainty, 163. 1; in 
compound sentences, 162; denoting 
simultaneous accomplishment, 163; 
with antequam, priixs- 
qiiam, 210; Fut. Perf. Pass., its 
Subjunctive, 175. 1; Fut. Imperat, 
242; in legal phrases, 292. 4; Fut. In- 
fin. expressed by fore, fu.tixru.rin 

• esse ut, 255- 4; 257; with Verbs of 
Moping, Promising, 264. 1; Fut. Part. 
Act, 290; denoting purpose, 299; Putt 



_ 217 _ 



Part. Pass., 291; Put. Part, in Abl. 
Absol., 304; Fut. Perf. Inf., 258; Fut. 
Inf. Pass., 257. 1; 317. 1 
futurum esse with ut, 255. 4; 
191; 257 

O. 

gaudere, with Abl., 261; with Ace. 
k Inf., or quod., 215 

gavisus, with force of Present, 293 

gemere, with Ace, 50. a 

Gender of Attributive Adjective, 22; of 
Predicate, 8—12 

General Value, in the Gen., 42; 85 

Genitive, 26—48; Subjective, 27; Ob- 
jective, 28; Partitive, 31—38; with Ad- 
jectives, 39; in Apposition to Posses- 
sive, 128. 2; with causa, gratia, 
ergo, 29; of Charge and Penalty, 
43; with Impersonals, 45; with in- 
terest, 46; 47; with Participles, 
40; Gen. & Dat. of Possession, how to 
be distinguished, 71.1; equivalent to 
Predic. Adjective, 44. 2; in the Predi- 
cate, 49. 2. 3; of Quality, 30; to ex- 
press how old, 109; to denote time how 
long, 104. 2; with Verbs of Beminding 
and Forgetting, 41; with esse and 
f iSri, to denote property, 44; with 
Verbs of Accusing, 43; with Verbs of 
Valuing, 42; of Gerundive with es- 
se, 311. 4; of Personal Pronoun w. 
Gerundive, 311. 1 

Gentile Adjectives used as Substantives, 
118. 1; to denote origin, 98. 2 

se gerSre, with Adverbs, 58. 8 

Gerund and Gerundive, 306—316; Syn- 
opsis, 314. 3; Gerund, its cases and 
government, 306; with Dat., 72; chang- 
ed into Gerundive, 307; 303; in Se- 
quence of Tenses, 173; with est, In- 
die, w. force of Subjunct., 178; Geniti- 
ve, 310; 311; Dative, 312; Accus., 313; 
with ad, 316. 2; Abl., 314; Gerundi- 
ve and Perf. Part. Pass., 309; Neuter 
with est, 315. 1; denoting future 
action, 162. 1; Gerundive of utor, 
fruor, ftuigor, 315. 3; its parti- 
cipial use, 315; as Predicate Accus., 316; 
inAcc,&Inf, % 260; in Abl. Absol., 314. 



1; Synopsis, of all the cases of Gerund 

and Gerundive, 3i4. 3 
gestire, with Object Inf., 250 
glgni, with Abl., 76. 1 
Giving & Putting, Verbs of. 70 
gloriari, with Abl., 77; 78 
Glyconic Verse, 395. 4 
gnarus, with Gen., 39 
gratia and causa, with Gen., 29 
gratlam habere, gratias agere, with 

quod, 261. 1 
gratvilari, with quod., 261. 1 
gratus, with Dat-, 65 
gravari, with Object Inf., 250 
gravis, with Dat, 65 
gravlter ferre, with Ace. & Inf., 261 

H. 

habere, with two Ace, 58; 58. 5; 
with Gen. of Value, 42; with Dative of 
Purpose, 73. b; religion! ha- 
bere, 73. 1; with i/eri. Part., 293. 2; 
habere quod with Subj., 214; 
236; habere in animo with Obj. Inf., 
250.2 

haberi, with two Norn., 10; 58. 5; 
with Ace. & Inf., 259 

habeto, know, 240. 1 

haesitare, with an, 278 

Happening, V r erbs of, with quod, 212 

haud seio an, 278 

liei, in Exclamations, 55. 2 

Heroic Verse, 384 

heu, in Exclamations, 55 

Hexameter, 374; 384—387 

Hiatns, 358 

hie, its use, 129; 130; changed toille 
in Oratio Obllqua, 283. 2; hie, in histo- 
rical Narrative, 129. 2 

hie, hinc, hue, 129. 3 

Hindering, Verbs of, w. quominUs, 
202; with ad and Gerund., 313. 2 

Historical Tenses, 148, 186; Historical 
Present, 150; its sequence of tenses, 
170; in sentences w. euro., 205. 1; 
Historical Inf., 153. 2 

hoc, w. Partit Gen., 35 

hodiernus, in Apposition. 21 

honestum est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 

honestus, w. Sup., 318 



— 218 — 



Hoping, Verbs of, w. Fut. Inf., 255. 4; 

Subject to be expressed, 264. 1 
Horace Metres of, 398—398 
horrere, w. Ace, 50. a 
hortari, w. ut, 193 
Hortatory, Subjunctive, 184 
nortatu, Alb. of Cause, 77. 3 
Hours of the day, 103. 3 
How old? 109 
lino, w. Partit. Gen., 37. 1; to denote 

place at which one arrives, 100. 1 
humus, used like name of town, 97 
Hypothetical Sentences, 220 



Iambic Strophe, 397. 15 

Iambic Trimeter, 392—394 

id, w. Partit. Gen., 35 

id. agere, w. ut, 193 

id genus, used adverbially, 57; id 

temporis, 57 
id quod, referring to a sentence, 

23.1 
idcirco, 362. 2 
Ideal Second Person, 180 
idem, its use, 134 
idem qiui, in Ace. & Inf., 266 
idem, w. ae or Relative Pronoun, 

320.8 
ideo, idcirco, w. ut following, 192.1; 

its use, 326. 2 
idoneus, w. ad, 65. 3; w. qui & 

Subjunct., 236 
Idus, 400 
igxtur, 326. 1 
ignarus, w. Gen., 39; without one's 

knowledge, 314. 2 
ignorare, w. Ace. & Inf., 255 
Illative Conjunctions, 326 
ille, its use, 129; in Oratio Obllqua, 

283.1 
illio, illuc, illino, 129. 3 
illudSre, its construction, 69. 4 
imbuere, w. Abl., 79. 3 
immSmor, w. Gen., 39 
immo, 280. 1 
impedimento esse, 73. a 
impedire, w. ne, quominus 

194; w. quominus, 202 
jmpellere, w. ut, 193 



impendSre operam, w. Dak of 

Gerund, 312 
imperare, w. Dat, 64; w. ut, 193 

w. Ace. & Inf., 193. 2 
Imperative, 240—245; denoting future 

action, 162. 1; replaced by Future, 

155.1 
Imperative Sentences in Oratio Obllqua, 

282. Ill 
imperator, in Abl. Absol., 305 
Imperfect, 152; in Letter- Writing,154.1; 

of intended action, 153. 1; Imperf. Ind. 

in Unreal Conditions, 221. 3; Imperf. 

Subjunct. not affected by preceding 

Pres., 171; instead of Pluperf. Subj. 

in Unreal Conditions, 221. 5; as 

Potential, 182 
imperitus,w. Gen., 39 
Impersonate, w. Ace, 54; w. Ace. and 

Gen., 45; w. Ace. & Inf., 254; Impers. 

Passive, 64. 2; Impers. construction, 

in Ace. & Inf., 263. 1 
Impetrare, w. ut, 193 
implere, w. Abl., 87; w. Gen., 87. 1 
implicari, w. Abl., 79. 5 
imponSre, w. Dat., 69; w. iu and 

Ace, 99. 1; w. Gerundive, 316 
imprim^re, w. Abl., 99 
imprudens, w. Gen., 39; in Appo- 
sition w. force of an Adverb, 21; with- 
out one's knowledge, 314. 2 
impulsus, w. Abl., 77. 2 
imus, to denote apart, 122 
iu, 94; in Compounds w. Ace., 53; w. 

Dat., 69, 69. 1; to denote place, 95; w. 

Ace. to denote time for how long, 108; 

w. Abl. after Verbs of motion, 99; w. 

the Ace. to denote the place where? 

100; w. domus, 97. 1; w. Abl. of 

G 314'ernud 
inanis, w. Gen., 39; w. Abl. 87 
incertum est, w. an, 278 
incidere, w. in and Ace, 69. 2; w. 

Abl., 99 
ineipere, w. Object Inf., 250 
incitare, w. ut, 193 
Inclination, Adjectives of, w. in, adver- 

sus, erga, 65. 3 
ineredibllis, w. Sup., 318 
incumlbere, w. in, 69. 1 



219 — 



incurr^re, w. in, 69. 2 
incusare, w. Gen., 43 
Indefinite Pronouns, 142—146 
Index to the Metres of Horace, 398 
Indicative, 177—180; in expression of 
power, obligation, necessity, for En- 
glish Potential, 178; after general Rela- 
tives, 180; after Temporal Conjunc- 
tions, 158; in Apodosis of Unreal Ques- 
tions, 221. 3 
indigere, w. Abl., 87; w. Gen., 87.1 
indJLgnari, w. Ace. & Inf., 261 
indigne ferre, w. Ace. & Inf., 261 
indignnm est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
indignus, w. Abl., 89; w. qui & 

Subjunct, 236 
Indirect Object, 63 

Indirect Questions, 165, 239, 238; to be 

distinguished from Relative Sentences 

and Direct Questions, 268. 2: Indirect 

Simple Questions, 275 

Indirect Reflexive, 285 

ind.ii.eSre, w. Pres. Partie, 301. 1; 

in animum inducere, w. Inf., 250. 2 
incLuere, twofold construction, 70 
in eo est, w. nt, 191. 2 
inesse, w. in, 69. 1 
inferre, w. Dat., 69; w. in, €9. 2 
infestus, w. Prepos., 65. 3 
infidns, w. Prepos., 65.3 
inflmus, to denote ^part, 122 
Infinitive, 246—267; as Subject of the 
sentence, 8. 1; 248; as Object, 250; as 
Subject & Predicate, 248. 1; its tenses, 
246; in Sequence of Tenses, 173; re- 
garded as single part of speech, 284; 
after Verbs of Perceiving and Declar- 
ing, 256; after Verbs of Wishing and 
Willing, 193. 1; after interest, 47; 
Historical Inf., 153. 2 
infinitum est, w. force of Poten- 
tial, 179. 1 
intra, 92; w. Abl. of Measure, 83 
ingratus, w. Dat., 65 
ingrScLi, its construction, 53 
inimicus, w. Dat, 65. 1; used as 

Substantive, 65. 1; w. Prepos., 65. 3 
iniquus, w. Prepos., 65. 3 
inire, its construction, 53 
injice>e, its construction. 69, 69. 2 



injncixnd.iis, w. Dat., 65 
injiingere, w. Dat, 69 
injnria, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 
inops, w. Gbti., 39 
inquam, its use, 281. 1 
insciens, inscius, w. Gen., 39; 

without one's knowledge, 314. 2 
inscrib^re, w. two Ace, 58. 1; w. 

Abl., 99 
inscnlpSre, w. Abl., 99 
insimulare, w. Gen., 43 
insolens, w.Gen., 39 
instar, w. Gen., 29. 1 
institnSre, w. Object Inf., 250; w. 

Abl., 79. 3: institul, as Pass, of 

docere, 59. 1 
instrnere, w. Abl., 79. 3 
insuetus, w. Gen., 39 
insultare, w. Dat. or in & Ace. 

69.4 
intellecto, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 
intellegSre, w. two Ace, 58. 1; w. 

Ace & Inf., 255; intellegi, with 

Norn. & Inf., 263. 3 
intendSre, w. Object Inf., 250 
inter, 92; in Compounds w. Dat., 69; 

inter nos, vos, 288; w. Gerund, 313. 1 
intercedSre, w. Dat., 69 
intercludgre, w. Abl., 86, 86. 2 
interdicSre, w. Abl., 86. 2; with 

ne, 194 
interesse, w. Dat., 69 
interest, w. Gen., 46, 47; w. Subject 

Inf., 248; interest inter, w. Inf., 313. 3 
intermittSre, w. Object Inf., 250; 

nihil intermittere, w. qiiin, 204 
interpretari, w. two Ace, 58. 1 
interrogare, w. two Ace, 62 
Interrogative Adverbs, 270 
Interrogative Particles, 271; omitted 

274.3 
Interrogative Pronouns, 141, 270; not 

agreeing with the Predicate, 25. 1 
Interrogative Sentences, 268—280; in 

Oratio Obllqua, 282. III.; w. interest, 

47 
intervallum, w. Abl., 102 
intervenire, w. Dat., 69 
intra, 92; to denote time within which 

106; w. Ordinal Numeral, 106- 1 



220 — 



Intransitive Verbs, w. Dat, 64; with 
Ace, 51; of motion becoming transi- 
tive by composition, 52, 53; in En- 
glish equivalent to Latin Transitives,50 

inutilis, w. ad, 65. 3 

invad^re, its construction, 53, 69. 2 

in venire, w. two Ace, 58. 1; in- 
venlri, w. Nom, & Inf., 263. 3; inveni- 
untur, qui, w. Subjunct, 236 

inventu, 318 

inviuere, w. Dat., 64; invideo laudi 
tuae, 64. 4 

invicLIae esse, as Pass, of invidere, 
64.5 

invltus, as Apposition, 21 

ipse, its use, 135; w. Pers. Pronoun, 
136; w.Possessives, 136.1; for Reflexive 
Pronoun, 287; in Oratio Obllqua, 283. 
V; ipse quoque, 136. 2 

irasci, w. Dat., 64 

ire, becomes Transitive by composi- 
lion, 52; w. Ace. (iter), 51. a; w. Su- 
pine, 317. 1 

irridere, its construction, 69. 4 

irruex^e, w. in, 69. 2 

is, its use, 132; is qui, w. Subjunct, 
236; is w. ut, 190; in Oratio Obll- 
qua, 283. V; ii quiaudiunt, legunt, &c, 
hearers, readers, 297. 2 

isque, 132. 2 

iste, its use, 129 

istic, istinc, istuc, 129. 3 

ita, w. ut, 190; ita non ut, so little that 
191.1; ita w. Subjunct. and ut, 231.3; 
ita est, Responsive, 279 

itaque, 326. 1 

item,w.same predicate or attribute ,134 

Iterative Action, use of Tenses, 161 

«T. 

;$am<llu, w. Present, 150. 1 
jubere, w. Ace, 64.6; w. Ace. & Inf., 

193. 2; 259; w. ut, 259.2; w. Inf. Act. 

259. 1; juberi, w. Nom. & Inf., 259. b 
jucundus, w. Dat., 65; w. Supine, 

318 
judex, in Abl. Absol., 305 
jucLioare, w. two Ace, 58; w. Ace. 

& Inf., 58. 6; 255; judicari, w. Nom. & 

Inf., 368 



juuiolo, Abl. of Limitation, 80. 3 
jure, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 
juris consultus, juris peritus, 39. 1 
jussu, Abl. of Cause, 77. 3 
just, just as many, 135 
justunx est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
juvare, w. Ace, 64. 6 
juvat, w. Subject Inf., 248 
juxta, 92 



Kalendae, 400 

Kara cvveav, 11 

to keep in the dark, 59- 4 

laoorare, w. Abl., 77; w. ut, 193 
laborem impertire, w. Dat. Gerun- 
dive, 312 
lactari, w. Abl., 77; w. Ace & Inf., 

or quod, 261 
laetus, w. Abl., 77 
lamentari, w. Ace, 50. a 
Latin Authors, 415 
the latter, .the former, 131 
Latter Supine, 318 
lege, Abl., of Manner, 82. 1 
Lesser Ionics, 397. 19 
Letter Writing, Tenses in, 154. 1 
levare, w. Abl., 86, 86. 2 
libens, in Apposition, 21 
liber, w. Abl., 87. 1 
lioex^alis, w. erga, 65. 3 
lioerare, w. Abl., 86 
lioet, w. Subject Inf., 248 
li "bra, weight, 412 
lie ere, to be for sale, w. Abl., 85 
licet, w. force of Potential, 178; with 

Dat. or Ace & Inf., 254. 2; w. Subject 

Inf., 248 
licet (Conjunction), 225. 226; as finite 

Verb, 226. 1 
Likeness, Adjectives and Adverbs of, in 

Ace & Inf., 266 
Living Agent, in the Abl., w. a, 76 
locare, w. Abl., 85,99; w. Gerundive, 

316 
Locative Case, 96. 1 

loco, in loco, Abl. of Place, 98: 98. 1 
Logaoedic Verse, 395 



221 



Long by position, 332 

longe, w. Superlat, 125. 3; longTus, 

without quam, 84. 2 
Longs and Shorts, 329 
longum est, w. force of Potential, 

179.1 
longus, w. Ace., 101 
lucLei'e, w. Abl., 79. 5 
luuis, Abl. of Time, 103. 2 
lugere, w. Ace, 50. a 

maerere, w. Ace, 50. a; w. Abl., 77 
magis, w. Comparatives, to compare 

two qualities, 123 
magnus, replaced by magnitudo, 

101.1; magni, Gen. of Value, 42.1; mag- 

nam partem, used adverbially, 57; 

magno, Abl. ofValue, 86 
major, w. Abl., natu, older, 109. 1 
niale emere, vendere, 85. 2 
maledicSre, w. Dat., 64 
malevolus, w. Prep., 65. 3 
malle.w. Abl. of Measure, 83; w. Inf., 

193. 1; w. Object Inf., 250; w. Ace. & 

Inf., 259; malim, w. Opt. Subjunct, ( 

183.1 
mandare, w. lit, 193; w. Gerund- 
ive, 19&2 
mandatu, Abl. of Cause, 77. 3 
manere, w. two Nom., 10; w. Ace. 

or Dat, 68 
manifestum est, w. Ace. & Inf., 

254 
Material Names, their Plural, 114. 1 
maturare, w. Object Inf., 250 
matutinrts, in Apposition, 21 
maxxmam partem, adverbially, 57 
maxilmi, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 
mea, tua, sua, &e, causa, 29. 1; mea 

tua, sua, &c, interest, 48.1 
Means or Instrument, Abl. of, 79 
Measure, in the Ab'., 83; expressed by 

Gen. of Quality, 101. 1 
Measures of Length, 410; of Capacity, 

413 
mederi, w. Dat., 64. 1 
m.e<litari, w. Object Inf., 250 
medJtatus, with Pass, meaning, 

293.1 



mecLIus, in Apposition, 21; to denote 

a part, 122 
memini, w. Gen., 41; w. Ace, 41. 2; 

w. Ace. & Inf., 255; with. Pres. Inf., 

255. 3, memento, 240. 1 
memor, w. Gen., 39 
memoratu, 318 
memoria tenere, with. Pres. Inf.* 

255.3 
mente, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1; mi hi 

in meiitem venit, its construction, 41.3 
mercari, w. Abl. of Price, 85 
Metres of Horace, 396—397 
Metrical Feet, 368 
metuere, various constructions, 68; 

w. ut, ne, 195; metus est, 195 
meum est, it is my part, 44. 1 
Middle Syllables, 336—346 
I miles, in collective sense, 113 
1 in militia, 97. 2 
minari, w. Ace. & Inf. Put., 255. 4 
minlme, minlme vero, JResponsives, 

280 
minimi, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 
minimo, Abl. of Value, 85 
minimum, w. Part. Gen., 35 
| minor, w. Abl. natu, younger, 109. 1 

minoris, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 
J minus, w. Abl. of Comparison, 84. 2 
! minus, w. Part. Gen., 35 
! miraoilis, w. Supine, 318 
I mirari, w. quod, or Acc.& Inf., 261 
; miserari, w. Ace, 45. 4 
misereri, w. Gen., 45. 4 
miseret, w. Ace. & Gen., 45 
mittere, w. Dat. of Purpose, 73. c; 

w. Put. Part. Act., 299; w. Gerundive 

316. l;w. Sup.. 317 
moderari, various constructions, 68 
mocLo, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1. 3 
mouo, if only, w. Subjunct., 219 
moleste ferre, w. Ace. & Inf., 261 
molestus, w. Dat, 65 
monere, w. ut or Ace. & Inf., 193 
Money, Roman, 407—409 
Monosyllables, their Quantity, 350—352 
Months, in Roman Calendar, 399 
Moods, their uses, 177, ff.; Attraction 

of, 238 
morari,w, Object Inf,, 250 



— 222 



mos, in Abl. of Manner, 82 1; mos 

(moris) est, w. lit, 191 
motns, w. Abl., 77. 2 
movere, w. Abl., 88; w. tit, 193 
mox, w. Fut. Perf., 158. 1 
mnltare, w. Abl., 43. 2 
mnlti, w. Par tit. Gen., 34; asyndetic, 

at the end of an enumeration, 320. 4; 

multi et, 320. 5 
mxiltitiid-o, w. Par tit,. Gen., 32 
mnlto, w. Comp. & Superlat, 125.2.3 
miiltnni, w. Partit. Gen., 35 
mnta cum liq.xild.az, in prosody, 

333 

nam, 325. 1 

Name, w. nonien est, in Nom. or Dat., 
71.3 

Names of Towns, their construction, 96; 
in the Aec, to denote place, where, 
100.2 

Naming, Verbs of, w. two Ace, 58 

nasci, w. Abl., 78. 1; w. two Nom.,10 

natu, w. Adject., 80. 1 

natus, w. Ace, to express how old, 
109 

navibus, Abl. of Means, 81. 1 

ne, that not, lest, 194, 196; w. Subjunct. 
as Prohibitive, 243; in argumentation 
per exempla, £74. 2; omitted after 
cave, 194. 3; ne forte, 200; 
after Verbs of fearing, 195; ne non, 
after negative expressions of fear, 
195. 1; ne qiiis, ne ullus, necubi, 
200,142. 1; ne quisquam, 200; Nega- 
tive of Imperat., 244; w. the Potential, 
182. 1; w. the Optative, 183. 2; w. the 
Hortatory, 184.1; w. 2d person ofPres. 
Subj., 244. 1 

-ne, Interrog. Particle, 271, 272; ne. . 
an, 278 

necessarius, w. Dat, 65; used as 
Subst, 65. 1; w. ad, 65. 3 

necesse est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254; 
w. Subject Inf., 248; w. Subjunctive, 
254. 1; Indie, with force of Potential. 
178 

necne, 276. 1 

nedum, 219.1 



nefas est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254; w. Su- 
pine, 318 

negare, w. Ace. & Inf., 255 

Negative of Hortatory Subjunct., 184.1; 
of the Imperat., 244; of Optat. Sub- 
junct., 183. 2; of the Potential, 182. 1; 
in clauses of Purpose and Result, 200 

Negative Purpose, how expressed, 194 

Negative Verbs, w. quin, 204 

neglggens, w. Gen., 41 

nemo, 117; w. Partit. Gen., 34; nemo 
unquam, nemo usquam, 117; nemo est 
qui, w. Subjunct., 236 

neque, 306. 2; at the beginning of a 
Sentence, 321. 1; neque quisquam, in 
the second member ofa compound sen- 
tence, 321; neque enim, neque vero, 
&c, 321. 1; neque is, 132. 2; to express 
without, 314. 2 

neqiiire, w. Object Inf., 250 

nescire, w. Ace. &Inf., 255; nescio 
an, 278; nescio quis, 270. 1 

neuter, w. Partit. Gen., 34 

Neuter Adjectives, w. Partit. Gen., 35; 
38. 6; in the Plural, 120; in the Sing., 
as Partit. Gen., 119. 2; used as Sub- 
stant., 119; with est and Ace. & Inf., 
254; w. est and ut, 254. 3 

Neuter Pronouns or Adjectives with In- 
trans. Verbs, 51. b; used adverbially, 
55; w. interest, 47 

neve, Continuative of ne, 199, 244.2 

nihil, its oblique cases, 117; w. Part. 
Gen., 35; used adverbially, 56, 56. 1; 
nihil abest quin, 204; nihil aliud nisi, 
or quam, 223. 2; nihil antiquius habeo, 
193; nihil attinet, w. Subject Inf.. 248; 
nihil minus, Kesponsive, 280; nihil re- 
liqui facere (Partit. Gen.), 38. 8; nihil 
unquam, 117 

nihili, Gen. of Value, 42. 1; nihili fa- 
cere, 42. 3; nihilo, Abl. of Value, 85; of 
Measure, 83 

nimirum, 325. 2 

nimis, w. Part. Gen., 36 

nisi, 218, 223; not used w. concessive 
force, 223. 1; after negative sentences, 
223.2; nisi forte, 223. 4; nisi quis,142.1; 
nisi quod, 223. 3; nisi vero, 223.4; nisi, 
to express without) 314. 2 



223 — 



nitl, w. Abl., 78; w. nt, or ne, 193 

nocere, w. Dat, 64 

nolens, in Apposition, 21 

noli, w.Infin., for Prohibitive, 244. 3 

nolim, nollem, w. Optat. Sub- 
junct., 183. 1 

nolle, w. Infin., 193. 1; w. Object Inf., 
250; w. Ace & Inf., 259 

nomen mihi est, 71. 3 

nominare, w. two Ace, 58 

nominari, w. two Nom., 10 

Nominative w. Inf., 259. b; 262 

Nominative Case of the Subject, 5; Case 
of Predicate,10; in exclamations, 55.3, 
Nominative Absolute in English equi- 
valent to Abl. Ab3ol. in Latin, 303 

non, Continuative of nonne, 274. 1 ; 
non ita, Responsive, 280; non modo 
non. .sed etiam, 327. 2; non quia, with 
Subjunct, 215. 2; non quin, with Sub- 
junct, 215. 2; non quo, non quod, av. 
Subj.,215.2 

Nonae, 400 

nonne, 271—274; after Verba of ask- 
ing, 275 

nonnulli, w. Partit Gsn., 34 

nostri, vestri, Objective Gen., 28. 3; 
nostrum, vestrum, Partit. Gen., 28. 3 

nubSre, w. Dat, 66. 1; nuptum col- 
locare, 317. 1 

nudare, w. Abl., 87 

nxxdLns, w. Abl., 87.1 

nuirixs, w. Partit. Gen., 34; nullo, 
Abl. of Manner, without, 82. 2 

num, 271-273; in indirect simple ques- 
tions, 275 

Number of Attributive Adj., 22; of Pre- 
dicate, 8—12 

Numerals w.Par tit. Gen., 34; in Relative 
Clauses, 138 

numerare, w. two Ace, 58; with 
Abl., 99 

numerus, w. Partit. Gen., 32 

numquid, 273. 1 

nu.no, changed to turn, tunc, in Oratio 
obllqua, 283. V. 2 

nnntiare, w. in & Ace, 100.1; nun- 
tiato, Abl. Absol., 304. 2; nuntiatum 
est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 

nusqnam, w. Partit Gen., 37 



O. 

O, in exclamations, 55 

o o, 92, 77. 3; in compound Verbs, with 

Dat., 69; w. Ace. Gernnd., 313 
obesse, w. Dat., 64, 69 
ooire, w. Ace, 53 
Object, becomes Subject in Passive con- 
struction, 49. 1 
Object Infinitive, 250 
Objective Genitive, 28 
otojioe.x'e, w. Dat, 69 
oolivisoi, w. Gen. or Ace, 41; with 

Ace. & Inf., 255 
oboedlre, w. Dat., 64 
olbrepere, w. Dat., 69 
obseerare,w. ut, 193 
obsequi, w. Dat., 64 
obsistere, w. ne, 194; w. qno- 

minus, 202 
obstare, w. ne, 194; w. quomi- 

nxis, 202 
obtemperSre, w. Dat., 64 
obtrectare, w. Dat., 64 
obversari, w. Dat., 69 
occultare, w. Abl., 195 
occumbSre mortem, 69. 4 
ocLi, its Passive, 73. 1 
odio esse, 73. 1 
odLiosns, w. Dat., 65 
offieere, w. Dat., 64; w. ne, 194; 

w. quominus, 202 
older, 109. 1 
olere, w. Ace, 50. b 
Omitting, Verbs of, w. qnin, 204 
the one. .the other, hie. .ille, 131. 1 
onerare, w. Abl., 87 
oneri esse,73.a; oneri ferendo esse,312 
onnstus, w. Abl., 87. 1 
opera alicujus, to denote the person 

considered as means, 79 
operant dare, w. ut, 193; with 

Dat. of Gerund., 312 
opinari, w. Ace & Inf. , 255 
opinio est, w. Ace &Inf.. 254 
opinione, Abl. of Limitation, 80. 3; 

w. Compar., 84. 3 
oportet, w. Ace & Inf., 254; with 

Subjecting, 248; w. Subjunct, 254.1; 

denoting future action, 162. 1; Indie, 

w. force of Potential, 178 



— 224 



oppIcLum, in Apposition w. names 

of towns, 98. 4. 5 
oppongre, w. Dat, 69 
Opposing, Verbs of, w. ne, and quomi- 

nus, 194: 
optare, w. ixt, 193 
Optative Subjunctive, 183 
optimus, w. Supine, 318 
opus est, w. Abl., 88; w. Subject Inf., 

248; w. Infin. or Perf. Part., 88.1; w. 

Supine 318 
orare, w. two Ace, 61; w. ut, 193 
Oratio Obliqua, 281—288; oratio recta 

changed into oratio obliqua, 282 
orbare, w. Abl., 87 
orbxis, w. Abl., 87. 1 
Ordinal, to denote time how long since, 

107 
ordine, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 
orixi, w. Abl., 76. 1 
oriund-Tis a, to denote birthplace. 

96.2 
ornare, w. Abl. of Means, 79. 3 
ostendSre, w. Ace. &Inf., 255 

I*. 

in pace, 97. 2 

paoto, Abl. Absol., 304. 2 

paene, with Indie, 180. 2; in Unreal 
Conditions, 221. 3 

paenitet, w. Ace. & Gen., 45; with 
Subject Inf., 248 

par, w. Dat., 65; w. Gen., 65. 5; par, 
parxter, w. ac, atque, 320. 7; pal- 
est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254; par est, Indie, 
w. force of Potential, 178 

parare, w. Object Inf., 250 

parcere, w. Dat, 64. 1; not used in 
Perf. Pass., 64. 5 

parere, w. Dat., 64 

pars, w. Partit. Gen., 32 

Fart, it is the, Property, how expressed 
44.1 

Parts of the body, in the Abl., 82. 1 

particeps, w. Gen., 39 

Participles, 289—301; in Apposition, 
21; of Passives in the Predicate, 9. 4; 
of Deponent Verbs, 292; distinction of 
tenses, 290; used attributively, 294; 
appositively, 296—301; w. force of 



Relative Clauses, 297; denoting Cause, 
Condition, Concession, 298; w. Nega- 
tives, 298. 1; denoting Time, 298; for 
Causal Abl., 77. 3; equivalent to co-or- 
dinate Clause with and, out, 300; re- 
garded as single part of speech, 284; 
Passive Participles, w. the meaning of 
a verbal noun, 301; in Sequence of 
Tenses, 173; Participium necessitatis, 
291; w. q.izam.vis, 229.2; Present 
Partic.,290; w. Gen., 40; after Verbs 
of perception, 255. 2; 301. 1; in Abl. 
Absol., 303. 1; Perfect Partic. Pass., 
291; in Abl. Absol., 303.1; its difference 
from Gerundive, 309; w. habere, te- 
nere, 293.2; used as Substantive, 116; 
Perfect Active Participle, supplied, 
297. 1; 303.1 

Partitive Genitive, 31—38; when not ad- 
missible, 35. 1 

parti trus, w. pass, meaning, 293. 1 

parum, w. Partit. Gen.. 36 

parvi, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 

parvo, Abl. of Price, 86 

Passive Verbs, w.Gen. in the Predicate, 
44. 3; Passive of Verbs of teaching, 
59. 1; w. Dat. of Agent, 72. 1; Passive 
of dicunt, tradunt, w. Nom. & Infin., 
262; w. Ace. & Inf., 254 

pati, w. Ace. & Inf., 259. c 

patieris, w. Gen., 40 

paixci, w. Partit. Gen., 34 

paulo, Abl. of Measure, 83; w. Com- 
parative, 125. 2 

paixlum, w. Partit. Gen., 35 

ped-Itoixs, Abl. of Manner, 81.1 

pellSre, w. Abl., 83, 86. 1 

pendere, w. Gen. of Value, 42 

pendere animi, 39. 3 

penes, 92 

Pentameter, 374, 398 

per, 92; denoting Manner, 79. 1; Time 
how long, 104. 1; in compounds with 
Ace, 52; to denote the Person con- 
sidered as Means,79; per ixxe stat 
w. quominus, 202. 2 

Perceiving, Verbs of, w. Ace. & Inf., 255 

Perception, Verbs of, w. Pres. Partic. 
255. 2; 301. 1 

perd.xtu.m ire, 317, 1 



225 — 



Perfect, its use, 151; Perfect Definite in 
Sequence of tenses, 167; Perf. Indie, in 
Unreal Conditions, 221. 3; Peif. Pass., 
often Present in sense, 151. 1 
perfic^re, w. ut, 193 
perfrui, w. Abl., 90 
perlungi, w. Abl., 90 
perg^re, w. Object Inf., 250 
perhaps, forte, not fortasse, 223.4 
perioulum. est, w. ut or ne, 195 
perinde, w. ae, atque, 320.7 
Periphrastic Conjugation, 157; repre- 
senting the Fut. Subjunctive, 175 
perlre = interfici, w. Abl., 75 
perituSjW. Gen., 39 
permisso, Abl. Absol., 304.2 
permittere, w. ut, 193, 193.1; w. 

Gerundive, 316 
Permitting and Allotting, Verba of, w. 

ut, 193 
permovere, w. ut, 193 
perseverare, w. Object Inf., 250 
Personal and Impersonal construction 

in oratio obllqua, 263. 4 
Personal Names w. nemo, 117 
Personal Pronouns, their uses, 128; not 
expressed, 128; their Gen. Plur., 28.5; 
in Ace. & Inf., 264; with Gerundive, 
311.1 
Persons, of the Subject, 16; of the Pre- 
dicate, 6. 7; of the Relative, 24. 2 
perspectus, w. Dat, 72 
perspiciiuni est, w. Ace. & Inf., 

254 
persuadere, w. Dat., 64. 1; with 
Ace. & Inf., 64. 3; w. \it or Aec. & 
Inf., 193, 193.3 
perterritus, w. Abl., 77. 2 
per venire, w. in & Ace, 100 
petere, w. Ace, 61, 62; w. ut, 193 
Pherecratean Verse, 395. 3 
piget, w. Ace & Gen., 45; w. Subject 

Inf., 248 
Place, 95— 100; expressed by Abl., 98; 
whither, by in w. Abl., 99; where, by 
in w. Ace, 100 
placere, w. Dat., 64 
placet, w. Subject Inf., 248; w. Ace 

& Inf., 254 
Plenty and Want, in Abl-, 87 ' 



plenus, w. Gen., 39 

Pluperfect, 154; in Letter-writing, 154.1; 

after postquam, 160. 1 
Plural, used for Singular, 114; of Proper 
Names, 115; of the Predicate w. Col- 
lective Nouns, 11; w. Subject in Singu- 
lar w. cum and another Substant., 11.2 
plurimi, Gen. of Value, 42. 1 
plurimo, Abl. of Price, 85 
plurimum, w. Partit. Gsn., 35 
pluris, G3n. of Value, 42.1; compara- 
tive price, 85. 1 
plus, w. Partit. Gen., 35; w. Abl. of 

Comparison, 84. 2 
Poetical Forms, 328—398 
Polysyndeton, 320. 6 
pone, 92 

ponSre, w. in. and Abl., 99 
poscere, w. two Ace, 60 
Position, in Prosody, 332 
Positive, its special uses, 118—123 
posse, w. Object Inf., 250; in Ace & 
Inf., w. force of Fut., 255. 4; possum, 
in the Indie, w. force of Potential, 178 
Possessives omitted, 128; position, 128.1; 
w. G.n. in Apposition, 128. 2; for Sub- 
jective Gen., 28. 4; w. Numerals for 
Partit. G3U., 38. 5 
post, 92; to denote Time how long 
after, 105. 2; w. Abl. of Measure, 83; 
with Fut. Perf., 156. 1; in Compound 
Verbs w. Dat., 69 
posteaquam, postquam,w. 
Perf. and Present, 160; with Imp erf., 
160.2 
posterxtas, used for posteri, 11 
postponere, w. Dat., 69 
postulate, w. a, 60; w. G3n., 43; 

w. ut, 193 
Potential Subjunctive, 182 
potiri, w. Abl., 90; w. Gen., 90. 2 
prae, 93; in compounds w. Dat., 69; 

to express Preventing Cause, 77. 4 
se praeoere, w. two Ace, 58 
praecedSre, w. Ace. or Dat., 53 
praeceptor, in Abl. Absol., 305 
praeeipere, w. ut, 193 
praeditus, w. Abl., 87. 1 
praeesse, w. Dat., 69; w. Dat. Ge- 
rund, 312 



226 



praeferre, w. Dat., 69 

praelicSre, w. Dat., 69 

praesertim eilm, w. Subjunct., 
217 

praesidere, w. Dat., 69 

praestare, with. Dat., 53; se prae- 
stare, w. two Ace, 58; in a good sense 
only, 58. 8; praestare, w. Abl. of 
Measure, 83 

praestat, w. Subject Inf., 248 

praeter, 92; in compounds w. Ace, 
52 

praeterii?e, w. Ace, 52 

praeterit, w. Ace, 54 

nihil praetermitto, w. c^nin, 
204 

praetor, in Abl. Absol., 305; for in 
praetura, 110 

Praising, Verbs of, w. <xnod, 261. 1 

precari a dis & deos, 61; w. ut, 193 

Predicate, 4, 6—16; its agreement in 
Number with two or more nouns, 12; 
agreeing w. the Apposition, 19. 1; of a 
Collective Substantive, 11; its Gender, 
w. two or more Subjects, 13—15; Per- 
son, 16; same Predicate introduced by 
item, 134. 1; in Ace and Inf., 252; 
Predicate Adjective, introduced by ut, 
254.3 

Prepositions, w. Ace, 92; w. Abl., 93; 
w. Ace & Abl., 94; used adverbially, 
100. 3; repeated w. certain Verbs, 69.1; 
53; to denote Time, 103. 1; two Prep, 
belonging to the same Substant. ,100.3; 
omitted in denoting Time, 103. 2; for 
Partit. Gen., 38. 1; for Objective Gen., 
28.2 

Present, its use, 149; Historical w. force 
of Perf., 149; its Sequence of Tenses, 
170. 1; without influence upon Imperf. 
Subjunct., 171 

Preventing, Verbs of, with ne, 194; 
quominus, 202; qnin, 204 

Price, in the Abl., 85 

pridie, w. Gen. or Ace, 401 

primo, primum, 21. 2 

primus, in Apposition, 21; to de- 
note apart, 122 

Principal Clause,V&k\ in Oratio Obllqua, 



Principal Latin Authors, 415 

Principal Tenses, 148, 166 

prior, in Appos., 21 

prinsqiiam, 208—210 

privare, w. Abl., 87 

pro, 93, 67. 2 r in exclamations, 55. 4; 

pro niliilo putare, 42. 3 
probatur mihi aliquid, 72. 2 
procumbere, 69. 2 
prodesse, w. Dat., 61, 64 
prodest, w. Ace & Inf., 254 
prod.it am est, w. Ace & Inf., 254 
profieisei, pedibus, navi, 79. 5 
prolxioere, w. Abl., 86, 86. 2; with. 

Inf., 259. 2; w. quomiiiiis, 202; 

w. ne, 194 
Prohibitions, how to express, 243 
proinde, 326. 3; w. ac, atqile, 

320. 7; proinde ac si, quasi, 

230 
Promising, Verbs of, w. Put. Inf., 255.4; 

Subject to be expressed, 264. 1 
Pronouns, their uses, 128 — 146; Personal 

128; Possessive for Gen.Subject., 28.3; 

Demonstrative, 129; Determinative, 

132; Relative, 137; Interrogative, 141; 

Indefinite,142; their agreement,23— 26; 

in Oratio Obllqua, 282, V 
prope, 92 

Proper Names, their Plural, 115; quali- 
fied by Adjectives, 123 
properare, w. Object Inf., 250 
Property, expressed by Gen., 44 
propinqnns, used as Substantive, 

65.1 
propior, propius, w. Ace., 65.6 
proponere, w. Dat., 69; with Ge 

rundive, 316 
proprins, w. Gen., 65. 7 
propter, 92; 77. 3 
propter^a, 326. 2 
Prosody, 328 
prospicSre, w. Dat. or Ace, 68; 

w. tit, 193 
Protasis, 220 

providere, w. ut, 193 
provisus, w. Dat., 72 
proximum est, w. ut, 191 
prudens, in Appos., 21; w.Gen., 39; 

w. in, 39. 1 



22 



pudet, w. Ace. & Gen., 45; w. Sub- 
ject Inf., 248 

puer, in Abl. Absol., 305 

pulelxrum est, w. Ace. & Inf., 
254 

Purpose or End, expressed by Dat., 73.a; 
by ut, ne, 192; by the Gerund with 
ad, 316. 2; Purpose and Result, con- 
structions of, 196 

putare, w. two Ace, 58; w. Abl., 99; 
w. Gen. ofValue,42; w. Acc.&Inf., 58.6; 
258; after quod, 211.1; putares, 
Potential Subjunct., 182 

putari, w. two Norn., 10; 58. 5 

Pythiamliic strophe, 397, 16. 17 

Q. 

quaouiique ratione, Abl. of 
Manner, 146. 1 

quaer^re, its construction, 62 

quaeso, w. the Imperat, 242. 1 

quaestui habere, 73. 1 

quae tua prudentia est, 
139. 2 

Quality, expressed by Gen. or Abl., 30 

quam, after a Comparative w. a Ne- 
gative, 223. 2; left out in Comparison, 
84; of Time how long after, 105. 3; in 
Ace. w. Inf., 266; quam multi, 
270.2; with Superl., 125. 3; quam 
qui, after Compar., with Subjunct., 
236 1; quam \\% w. Subj., 190. 1; 
quam ut is, after Compar., 236.1 

quamobrem, 270.4 

quamquam, 225, 229; at the be- 
ginning of a sentence, 229.1 

quam vis, 225, 226; w. Adjective or 
Adverb, 229. 2 

quando, 206 

quandoquidem, w. Indie, 216 

Quantity, 329—356; of Compounds, 353; 
of final syllables. 348—349; of middle 
syllables, 336 — 346; of monosyllables, 
350-352 

quantum vis, 225; 223 

quan.tus,w. Superl., 125. 3; quan- 
ti,Gjn. of Value, 42.1; 85.1; quan- 
to. tanto, the. .the, Abl. of Mea- 
sure, 83; quantum, with Partit. 
Gen., 35 



quare, 270. 4 

quasi, 230; in abbreviated Compari- 
sons, 231.1; with quisquam, ullus, 143; 
w. Partic, 230.2 

-que, 320. 1 

quemaumouum, w. Indie., 231; 
quern vocant, 297. 2 

queri, w. Ace, 50. a; w. Ace. & Inf., 
or quod, 261 

Question and Answer, 279,280; Question 
expressing Surprise, 274. 3. S^e In- 
terrogative Sentences 

qui, quod? 141; as Subst, 141. 1; 
qui = cum ego, w. Subj. 234; = ut 
ego, 233; == ut is, denoting Result, 233; 
qui non, to express without, 314.2; 
q\vx = quo modo, 270. 3- qui 
dioltui?, inscribitur, vocatur, 297.2 

quia, w. Ind., 211 

quicunque, 146; w. Partit. Gen., 
34 

quid.? its use, 141, 270. 1; w. Predicate 
of masc. or fern, gender, 25. 1; quid 
and qxiod, with Partit. Gen., 35; 
quid hoc si oi vult ? G7. 1 

quidam, 144; w. quasi, 144. 1 

quidem, w. Relat. & Subjunct, 235 

quidni, 270.4 

quirt, w. Subjunct., 203; after non recu- 
sare, 202. 1; 270. 4; to express without 
314. 2; with Pres. Indie for Imperat. 
242.3 

quippe qui, w. Subjunct., 234. 1 

quire, w. Obj. Inf., 250 

quis, 141, 142; after ne num, 273. 1; 
quis est qui, w. Subjunct., 236; quis, 
with Partit. Gsn., 34 

quispiam, 142 

quisquam, 143; w. Part. Gen., 34; 
in Rhetorical Questions, 277. 1 

quisque, 145. 1; w. Partit. Gen., 
34 

quisquis, 146; w. Partit. Gen., 34; 
w. Indie, 180 

quo, w. Partit. Gen.. 37. 1; to denote 
Place, at which, 101.1; quo.eo, 
the. .the, Abl. of Measure, 83; quo = 
ut eo,w. Subjunct., 201 

quoad, w. Ind. & Subj., 207; quoad 
ejus fieri potest, 37. 2 



228 



qiiod., w. Indie, 211; w. Subj., 215. 1; 

at the beginning of sentences, 139. 1; 

213; w. Verbs oi Emotional', w.Part. 

Gen., 37. 2; quod (quoad) facgre pos- 

sum,37.2; quod sciam, 235; quod supra 

diximus, 297. 2 
quodsi, 139. 1; 220 
qiioiriiiiiis = ut eo minus, 201 
quoniam, w. Indie, 216 
quoque, 320. 3 
qiiot, 270. 2 
qruotiens, to denote iterative action 

161 
qiiotqnot, w. Indie, 180 
qiiotiisqiiisqiie, w. Part. Gen., 

34; quotusquisque est qui, w. Subj., 

236, in 

raptum ire, 317. 1 

rather, expressed by Compar., 124 
ratione, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1 
ratns, w. force of Present, 293. 1 
re indicta, incognita, 302 
recipere tecto, 39. 5 
Reciprocal Pronouns, 288 
recordari, w. Gan., 41; w. Ace & 

Inf., 255 
recusare, w. ne, 194, 194. 1 
reddere, w. two Ace, 58; used with 

Adjectives only, 58. 2; not used in the 

Passive for fio, 58. 2 
redLimere, w. Abl., 85 
redolere, w. Ace, 50.b 
rediiiidLare, w. Abl., 87 
refercire, w. Abl., 87 
refert, w. Gan., 46. ff 
retertus, w. Gen., 39. 1; with Abl., 

87.1 
Reflexive Pronouns, 284—287; in de- 
pendent sentences, 285, 286; in Oratio 

Obllqua, 282. V* 
reformidare ; w. Ace, 50. a; w. 

Object Inf., 250 
Refusing, Verbs of with ne, 194; with 

qiiin, 204; with qiioiiiiiiiis, 

202 
Relative Clauses, 165; w. Indie, 232; 

w. Subj., 232—238; in parenthesis, 

139. 2; in Oratio Obllqua, 283; depen- 



dent upon Conditional, 238. 1; upon an 
Infin. or Subj., 238; expressing the 
Thought of some other person, 237; of 
Cause, Concession, their sequence of 
tenses, 168. 1 

Relative Pronouns, 137—140; in prin- 
cipal and dependent sentences, 140; w. 
q^uisqjue, 145. 1; agreeing w. Ap- 
position, 23. 2; w. Predie Noun, 24; 
w. Antecedent, 23; in restrictive sense, 
24; w. combined persons, 24. 2; with 
true Antecedent, 24.1; w.Antecedents 
of different gender, 23. 4; requiring 
Abl. of Comparison, 84. 1; gender and 
number determined by the sense, 23.2; 
instead of Demonstratives, 139; with 
Subj. in Oratio Obllqua, 283 

relinqLiiere, w. two Ace, 58; with 
Gerund, 316 

relIqLU.iim, w. Part. Gen., 35; relt- 
quum est, w. ut, 191 

reliquns, to denote a part, 122 

Remembering, Verbs ot, w. Gen., 41 

Reminding, Verbs of, w. Gen., 41; w. de, 
41.1 

reminisci, w. Gen., 41 

removere, w. Abl., 88 

reniti, w. Dat., 64 

reperire, w. two Ace, 58. 1; reperi- 
unturqui, w. Subj., 236; reperior 
w. Norn. & Inf., 263. 3 

repose Sre, w. two Ace, 60 

Representing i Verbs of, w. Pres. Part., 
301.1 

repugnare, w. Dat., 64; w. ne, 
194 

res, w. Adject., instead of Neuter Ad- 
ject., 120.1 

resipSre,w. Ace, 50b 

resistere, w. Dat., €4; w. ne, 194; 
w. quoiiiliiiis, 202 

Resolving, Verbs of, w. lit, 255. 1 

respondere, w. lit, 193. 4 

Responsive?, 279, 280 

responsum, w. Adverb, 116 

restat, w. lit, 191 

Result, clauses of, 188, 195; expressed 
by a Relative Clause, £33 

Retarding, Verbs of, with ad and Ge- 
rund, 313. 2 



~~ 229 



retineri non possum quin, 204 

reum facere, with Gan., 43 

rex, in Abl. Absol., 305 

Rhetorical Questions, 2T7. 1; take 

quisquam, ullus, 143. 1; in 

oratlo obliqua, 283. Ill 
Rhythm, 370; Rhythmical Feet, 371, 372 
ridere, with Ace, 50. a 
i*itu, Abl. of Manner, 82. 1 
rogare, with two Ace, 60, 61; alT- 

quem sententlam, 62. 2; with ut, 193 
Roman Dates, changed into English, 

404 
ruuis, with Gen., 39; with to, 39. 1 
rus, construed like name of town, 97 

.©. 
sacer, with Gen., 65. 7 
saevus, with Prep., 65. 3 
salutaris, with Dat., 65 
saluti esse, 73. a 
sane, Responsive, 279; sane quidem, 

274 
sapere, with Ace, 50. b 
satis, with Partit Gen., 36 
satisfacere, with Dat, 64. 1 
Saying, Verbs of, with Ace & Inf., 255; 
with ut, 255. 1; with impersonal con- 
struction, 263. 1 
scelus est, with Ace & Inf., 254 
scilicet, 325. 1 
scire, with Object Inf., 250; with 

Ace & Inf., 255; scito for sci, 240, 1 
sciscitari, its construction, 62 
scril>ere, with Ace & Inf., 255; 
with tit, 193. 4; sorx"bor, with 
Nom. & Inf., 263. 3; scribendo adesse, 
312 
se, in Compound Verbs with Abl., 88. 3 
secern^re, with Abl., 86. 3 
secundum, 92 
secus, with ac or quam, 320. 7 
sed, 324. 2; sed tamen, 324. 7 
segregare, with Abl., 86. 3 
sejungere, with Abl., 86. 3 
Selecting, Verbs of, with Dat., or ad, 

58.7 
senex, in Abl. Absol., 305 
Sentences, of Result, sequence of tenses, 



sententla, Abl. of Limitation, 80.3 

sexitire, with Ace & Inf., 255 

separare, with Abl., 86. 3 

Separation, Abl. of, 86 

Sequence of Tenses, 164—176; in oratio 
obliqua, 283. 1; w. Comparative Con- 
junctions, 230; afterVerbs with future 
character, 176. 1; in Relative Clauses, 
168.1; dependent on Infinitives,Partic, 
Gerund & Supine, 173; in Compound 
Sentences, 172; after Present w. force 
of Perfect, 170. 1; alter Historical Pre- 
sent, 170: in Clauses of Result, 168 

sequitur, w. ut, 91 

aliquem sessum recipere, 317. 1 

Sestertius, sestertium, 408, 409 

Short Vowels, 331 

si, 218; denoting iterative action, 161; 
followed by quis, 142. 1; si or ut 
si w. Perf. Subj., 221.2; si viue- 
tur, 263. 2; si minus, sin minus, 
224. 1; si modo, 219; si non, 
218, 223, 224; si quidem, with 
Indie, 216 

sic, w. ut, 190 

sicut, sicxiti, w. Indie, 231; in ab- 
breviated comparisons, 231. 1 

signifloare, w. two Ace, 58.1 

silentio, Abl. of Manner, 81.1 

simllis, w. Dat., 65; w. Gan. or Dat, 
65. 4; similis, similiter, w. ac, at- 
que, 320. 7 

simulac, simulatque, w. Hist Perf. 
160; to denote iterative action, 161 

sin, 220, 222; sin minus, sin 
aliter, 229. 1 

sine, 93; w. quisquam, ullus, 143; 
never takes Gerund, 314. 2 

sinere, w. Ace & Inf., 259. c; in the 
Pa33., 259. c 

Singular used for Plur., 113 

siquiciem, w. Indie, 216 

sitiens, w. Gen., 40 

sitire, w. Ace., 50.b 

sive, 322; vel si, 322. 1; sive. . 
sive, w. Ind., 180, 327. II. 

Small islands, construction, 96 

so-called, qui dicltur, 297. 2 

solere, w. Object int., 250 

solito, Abl. of Comparison, 84 3 



250 — 



solitus, w. force of Pres., 293. 1 

solus, in Appos., 21 

solvere, w. Abl., 86, 86. 2; solvendo 
non esse, 312 

Space, 101 

spatium, w. Abl., 102. 1 

sx>e, Abi. of Comparison, 84.3 

Speaker, first mentioned, 16. 1 

id spectare, w. u.t, 193 

sperare, w. Ace. & Inf. y 255; to trust 
w. any Inf., 255. 4; Periphrastic form 
ofFut. Inf, 257.1 

spes est, w. Ace & Inf., 254 

spoliare, w. Abl., 87 

Spondaic Hexameter, 384 

Square Measure, 411 

Stanza, 396; of Horace, 397 

stare, w. Abl., 85; stat per me quoml- 
nus, 202. 2 

statuere, w. Inf., 193. 1; w. Object 
Inf., 250; its construction, 266; w. in 
and Abl., 99 

Strophe, see Stanza 

studere, w. Dat , 64; w. Inf., 193. 1; 
w. Dat. Gerundive, 312 

studiosus, w. Gen., 39 

suadere, w. Dat., 63; w. vit, 193 

su o, 94; in compounds w. Dat., 69 

subesse, w. Dat., 69 

subire, w. Ace., 53 

Subject, 2. 3; and Predicate, 2—16; 
omitted, 3. 1; its Case, 5; its position 
in compound sentences, 160. 3; two or 
more Subjects, 12;-of the same gender, 
13; of different gender, 14, 15; of diffe- 
rent persons, 16; in Abl. Absol., 302; 
two Subjects in Ace. & Inf., 266 

Subject Infinitive, 249 

Subjective Genitive, 27; denoting property 
44; Subjective and Objective Gen. con- 
nected, 28. 1 

subjioere, w. Dat., 69 

Subjunctive, its uses, 181 — 239; used in- 
dependently, 181; in dependent clauses 
after conjunctions, 165, 187—239; in 
indirectquestions,239; in relative clau- 
ses, 232- 238; in oratio obllqua, 282, 
283; denoting future action, 162. 1; of 
the Futures, 174— 176; following the 
tense on which it immediately depends 



172; of Attraction, 238; of 2nd person, 
180; for Imperative, 242. 4; or Ace. & 
Inf., 193. 3; Potential, 182; Optative, 
183; Hortatory, 184; Concessive, 185; 
Dubitative, 186 
Subordination of Sentences, 164 
su.osid.io venire, 73. c 
Substantives, their special uses, 110— 
117; Substantive Attribute, 17. 1; 18. 1; 
Substantive Predicate, 4, 9; Sub- 
stantiva mo"bIlia/, 9; in the 
Gen. for Adjectives, 121.1; in Abl. Ab- 
sol., 305; w. est, governing Ace. & 
Inf., 254; replaced by Participle or Ge- 
rundive, 298, 309; expressed by Parti- 
ciples, 297. 2 
suTrter, 94 
succens6re, w. Dat., 64; w. Ace. 

& Inf., 261 
succunibere, w. Dat., 69 
sui, si"bi, se, w. quisque, 145. 1; in 

Oratio obllqua, 282. V 
sumere, w. two Ace., 58 
summum, used adverbially, 56 
summus, to denote a part, 122 
sunt qui, w. Subj.,236; = nonnulli, 

w. Indie., 236. 2 
super, 94; in Compounds w. Dat., 69 
superbus,w. Abl., 77 
Superlative, peculiar uses, 124 — 127; of 
Eminence,125; inRelativeClause,138.1; 
comparing more than two Objects, 127; 
strengthened, 125. 3; w. Partit. Gen., 
33; in the Pred., 8. 2; w. Proper Names 
125.1 
supersedere, w. Abl., 86 
Supine, its use, 317. 318; in Ace. & Inf., 
252; in Sequence of tenses, 173; Sn- 
pineless Verbs, their Fut. Inf., 257 
supplicare, w. Dat., 64. 1 
supra. 92; w. Abl. of Measure, 83 
Surname, added to Proper Name, 123 
suscipere, w. Gerundive, 316 
suspicari, w. Ace. & Inf., 255 
suus, its use, 284.2 
Swearing, Verbs of, with Fut. Inf., 

255.4 
Syllaba anceps, 378 
Synaeresis, 360 
Syncope, 363 



— 231 



Synopsis of Gerund and Gerundive Con- 
structions, 314. 3 
Systole, 365 



taedLet, w. Ace. & Gen., 45; w. Subj. 
Inf., 248 

Taking, Verbs of, w.Dat. or ad, 58. 7 

talis, w. tit, 190; talis qui, w. Subj., 
236; talis, .qualis, 320. 9 

tarn, w. Relat., 236; w. \xt, 190; tarn, 
tantopere, quam, 320. 9 

tamen, 324. 7; in conditional sen- 
tences, 224 

tamquam, tamquam si, 230; with 
Partic., 230. 2; in abbreviated com- 
parison, 231. 1; in Appos., 20 

tanti, Gen. of Value, 42. 1; 85.1 

tantldem, Gen. of Value, 85. 1 

tanto, altero tanto, Abl. of Measure, 83 

tantopSre, w. nt, 190 

tantum, tantundem, w.Partit. Gen., 
35 

tantixm aoest vtt, 191. 1 

taut us, w. \it, 190; tantus qui, w. 
Subj., 236; tantus quantus, 320. 9; in 
Ace. & Inf., 266 

tarcLare, w. ad and Gerund, 313. 2 

Taste, Smell, Verbs of, w. Ace, 50. b 

Teaching, Verbs of, w. two Ace , 59 

teggre, w. Abl., 79. 5 

temperare, its construction, 68; 
temperatum est, to replace the Perf. 
Pass, of parcere, 64.5; temperare mihi 
non possum quin, 204 

Temporal Conjunctions, w. Indie, 158; 
w. Subj., 205—210; to denote itera- 
tive action, 161 

tempus est, w.Inf. or tzt, 311.2; est 
tempus cum, w. Subj., 206. 4; in tem- 
pore, at the right time, 103. 3; tempo- 
rlbus alicujus, 103. 2 

tenax, w. Gen., 39. 2 

tenere se castris, 79. 5; w. quo- 
mliitis, 202; w. Partic, 293.2 

Tenses, their distinction, 147—156; of 
the Indie, 158-163; of the Subj., 164- 
176; in dependent Clauses, 158—176; of 
the Infin., 173, 246; in Letter-writing, 
154. 1 



ten. tare, w. si, not w. Infin. , 275. 1 
terms, 93 

terra marique, 98; terrarum, 
Gen. w. Adverbs, 37 

testimonio, Abl. of Limitation, 
80. 3; testimonio esse, 73. a 

testis, in Abl. Ab3ol., 3—5 

Tetrameter, 374; Tetrastich, 396 

that and those, not expressed in Latin, 
133 

Thinking, Verbs of, w. Ace. & Inf., 255; 
w. ut, 255. 1 

Threatening, Verbs of, with Frit. Infin., 
255. 4; Subject to be expressed, 264. 1 

Time, 103-109; denoted by concrete sub- 
stantives, 110; when in the Abl., 103; 
in w. Abl., 103. 1; how long, in the 
Ace, 104; expressed by Gen. of Qua- 
lity, 104. 2; for how long, 108; how 
long since, 107; within which, 106 

timere, its construction, 68; w. ut 
or ne, 195 

Titles, to express Time (consul &c.),110 

Tmesis, 367 

too, expressed by Compar., 124 

tot, w. tit, 190; tot, totidem. .quot, 
320.9 

totiens quotiens, 320. 9; tottens, w. 
lit, 190 

tot lis, in Apposition, 21; w. names of 
towns, 96. 3; toto, tota, without 
in, 98 

Towns, Names of, 96 

tradSre, w. Gerundive, 316; tradt- 
tum est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254, 263; tra- 
ditur, w. Norn. & Inf., 262 

trans, 92; in Compounds w. Ace, 52; 
repeated w. transducere,&c, 52. 1 

transduc§re, w. two Ace, 52. 1 

transire modum, 53 

Transitive Verbs in Latin, Intransitive in 
English, 50 

transjicSre, trajice"re,w. two Ace, 
52.1 

tresvirl, w. Dat. Gerund., 312 

tri onSre, w. Dat. of Purpose, 73 

Trimeter, 374; Iambic, 392 

Tristich, 396 

Trochaic Strophe, 397. 18 

lYoops, considered as means, 79.2 



— 232 — 



Tropical meaning of compound Verbs, 

53 
Trying, Verbs of, take si, 275.1 
tui, Femin., w. Gerundive, 311. 1 
turn, in Oratio obliqua, 283.2 
tux^pis, w. Dat., 65; w. Supine, 318; 

turpe est, w. Ace. & Inf., 254 
Two Qualities compared, 126 
Two Subjects in Ace. & Inf., 266 

XJ. 

uoi, ubicunque, w. Partit. Gen., 37 

u oi, ubi prknum, w. Historical Perf., 
160; to denote iterative action, 161; 
ubicunque, to denote iterative action, 
161 

ullxis, 143; w. Partit. Gen., 34; in 
Rhetorical Questions, 277. 1 

ultlmus, in Appos., 21; to denote a 
part, 122 

ultra, 92; w. Abl. of Measure, 83 

ultum ire, 317. 1 

Uncertainty, Yerbs of, w. quin, 204 

Unit of measure, in verse, 369 

unquam, in Rhetorical Questions, 
277.1 

Unreal Conditions, 220. Ill; w. Ind'c, 
221. 3; independent of the sequence oi 
tenses, 221. 4; in Ace. & Inf., 266 

unus, in Appos., 21; w. ex or cle, 
38. 2; unus omnium, w. Superlat., 
125.3 

unusquisque, 145 

ur os, in Apposition w. names of toivns 
98. 3. 4. 5 

Uses of Pronouns, 128. ff 

usquam, w. Partit. Gen., 37 

usque adeo, usque eo, w. ut, 
190 

usu venit, w. ut, 191 

usus, w. force of Present, 293. 1 

ut, w. Subj., 189, 225; ut (uti), w. 
Indie, 231; to introduce an example, 
231. 2; in Apposition, 20. 1; in abbre- 
viated comparative sentences, 231. 1; 
ut qui, w. Subj., 234. 1; in oratio 
obliqua, 283.11.; omitted, 193. 5; ut 
non,w. Subj., 196,197; ut nemo 
200; ut nou, to express without, 
314. 2; ut ne = lie, 198; ut si, 230 



ut prlmum, w. Hist. Present or 

Perf., 160 
uter, w. Partit. Gen., 34 
uterque, w. Partit. Gen., 34; its 

construction, 38. 4 
uti, w. Abl., 90; special uses, 90. 1; in 

Gerundive construction, 315. 3 
utilis, w. Dat., 65; w. ad, 65. 3; w. 

Supine, 318 
utinam, w. Optative, 183 
xitpote qui, w. Subj., 234. 1 
utrum. .an, 271, 276 



vacare, w. Dat., 66. 1; w. Abl., 87 

vacuus, w. Abl., 87. 1 

vae, in exclamations, 55. 1 

valere, w. ad, 250. 3 

Valuing, Yerhs of, w. Gen., 42 

-ve, 322, to continue the negation, 323 

vehi, w. Abl., 79. 5 

vel, 322; used adverbially, 323.2; vel. . 
vel, 327.11; vel, in disjunct, questions, 
276.1; vel si. .vel si, 327.11. 

velle, w. Object Inf., 250; w. Inf., 
193. 1; w. Ace & Inf., 259; in Ace & 
Inf., 266. 1; velim,w. Subj. forlm- 
perat, 242.1; velim, w. Optat. Subj., 
183.1, volote, 68. 1 

velut, w. Partic, 230. 2; to intrcduce 
an example, 231. 2; velut si, 230 

vendere, venire, w. Abl., 85 

venire, becomes Transitive when 
compounded, 52; w. Dat. of Purpose, 
73. c; w. Supine, 317; venit mihi in 
mentem,4i. 3 

Verba aiTectuum, w. Ace. & Inf., 261; 
sentieudi et declarandi, w. Ace. & Inf., 
255, 256; studii et voluntatis, w. ut, 
193 

Verbal Predicate, 4. 6 

Verbs, Syntax of, 147—315; Copulative, 
w. two Norn., 10; Verbs of Reminding, 
Forgetting, w. Gen., 41; of Accusing, 
Convicting, w. Gen., 43; of Valuing, w. 
Gen., 42; of Naming, Making, &c, w.- 
twoAcc, 58; of Asking, Demanding, 
&c, w. two Ace, 60—62; of Teaching, 
w. two Ace, 59; of Taste, Smell, w. 
Acc,50.b; of Feeling, w.Acc, 50.a;w. 



233 



Ace. & Inf., 261; w. quod, 261; of 

Benefitting, Pleasing, Obeying, &c. w. 
Dat. , 64; of Giving and Putting, w. Dat. 
& Ace, 70; of Buying and Selling, w. 
Abl., 85; of Removing, Abstaining, w. 
Abl., 88; of J Plenty and Want, Filling 
and Depriving w. Abl., 87; of Placing, 
w. in & Abl.,99; of Arriving, As- 
sembling, w. in & Ace, 100; of Will- 
ing, Wishing, Warning, w. ut & ne, 
193, w. Ace. & In£, 259; of Fearing, 
w. ut or ne, 195; of Hindering, w. 
quonxlnus, 202; w. ad & Ge- 
rund, 313. 3; of Emotion, w. Ace. & 
Inf., 261; w. quod, 215; Auxiliary 
Verbs, to be able, &c, w. Object Inf., 
250; of Bewaring, w. ne, 194; of 
Blaming & Praising, Congratulating, 
w. quod, 281. 1; of Commanding & 
Urging, w. ut, 193; of Declaring, w. 
Ace. &Inf., 255; of Doubt, w. quin, 
204; of Happening, w. quod, 212; 
of Omitting, w. quin, 204; of Op- 
posing, w. ne and quommus, 
194; ofPerceking, w. Ace & Inf.. 255; 
w. Pres.Partic., 255.2; 301. 1; of Per- 
mitting and Allowing, w. ut or ne, 
193; of Preventing,!?, ne, 194; quo- 
minus, 202; quin, 204; of Re- 
presenting, w. Pres.Partic, 301. 1; of 
Resolving, w. ut, 194; of Retarding, 
w. ad. and Gerund, 313. 2; of Saying, 
w. Ace & Inf., 255; w.ut, 255.1; im- 
personal, 263. 1 

vereri, w. Object Inf., 250; w. ut 
or ne, 195; w. Inf., 195. 2 

Veri simile est, w. Ace & Inf. , 
254 

veritus, Perf. Partie, w. force of 
Present, 293. 1 

vero, 324. 4; Responsive, 279 

Versification, 368—398 

■versus, 92 

vertere, w. Dat. of Purpose, 73. b 

ver\xiu, 324. 5; verum enimvero, 
324. 5 

verum. est, w. Ace & Inf., 254 



vesci, w. Abl., 90; in Gerundive con- 
struction, 315. 3 

vestri, vestrum, 28.3 

vetare, w. Ace, 64.b; w. Ace & Inf 
193. 2; 259; w. Act. Inf., 259. 1 

vi, vi et armis, Abl. of Means, 81. 1 

via et ratione, 81. 1 

vicinus, used asSubstant, 65. 1 

videlicet. 325. 1 

videre, w. Ace & Inf., 255; w. Pres. 
Partie, 301. 1; 255. 2; videro, for 
videbo, 156. 1; videres, Potential Subj., 
182; videre, w. ut, 193; vide ne, 
194.2 

videri, w. two Nom., 10; w. Norn. & 
Inf., 262; in Ace & Inf., 259; mini vi- 
deor, w. Inf., 263. 2; videtur, used im- 
personally, 263. 2; personally or im- 
personally in Oratio Obliqua, 263. 4; 
videtur mihi, w. Subject Inf., 248 

visu, 318 

vivere, w. Ace, 51. a 

vix, w. Indie, in unreal conditions, 
221. 3; 180. 2; followed by quis- 
quam, uIItls, 143 

viix: me contineo quin, 204 

vocare,w. two Ace, 58 

Vocative, in exclamations, 55. 1.4 

volens, in Apposition, 21 

voluntate, Abl. of Manner, 81. 1 

W. 

Way, by which, in the Abl., 98 

Week, 408 

Weight, 412 

Whole of a thing not expressed by Part. 

Gen., 38. 3 
Will and Desire, Yerbs of, w. Ace & Inf., 

259 
Willing or Demanding, , Verbs of, w. ut, 

193.4 
without, expressed by nullo, Abl. of 

Manner, 82. 2; other ways to express it 

314.2 



year, Date of, 399, 405 



STEIGER'S French Series. 



AHN'S French Primer. By Dr. P. 

Henn. Boards $0.25. (Great care has been 
bestowed upon the typographical execu- 
tion of this little book, the perplexing 
difficulty of the silent letters being allevi- 
ated by the use of distinguishing 

®THl4MlEl(B and hairline type. 

AHN'S French Reading Charts. 20 
Plates with Hand-book for Teachers. By 
Dr. P. Henn. $1.00. (These Wall Charts are 
printed in very large type, the silent 

letters being shown by ©TIEMUM® 
type cut expressly for the purpose.) 
The same. The 20 Plates mounted on 10 
Boards. $3.75 net. Mounted on 10 boards 
and varnished. $5.00 net. 

{AHN'S French. Primer and 

French Reading Charts may be 

advantageously used as an introductory 

course to any French Grammar.) 
AHN'S Practical and Easy Method 
of Learning the French Lan- 
guage. By Dr. P. Henn. First Course. 
(Comprising a fundamental Treatise on 
French Pronunciation, French and En- 
glish Exercises, Paradigms, and Vocabu- 
laries.) Boards $0.40. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net. 

AHN'S Practical and Easy Meth- 
od of Learning the French Lan- 
guage. By Dr. P. Henn. Second Course. 
(Comprising a Series of French and En- 
glish Exercises, Conversations, Elements 
of French Grammar with Index, and full 
Vocabularies. . Boards $0.60. 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net. 

AHN'S Practical and Easy Meth- 
od of Learning the French Lan- 
guage. By Dr. P. Henn. First and 
Second Courses, bound together. Half 
Roan $1.00. 

AHN'S Elements of French Gram- 
mar. By Dr. P. Henn. Being the Second 
Part of AHN-HENNS Practical 
and Easy Method of Learning the 
French Language. — Second Course- 
printed separately. Boards $0.35 

AHN'S First French Reader. With 
Foot-notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. 
Henn. Boards $0.60; Half Roan $0.80. 

[♦These Keys will be supplied to teachers only upon their direct application 
to the publishers.] \ 

E. Steiger & Co., 25 Park Place, New York. 



AHNS First French Reader. Wtth 
Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. 
Boards $0.60; Half Roan $0.80. 

These two editions of one and the same 
book differ solely in the typographical 
arrangement of Text and Notes. In the 
latter the Notes are given separately on 
the pages following the 75 pieces of Text; 
in the former each page has at its bottom 
exactly so much of the Notes as is needed 
to explain the French Text above. In 
respect to Vocabulary, etc., both editions 
are alike. 

*Key to AHN'S First French Read- 
er. By Dr. P. Henn. Boards $0.30 net. 

AHN'S Second French Reader. With 
Foot-notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. 
Henn. Boards $0.80; Half Roan $1.00. 

AHN'S Second French Reader. 
With Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. 
Henn. Boards $0.80; Half Roan $1.00. 

*Key to AHN'S Second French 
Reader. By Dr. P. Henn. Bds $0.40 net 

AHN'S French Dialogues. Dramatic 
Selections with Notes. Number One. 
(Specially suitable for young ladies.) 
Boards $0.30; Cloth $0.40. 

AHN'S French Dialogues. Dramatic 
Selections with Notes. Number Two. 
(Specially suitable for young gentlemen.) \ 
Boards $0.25; Cloth $0.35. 

AHN'S French Dialogues. Dramatic' 
Selections with Notes. Number Three. « 
(Specially suitable for young ladies.} 
Boards $0.30; Cloth $0.40. 

Additional volumes of this Series ol 
French Dialogues, which fully meet 
the requirements of advanced students 
are in press, and will shortly be published. 

AHN'S Manual of French Conver- 
sation. In press. 

AHN'S French Letter- writer. 
In press. 

Collegiate Course. 1 * 

C. A. SCHLEGEL. A French Gram- 
mar. For beginners. Half Roan $1.50. 

C. A. SCHLEGEL. A Classical 
French Reader. With Notes and 
Vocabulary. Half Roan $1.20. 



i 






STEIGER'S Latin Series. 



AHN'S Practical and Easy Latin 
Method. With Latin-English and Eng- 
lish-Latin Vocabularies. By Dr. P. Henn. 
Half Roan, $1.80 
Also separately: 

AHN'S First Latin Book.* (Rules and 
Exercises mainly on Nominal Inflection). 
By Dr. P. Henn. Boards, $0.60; Cloth,$0.70 

AHN'S Second Latin Book* (Rules 
and Exercises mainly on Verbal Inflection.) 
By Dr. P. Henn. Boards, $0.80; Cloth, $0.90 

AHN'S Third Latin Book* (Rules and 
Exercises on Syntax and Latin Composi- 
tion.) By Dr. P. Henn. Boards, $0.80; 
Cloth, $0.90 , 

AHN'S Latin Grammar. By Dr. P. 
Henn. With References to the Exercises 
in the First, Second, and Third Latin Books. 
Boards, $0.80; Cloth, $0.90 



Gram 
By Dr. 



Boards, $0.60; 
Boards, $0.80; 
Boards, $0.80 



AHN'S New Latin Manual. 
mar, Exercises, and Vocabularies. 
P. Henn. Half Roan, $2.00 
Also separately: 

First Course. 

Cloth, $0.70 

Second Course. 

Cloth, $0.90 

> — Third Course. 

Cloth, $0.90 

(This is AHN-HENN'S Latin Gram- 
mar, with part of the Exercises from the 
First, Second, and Third Latin Books, ar 
ranged under the corresponding rules. 
AHN'S Complete Latin Syntax. By 
Dr. P. Henn. Half Roan, $ 

This Syntax is very complete; it states 
every matter clearly, and in connection 
with an extensive collection of exercises 
under the title: 

AHN'S Latin Prose Composition. 
| By Dr. P. Henn. Boards, $ 

is calculated to meet all the require 
\ ments even for a six years' collegiate 
/ course in Latin. These two books can 
be profitably used in connection with 
the above mentioned AHN HENN or 
any other Latin Course, 



AHN-HENN'S First Latin Reader. 
(De septem regibm Romanorum, from Livy.) 
With Notes, Vocabulary, and References. 
(To be used, the second year, with the 
Second Latin Book.) Boards, $0.70; Cloth, 
$0.80 

AHN-HENN'S SecondLatinReader. 

(Selections from Justinus, Cesak, Cicero, 
and Ph^drus.) With Notes, Vocabulary, 
and References. (To be used, the third 
year, with the Third Latin Book.) Boards, 
$0.80; Cloth, $0.90 

These two Latin Readers, bound to- 
gether in one volume. Half Roan, $1.50 



AHN'S Short Latin Course. By Dr. 
P. Henn. Containing: I. Essentials of 
Latin Grammar. II. Parallel Exercises, 
with Vocabularies. III. Reading Lessons, 
with Vocabulary. Half Roan, $1.20 
Also separately: 

Number One. Boards, $0.60 ; 

Cloth, $0.70 

Number Two. Boards, $0.G0; 

Cloth, $0.70 

(This book is intended for a one 
year's or a two years' course in Latin 
for those who cannot devote more time 
to its study.) 



Graded Se- 
With Notes 



AHN'S Latin Delectus. 

lections from Latin Authors, 
and Vocabulary. Boards, $ 

AHN'S Latin Vocabulary for Be- 
ginners. Methodical and Etymological. 
With a Collection of Latin Proverbs and 
Quotations. By Dr. P. Henn. (To be used 
with the First and Second Latin Books, or 
independently.) Boards, $0.60; Cloth, $0.70 

AHN'S Latin Wall Charts. By Dr. 
P. Henn. 22 Plates, in Sheets, $1.50; 
mounted on 22 Boards, $6.00. (To be used 
in connection with any Latin Series.) 

* The Keys to the First, Second, and 
Third Latin Hooks ("price $0.40 net, each), 
intended as aids in dictation exercises, etc., 
will be supplied to teachers only upon 
their direct application to the publishers. 



J@* Latin Texts, without Notes, at very low prices. 

(Teubner's Editions.) 

Caesar. — Catullus. — Cicero. — Cornelius Nepos. — Curtius Rufus. — Hora- 
tius. — tfuvenalis. — Idvius. — Lucretius. — Ovidius. — Persius. — Phasdrus. — 
Rlautus. — Rlinius. — Quintilianus. — Sallustius. — Tacitus. — Terentius. — 
Vergilius. 

For prices of these and of the other Latin books published by Teubner, see 
Steiger's Catalogue. 



A New Dictionary of the Latin and English Languages. (Latin-English and English- 
Latin.) With an Appendix of Latin Geographical, Historical and Mythological 
Proper Names, 16mo. Cloth, $0.85 



%nvgc Stock. low {prices. 

Importers anb booksellers, ipubUsIjers anb printers, 
25 JW£ Pace, Hw UorL 



tn alt iuprtments. 

littikruftrteu < 

! Witeratune, jgjifts, and jgatenial. 

ICarp ^tatfe of 6*nmw §001*0 at Reduced prices, 

in nil languages anb departments procured promptln fat (Europe, f 



©lobes, lermtmt ml jfetestiat; 

§aj>s, $elM anil Plata? $tlase$, feltucians, #f, 

Books ano periobtcals 7 

either supplied at once, or imported within the shortest possible time 
from Germany, Austria, Switzerland, England, France, Spain, Portwd, 
Italy, Belgium, Holland, Denmark, Sweden, Russia, and other counSes. 
Direct Connections. Orders forwarded by Cable, if necessary.! 

Particular altention is invited to the large number of Stelger's Catalogues and 
£2 Lists of Books and Periodicals in all Departments. 



jTAa AHJf-HENN German, 1 



A TIN-HENN'S German, Heading Charts. 

'25 Plates with Hand-book for Teachers. 
gl.OO. — The 25 Plates mounted on 13| 
boards, $4.50 net. Varnished $6.00 net. 

Complete, Method of the German 

Language. Half Roan $1.75 

Also separately: 
• First German Bool*. Boards $0.25 

Second German Book. Boards $0.45 

These two books together form: 

AHN-lfENN'S Rudiments of the 
G -rnian Languatfe. First Course. 
Boards $0.G5, Half Roan $0.80 
* Key to same. Boards $0.25 net 

Third German Booh. Boards' $0.45 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net . 

Fourth German Book, Boards $0.60 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net 

AHN-HENN'S Rudiments of tin 
German Language. Second Course. 
(Being the Thirda^d. Fourth German 
Books together.) Boards U.00, Hah 
Roan $1.25 

Synopsis of German Grammar. 

Boards $0.60, Half Roan &0;80 

First German Reorder. With^sotes 

and Vocabulary. Boards £0. HO, Half Roan 
$o.80< — With Foot-notes and Vocabulary. 
Boards $0.60, Half Roan $0.c0 

* K ey to same. Boards $0.30 net 

Second German Reader. With 

Notes and Vocabulary. Boards $1.00, Half 
Roan $1.20. —With Foot-notes and "\ > 
cabulary. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.20 

*Key to same. Boards $0.50 net 



LIBRARY OF 



^cniTJsgS. 



CONGRESS 




003 039 944 



A IIN-HENN'S Freu< h Prt tncr. Bds.$0.2r 

■ French Reading Charts. 20 Plates 

with Hand-book for Tea hers. $1.00. — 
The 20 Plates mounted on 10 boards $3.75 
net. Mounted on 10 boards and varnished 
$5.00 net 
(AHN-HENN'S French Primer and 
French Reading Charts may be ad- 
vantageously used as an introductory 
course to any Frencli Gramniar.) 

Practical and Easy Method of 

Learning the French Language. 
Half Roan $1.00 

Also separately: 
■ First Course. Boards $0.40 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net 
Second Course. Boards $0.G0 

*Key to same. Boards $0.25 net 

First French Reader. With Notes 

and Vocabulary. Boards $0.C,0, Ha] p Roan 
$0.80. — With Foot-notes andVocabulary. 
Boards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80 

*Key to same. Boards $0.30 net 

Second French Reader. With Notes 

and Vocabulary. Boards $0.80. Half Roan 
$1.00.— With Foot-notes and Vocabulary. 
Boards $0.80, Half Roan $1.00 

*Key to same. Boards $0.40 net 



cises mainlv on v erc/i*^«__ __ M 

$0.80, Cloth $0.90 

'Key to same. Boards $0.40 net 
TJiird Latin Book. (Rules and Exer- 
cises on Syntax and Latin Composition.) 
Boards $0.80, Cloth $0.90 

*Key to same. Boards $0.40 net 

Latin Grammar. With References 

to the Exercises in the' First,, Second, 
and Third Lathi Books. Boards $0.80, 
Cloth $0.90 

New Latin Manual. Grammar, Ex- 
ercises, and Vocabularies. Hah Roan, $2.00 
Also separately: 

. — First Course. Btfs. $0XO,( loth $0.70 

Second Course. Boards S0.80, 

Cloth, $0.90 

■ - — Third Course. Eds.$0.8UvCiptn$0.1 

(This is AHN-HENN'^ Latin Gram- 
mar, with part of the Exercises, from the 
First. Second, and Third Latin Books, ar- 
ranged under the corresponding rules.) 

Complete Latin Syntax, Boards $0.80. 

Cloth $0 90 

Majiw-l of Latin Prose Composition. 

Boards $0.50 
First Latin Reader. De sepiem regi- 
ons Romano rum, from Livy.) With Notes, 
Vocabulary, and Reieiej es. To be used 
with the Second Latin Book.) Boards 
$0.70, Cloth $0.80. 

Second Lat Reader. Selections 

from Justinus, C.*:sab, Cicero, and PHiE- 
DF.us.) With Notes, Vocabulary, and 
References. To be used with the Third 
Latin Book.) Boards $0*0, Cloth $0.90. 

Short Latin Course. (Essentials of 

Latin Grammar. — Parallel Exercises, with 
Vocabularies. — Reading Lessens, with 
Vocabulary.) Cloth $1.20 

Also separately. 

Number One. Boards $0.60, 

Cloth $0.70 

Number Two. Boards $0.60, 

Cloth $0.70 

Latin Vocabulary for Beginners, 

Methodical and Eti/mological. With a Col- 
lection of Latin Proverbs and Quotations. 
i To be used with the First and Second 
Latin Books.^ Boards £0.00. Cloth $0.70 

Latin Wall Chart*. 22 Plates, in 

sheets $1.50. — Mounted on 22 boards,. 
$6.00 net 

* The several Keys above enumerated 
will be supplied to Teachers only, upon 
their direct application to the Publishers. 



635 



E. Stei^er & Co., 25 Park Place, New York. 



